Mitsubishi 2015 Mirage Car User Manual

N09200102127

Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI MIRAGE.

We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered

for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly

reading this Owner’s Manual, you will gain an understanding of the

many features that are included in the MIRAGE. The Owner’s Manual

contains descriptions and illustrations that will assist in the operation

and maintenance of your vehicle.

Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you

with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of

your vehicle.

Please note that this manual applies to all MIRAGE models and

explains all features including options. Some features explained in this

manual may not be installed on your vehicle.

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale.

The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con-

tained here.

This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment

available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to

make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any

obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.

Introduction

This vehicle is manufactured by Mitsubishi Motors (Thailand) Co.,Ltd. in Thailand under

license from Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.

Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

appear.

These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the

instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehi-

cle.

Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if

instructions are not followed.

Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor

personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

You will see another important symbol:

NOTE Gives helpful information.

WARNING

 Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition,

certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-

nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Table of contents

Overview

Quick index

General information

Seat and restraint systems

Features and controls

Driving safety

Comfort controls

For emergencies

Vehicle care and maintenance

Customer assistance/

Reporting Safety Defects

Specifications

Alphabetical index

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Instruments and controls

1-1

Overview

N00100202629

Instruments and controls

Instrument cluster P.5-62

Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-77

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-74

Turn-signal lever P.5-76

Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-77

Wiper and washer switch P.5-78

Rear window wiper and washer switch P.5-79

Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) P.5-52

Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13

Ignition switch (if so equipped)

P.5-35

Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch

P.5-50

Electric remote-controlled outside rearview

mirror switch P.5-33

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air-

bag (for driver)

P.4-21, 4-27

Horn switch P.5-81

Steering wheel height adjust-

ment P.5-32

Steering wheel remote control switches (if so

equipped) P.5-83, 7-37

Supplemental restraint system-driver’s knee airbag

P.4-27

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Instruments and controls

Overview 1-2

Center vents P.7-2

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air-

bag (for front passenger) P.4-21, 4-27

Heater (if so equipped) P.7-4

Manual air conditioning (if so

equipped) P.7-7

Audio (if so equipped) P.7-18

Mitsubishi Multi Entertainment System

(if so equipped)

Refer to the separate “Mitsubishi Multi

Entertainment System owner’s manual”

Clock (if so equipped) P.7-24

Electric rear window defogger switch

P.5-80

Automatic air conditioning (if so

equipped) P.7-11

Side vents P.7-2

Glove compartment

P.5-108

Engine hood release lever P.9-4

Cup holder (for the front

seat) P.5-108

12 V power outlets

P.5-106

Electric rear window defogger switch

P.5-80

Key slot (if so equipped)

P.5-20

Gearshift lever (if so equipped) P.5-38

Selector lever (if so equipped) P.5-39

Fuel tank filler door release lever

P. 3- 3

Parking brake lever P.5-31

Cup holder (for the rear seat)

P.5-108

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Interior

1-3 Overview

N00100302343

Interior

Bottle holders P.5-108

Power window lock switch P.5-29

Microphone P.5-83

Sun visors P.5-105

Vanity mirror P.5-105

Card holder P.5-105

Power door lock switch (if so

equipped) P.5-26

Dome light P.5-106, 9-27

Inside rearview mirror P.5-32

Head restraints

P.4 -7

Power window switch P.5-29

Seat belts P.4-8

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-

curtain airbags P.4-32

USB input terminal (if so

equipped)

P.5-101

Manual window control

(if so equipped) P.5-28

Heated seats (if so

equipped) P.4-4

Cargo room light

P.5-107, 9-27

Front seats P.4-2

Supplemental restraint system

(SRS)-side airbag (for front seat)

P.4-31

Rear shelf panel (if so equipped)

P.5-109

Jack (if so equipped) P.8-5

Rear seats P.4-5

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Luggage area

Overview 1-4

N00100500455

Luggage area

Type 1 Type 2

Tether anchors for child restraint system

P.4-16

Tether anchors for child restraint system

P.4-16

Tools P.8-5

Spare wheel P.8-12

Tools P.8-5

Tire repair kit P.8-6

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Outside

1-5 Overview

N00100602535

Outside

Antenna P.7-41

Power window (if so equipped) P.5-29

Windshield wipers P.5-78

Outside rearview mirrors P.5-33

Side turn-signal lights (if so equipped)

P.9-26

Fuel tank filler P.3-3

Engine hood P.9-4

F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced

Security Transmitter) (if so equipped)

P. 5- 9

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

P. 5- 6

Locking and unlocking P.5-24

Side turn signal lights (if so equipped)

P.5-76, 9-26

Front side- marker lights

P.5-74, 9-26, 9-28

Front fog lights (if so equipped)

P.5-77, 9-26, 9-29

Front turn signal lights

P.5-76, 9-26, 9-28

Headlights/Daytime running lights (if so equipped)

P.5-74, 9-26, 9-27

Parking lights

P.5-74, 9-26, 9-29

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Outside

Overview 1-6

High-mounted stop light

P.9-26

Rear spoiler

Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)

P.5-56

Changing tires P.8-11

Size of tires and wheels

P. 11 - 5

Tire inflation pressure

P.9-14

Tire rotation P.9-16

Tire chains P.9-17

Rear window wiper and washer

P.5-79

Liftgate P.5-27

Rear side- marker lights/Tail and stop lights

P.9-26, 9-30

Rear-view camera

(if so equipped) P.5-60

Rear turn signal lights

P.5-76, 9-26, 9-30

Licence plate lights

P.9-26, 9-31

Back-up light P.9-26, 9-30

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

BK0212400US.book 7 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Quick index

N00200701136

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

NOTE

 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

Charging system warning light

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis-

tance.

P. 5-73

(Illuminates and intermittent sounds)

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis-

tance.

P. 5-15

Oil pressure warning light

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil

level.

If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked

at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon

as possible.

P. 5-73

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2-2 Quick index

Brake warning light

 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully

released.

 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check

the brake fluid level.

 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard

braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice for assistance.

P. 5-72

Selector lever position indicator in the

instrument cluster flasher rapidly

(once per second)

 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing.

If the indicator does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P. 5-42

Engine malfunction indicator

(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or

“Check engine light”)

 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the

engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency

roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-

4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local

towing company for assistance.

P. 5-72

Electric power steering system (EPS)

warning light

 If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the

steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P. 5-48

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Quick index 2-3

Anti-lock braking system warning

light

 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only

the ordinary braking system is functioning.

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Test the system as described on page 5-47.

 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that

you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P. 5-47

SRS warning light

 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

P. 4-27

Selector lever position indicator in the

instrument cluster flasher slowly

(every 2 seconds)

 Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P. 5-42

and

ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.

 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon

as possible.

 When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning.

P. 5-51

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2-4 Quick index

ASC indicator

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.

 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon

as possible.

 When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.

Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.

P. 5-46

Tire pressure monitoring system warn-

ing light (if so equipped)

 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper

inflation pressure as soon as possible.

(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-14.)

Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes

of driving.

 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-

ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-

mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the

vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

P. 5-56

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

If this problem occurs...

Quick index 2-5

N00200900870

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Unable to turn the key.

(except for vehicles equipped

with the F.A.S.T.-key)

From “ACC” to “OFF”

Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):

Check the position of the selector lever.

The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.

P. 5-35

The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.

(for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key)

Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.

Vehicles with manual transaxle:

Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down, and then press the engine switch while

depressing the brake pedal.

Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):

Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch

while depressing the brake pedal.

P. 5-16

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

ate.

(for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key)

Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the door.

Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the floor console, and then start the engine or

change the operation mode.

P. 5-19

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

If this problem occurs...

2-6 Quick index

Cannot shift the selector lever

from the “P” (PARK) position.

(for vehicles with continuously

variable transmission (CVT))

Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.

Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.

P. 5-39

The windows are fogged up.

Vehicles equipped with the heater without air conditioning function or the manual air

conditioning:

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position.

2. Turn on the blower.

Vehicles equipped with the automatic air conditioning:

Push the defogger switch to change the “ ” mode.

P. 7-6, 7-10,

7-13

The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.

The lights are dim.

The horn does not honk.

The horn sound is weak.

Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.

P. 8-2,

P. 9-10

The high coolant temperature

warning light is illuminates.

Steam comes out of the engine

compartment.

The engine is overheated.

Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.

P. 8-4

Problem Do this Ref. Page

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

If this problem occurs...

Quick index 2-7

The vehicle is stuck in sand,

mud or snow

Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. P. 8-18

WARNING

 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to

suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.

 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.

If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

Problem Do this Ref. Page

The brakes are not functioning

properly after crossing a puddle

or stream.

Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P. 6-5

The continuously variable trans-

mission (CVT) makes no shift

change when accelerating. The

initial movement of the vehicle

is slow when the vehicle starts

moving.

(for vehicles with CVT)

There may be a problem in the CVT.

Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of

your choice.

P. 5-42

A tire is punctured.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.

2. If your vehicles equipped with the tire repair kit, repair the flat tire with tire repair kit.

If your vehicles equipped with the spare tire, replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

P. 8-6,

P. 8-11

Problem Do this Ref. Page

BK0212400US.book 7 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

BK0212400US.book 8 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

General information

Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2

Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6

California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Fuel selection

3-2 General information

N00301000912

Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas-

oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank

filler pipe specifically designed to accept only

a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens-

ing nozzle.

In the United States, fuel suppliers are

required by law to add detergents to their gas-

oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and

minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent

gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission-control system working prop-

erly.

Your vehicle is designed to operate on

unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane

number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.

Gasoline sold at some service stations con-

tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although

the oxygenates may not be identified by those

names. Oxygenates are required in some

areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in

your vehicle.

A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-

hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used

in your vehicle, provided the octane number

is at least as high as that recommended for

unleaded gasoline.

Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-

taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this

type of alcohol could adversely affect the

vehicle’s performance and damage critical

parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.

Many areas of the country require the use of

cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-

lated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates

and is specially blended to reduce vehicle

emissions and improve air quality.

Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-

ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-

erly blended reformulated gasoline has no

adverse effect on vehicle performance or the

durability of the engine and fuel system.

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic

additive that is blended into some gasolines

to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi

Motors Corporation recommends using gaso-

lines without MMT.

Fuel selection

WARNING

 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-

sive. You could be burned, seriously

injured or killed when handling it. When-

ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the

engine and keep flames, sparks, and

smoking materials away from the vehicle.

Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out-

door areas.

CAUTION

 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will

damage the engine, catalytic converter, and

the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso-

line is illegal, and will void your warranty

coverage of the engine, catalytic converter,

and oxygen sensors.

Gasoline detergent additives

Octane requirement

Oxygenated gasoline

Ethanol (Gasohol)

Methanol

Reformulated gasoline

MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl)

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Filling the fuel tank

General information 3-3

Use of gasolines blended with MMT may

adversely affect performance, and cause the

malfunction indicator on your instrument

panel to come on. If this happens, contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice for assistance.

Your vehicle may have been designed to sat-

isfy California’s low-emission regulations

based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.

Gasoline sold in parts of the country other

than California is allowed to have a higher

sulfur content. Using such gasoline could

adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-

verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-

cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or

“Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina-

tion of this indicator while using high-sulfur

gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehi-

cle’s emission-control system is malfunction-

ing. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer may suggest using a different, lower-

sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to deter-

mine if the problem is fuel-related.

N00301100913

Sulfur in gasoline

NOTE

 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems

such as hard starting, stalling during idling,

abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-

tion. If you experience any of these prob-

lems, try using a different brand of gasoline.

If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER-

VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine

light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as

soon as possible by the nearest authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

 Repeatedly driving short distances at low

speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel

system and engine, resulting in hard starting

and poor acceleration. If these problems

occur, you are advised to add a detergent

additive to the gasoline when you refuel the

vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-

its, thereby returning the engine to a normal

condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi

Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an

unsuitable additive could make an engine

malfunction. For details, please contact the

nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Filling the fuel tank

WARNING

 When handling fuel, comply with the

safety regulations displayed by garages

and filling stations.

 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-

sive. You could be burned, seriously

injured or killed when handling it. When

refueling your vehicle, always turn the

engine off and keep away from flames,

sparks, and smoking materials. Always

handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor

areas.

 Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,

be sure to get rid of your body’s static

electricity by touching a metal part of the

car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on

your body could create a spark that

ignites fuel vapor.

 Perform the whole refueling process

(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-

ing the fuel tank filler cap, etc.) by your-

self; do not let any other person near the

fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to

help you and that person was carrying

static electricity, fuel vapor could be

ignited.

 Do not move away from the fuel tank filler

until refueling is finished. If you moved

away and did something else (for example,

sitting on a seat) part-way through the

refueling process, you could pick up a

fresh charge of static electricity.

 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel

contains toxic substances.

 Keep the doors and windows closed while

refueling the vehicle. If they were open,

fuel vapor could get into the cabin.

WARNING

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Filling the fuel tank

3-4 General information

9.2 gal (35 L)

1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.

2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear

driver side of your vehicle.

The fuel tank filler door can be opened

from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank

filler door release lever located at the left

side of the driver’s seat.

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly

turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-

clockwise.

4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel tank

filler cap cord on the hook located on the

inside surface of the fuel tank filler door.

5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly

on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-

zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-

zle in the fuel tank filler port as far as it

goes.

6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do

not add more fuel.

Fuel tank capacity

Refueling

1- Remove

2- Close

WARNING

 Since the fuel system may be under pres-

sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap

slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-

uum that might have built up in the fuel

tank. If the fuel tank filler cap is venting

vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait

until the sound stops before removing the

fuel tank filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may

spray out, injuring you or others.

CAUTION

 Your vehicle can only be operated using

unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-

lytic converter damage will result if leaded

gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and

consequently, this must never be attempted.

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

General information 3-5

7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap

slowly clockwise until you hear clicking

sounds, then gently push the fuel tank

filler door closed.

N00301600194

This vehicle should not be modified with

non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.

Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures

high quality vehicles with an emphasis on

safety and durability. Modifications using

non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may

affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-

ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-

ble state and/or federal regulations.

DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-

LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-

TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR

VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED

UNDER WARRANTY.

Examples of modifications to your vehicle

that can cause damage or performance prob-

lems include the following:

 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine

parts

 Failure to use required fuel and fluids

 Failure to use proper size tires and wheels

 Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,

emission, suspension, engine, drive train

or electrical wiring systems

 Modification of any onboard com-

puter/control module, including repro-

gramming, or replacing/adding chips to

any onboard computer/control module

Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-

ual for further details regarding warranty cov-

erage.

N00301700212

CAUTION

 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not

“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could

discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-

work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it

off with a soft cloth.

WARNING

 Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is

securely closed. If the fuel tank filler cap

were loose, fuel could leak, resulting in a

fire.

CAUTION

 If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap,

use only the fuel tank filler cap specified for

your model vehicle.

NOTE

 If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while

driving, the engine malfunction indicator

(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check

engine light”) may come on when the

onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs

a self check.

Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until

you hear at least 3 clicks.

The indicator will go off after several driving

cycles. If the indicator does not go off, con-

tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice as

soon as possible.

Modifications to and racing

of your vehicle

Installation of accessories

CAUTION

 Before any electrical or electronic accesso-

ries are installed, consult an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

3-6 General information

 The installation of accessories, optional

parts, etc., should only be performed

within the limits prescribed by law, and in

accordance with the guidelines and warn-

ings contained within the documents

accompanying this vehicle.

Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-

sories should be fitted to your vehicle.

 Improper installation of electrical parts

could cause a fire. Refer to the “Modifica-

tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel

systems” section within this owner’s man-

ual.

 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside

the vehicle without an external antenna

may cause electrical system interference,

which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera-

tion.

 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec-

ifications must not be used.

Refer to the “Specifications” section for

information regarding wheel and tire

sizes.

Due to the large number of accessory and

replacement parts provided by different man-

ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos-

sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer to check whether the attachment or

installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-

ine parts affects the driving safety of your

Mitsubishi-vehicle.

N00301800183

Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality

vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is

important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer before installation of any

accessory which may involve modification of

the electrical or fuel systems.

N00301400219

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are

designed and manufactured to meet high stan-

dards of performance, and are recommended

for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-

able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are

a wide variety of accessories to personalize

your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors

vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors

authorized accessories to choose from to tai-

lor your new vehicle to your own personal

preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s

Parts Manager has information on various

audio systems, protection items, as well as

interior and exterior accessories available for

your specific model.

WARNING

 While driving, do not use a cellular phone

in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-

thing, including cellular phone usage, that

distracts you from the safe operation of

your vehicle increases your risk of an acci-

dent.

Refer to and follow all state and local laws

in your area regarding cellular phone

usage while driving.

Important point!

Modification/alterations to the

electrical or fuel systems

CAUTION

 Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer concerning any such acces-

sory fitment or modification.

If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or

improper installation methods are used (pro-

tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic

devices may be adversely affected, resulting

in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

California Perchlorate Materials Requirements

General information 3-7

N00300100017

Certain components of this vehicle, such as

airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and

button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate

materials.

Special handling may apply. For additional

information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-

waste/perchlorate.

California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements

BK0212400US.book 7 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

BK0212400US.book 8 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Seat and restraint systems

Seats .................................................................................................4-2

Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2

Front seats ........................................................................................4-3

Rear seats .........................................................................................4-5

Head restraints .................................................................................4-7

Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-8

Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-12

Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-13

Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-14

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-20

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-21

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Seats

4-2 Seat and restraint systems

N00408400509

 To adjust the seat forward or back-

wardPage 4-3

 To adjust the seatbacks Page 4-3

 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat

only, if so equipped) Page 4-4

 Heated seats (if so equipped) Page 4-4

 Folding the seatbacks forward Page 4-6

N00401600212

Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety

features that help protect you and your pas-

sengers in an accident.

Seat belts are the most important safety

device. When worn properly, seat belts can

reduce the chance of serious injury or death

in various types of crashes. For added protec-

tion during a severe frontal collision, your

vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen-

gers. The seats, head restraints, and door

locks also are safety equipment, which must

be used correctly.

Always check the following before you drive:

 That everyone in your vehicle is properly

wearing their seat belt.

 That infants and small children are prop-

erly secured in an appropriate child

restraint system in the rear seat.

 That all doors are fully closed and locked.

 That seatbacks are upright, with head

restraints properly adjusted.

Seats

1 - Front seats

2 - Rear seats

Seats and restraint systems

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Front seats

Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or

death in all motor vehicle accidents. How-

ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury or

death by following the instructions in this

manual.

N00401800403

Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-

ble while maintaining a position that still

enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily

control the steering wheel and safely operate

the vehicle.

N00401900316

Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired posi-

tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the

seat in place.

N00402000369

To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly,

gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then

lean backward to a comfortable position and

Front seats

WARNING

 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while

driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-

trol and result in an accident.

 After adjusting the seat, make sure that

seat is securely locked into position.

 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious

injury or death during deployment of the

driver’s airbag, always properly wear the

seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far

back as possible while maintaining a posi-

tion that still enables you to fully apply the

pedals, easily control the steering wheel,

and safely operate the vehicle.

 To reduce the risk to the front passenger

of serious injury or death during deploy-

ment of the passenger’s airbag, always

properly wear the seat belt and adjust the

front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-

ble.

 Always place children 12 years old and

under in the rear seat and use appropriate

child restraint systems.

CAUTION

 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an

adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-

pected accident might occur.

 Do not place a cushion or the like between

your back and the seatback while driving.

The effectiveness of the head restraints will

be reduced in the event of an accident.

 When sliding the seats, be careful not to

catch your hand or leg.

 When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,

pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-

gers.

WARNING

To adjust the seat forward or

backward

WARNING

 To make sure that the seat is securely

locked, try to move it forward or back-

ward without using the adjusting lever.

To adjust the seatbacks

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Front seats

4-4 Seat and restraint systems

release the lever. The seatback will lock in

place.

N00402100243

To adjust the seat height, turn the dial as

shown in the illustration.

N00435601418

The heated seats can be operated by pushing

the switch when the ignition switch or the

operation mode is in ON. The indicator light

(A) will illuminate while the heater is on.

CAUTION

 The reclining mechanism used in the seat-

back is spring loaded, and will cause the

seatback to return quickly to the vertical

position when the lock lever is operated.

When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-

back or hold the seatback with your hand to

control its return motion.

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of serious injury or

death in the event of an accident or sud-

den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in

the upright position while the vehicle is in

motion.

Seat belt performance during an accident

can be adversely affected if the seatbacks

are reclined. The more a seatback is

reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-

mance will be adversely affected. If the

seat belt is not properly positioned against

the body during an accident, there is

increased risk you will slide under the belt

and receive serious injury or death.

To adjust the seat height

(Driver’s seat only, if so

equipped)

1- To move the seat cushion up

2- To move the seat cushion down

Heated seats (if so equipped)

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Rear seats

Seat and restraint systems 4-5

N00402500221

1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating)

2 - Heater off

3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat

warm)

WARNING

 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-

ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-

ness, injury, medication, alcohol use,

fatigue or other physical conditions or

who have sensitive skin may suffer burns

when using the heated seat even at low

temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,

people with such conditions must use care

when using the heated seat.

CAUTION

 Switch off the heated seats when not in use.

Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for

quick heating. After the seat has become

warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-

tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the

seat temperature may be felt while using the

heated seats. This is caused by the operation

of the heater’s internal thermostat and does

not indicate a malfunction.

 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or

stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects

into the seat.

 Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other

insulating material on the seat while using

the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-

ment to overheat.

 When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,

kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic

solvents; doing so can cause damage not

only to the surface of the seat, but also to the

heater.

 If water or any other liquid is spilled on the

seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before

attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater

off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-

tioning during use.

Rear seats

WARNING

 Never adjust the seats to make a cargo

area when the vehicle is in motion or on a

slope. The seats could move more than

necessary or move suddenly causing a

serious accident and/or injury.

 After folding down a seat or returning a

seat back to its original position, make

sure the seat is firmly secured. Also check

to make sure that the seat belts are in

front of the seatbacks, and not caught

behind the seatbacks. If the seat is not

secured, it could move causing a serious

accident and/or injury.

 Do not allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area while the vehicle is in motion. People

who are not properly seated and

restrained can be seriously injured or

killed in an accident.

 The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle

should never be used as a play area by

children. All children should be properly

restrained in a restraint device that offers

the maximum protection for their size and

age. Refer to “Child restraint systems” on

page 4-14.

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Rear seats

4-6 Seat and restraint systems

N00402901222

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to

provide additional luggage compartment

space.

1. Place each head restraint in its lowest

position. (Refer to “Head restraints” on

page 4-7.)

2. Make sure that the seat belt for the out-

board seating position is passed through

the seat belt guide strap (A) and the seat

belt guide is fastened as shown in the

illustration.

3. Pull the left or right release straps (B), and

fold the rear seatbacks forward.

1. Make sure that the seat belt for the out-

board seating position is passed through

the seat belt guide or the seat belt latch

plate for the outboard seating position is

stored.

2. Raise the seatback until it locks securely

into place.

After returning the seatback to its normal

position, gently shake the seat and seat-

back to make sure they are firmly secured.

CAUTION

 In the cargo area, do not load luggage or

cargo higher than the top of the seats and

make sure that it is firmly secured. Restricted

rear vision or flying objects entering the pas-

senger compartment during sudden braking

could result in a serious accident and/or

injury.

 Seatbacks should always be folded and put

back into their normal position by an adult.

 When adjusting the seats, be careful not to

catch your hand. Personal injury could

result.

Folding the seatbacks forward

To fold

NOTE

 If the seat belt interferes with luggage, unfas-

ten the seat belt guide to release the seat belt

and store the seat belt latch plate as shown in

the illustration.

To return

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Head restraints

Seat and restraint systems 4-7

N00404300584

Padded head restraints for the seats can

reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your

vehicle is hit from the rear.

The head restraints are equipped in the illus-

trated position.

To maximize the effectiveness of your head

restraint, adjust the front seatback to the

upright position, the rear seatback to the nor-

mal seating position, and the head restraint to

the proper position. Sit back against the seat-

back with your head close to the head

restraint.

To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,

adjust the head restraint height so that the

center of the restraint is at your ear level

when seated. Any person too tall for the

restraint to reach their ear level when seated

should raise the restraint to the highest locked

position.

 To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.

 To lower the restraint, push down on it

while pressing the lock knob (A) in the

direction shown by the arrow.

 After adjusting the height, push down on

the restraint to make sure it is locked in

position.

WARNING

 After returning the seatbacks to their

upright positions, make sure that the seat-

backs are locked in place and firmly.

Also check to be sure that the rear seat

belts are in front of the seatbacks, and not

caught behind the seatbacks.

CAUTION

 Do not grab the seat belt guide to raise the

seatback; doing so can cause damage of the

seat belt guide and the seatback.

Head restraints

WARNING

 Driving without the head restraints in

place can cause you and your passengers

serious injury or death in an accident. To

reduce the risk of injury in an accident,

always make sure the head restraints are

installed and properly positioned when

the seat is occupied.

 In order to minimize the risk of a neck

injury due to a rear impact, the front seat-

back must be adjusted to the upright posi-

tion, the rear seatback to the normal

seating position, and the head restraint to

the proper position before vehicle opera-

tion. The driver should never adjust the

seat while the vehicle is in motion.

 Never place a cushion or similar device on

the seatback. This can adversely affect

head restraint performance by increasing

the distance between your head and the

restraint.

Adjustment of the head

restraint height

BK0212400US.book 7 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Seat belts

4-8 Seat and restraint systems

Press the lock knob (A) in the direction

shown by the arrows. Then pull the head

restraint up and out of the seatback.

First check that the head restraint is facing in

the right direction as shown in the previous

illustration, and then insert it into the seat-

back. Push the head restraint down while

pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint

locks into place.

N00406001481

Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help

reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-

senger in the event of an accident. Always

use the provided seat belts.

Carefully review the following information

for proper seat belt usage.

To remove

WARNING

 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in

the event of an accident, the head

restraints must be properly installed and

positioned to proper height before vehicle

operation.

To install

CAUTION

 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out

as shown in the illustration. Then pull the

head restraint up to make sure that it is

locked in place and will not come out of the

seatback.

CAUTION

 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-

fers according to the seat. Always use the

correct head restraint provided for the seat

and do not install the head restraint in the

wrong direction.

Seat belts

WARNING

 To help reduce the risk of injury or death

in an accident, seat belts and child

restraint systems must always be used.

Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page

4-14 for additional information.

 Never use one seat belt for more than one

person.

 Never carry more people in your vehicle

than there are seat belts.

 Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.

BK0212400US.book 8 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Seat belts

Seat and restraint systems 4-9

N00406200460

All seats are equipped with a seat belt which

uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with

an emergency locking retractor.

This system is designed to provide both com-

fort and safety. It permits full extension and

automatic retraction of the belts during nor-

mal vehicle operation. A sensing device

inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the

retractor in the event of a sudden change in

the vehicle’s motion.

1. Occupants should always sit back in their

seats with their backs against the upright

seatback. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death during deployment of the

airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back

as possible while maintaining a position

that still enables you to fully apply the

pedals, easily control the steering wheel,

and safely operate the vehicle. The front

passenger seat should also be moved as

far back as possible. Refer to “Supple-

mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag”

on page 4-21. Also refer to “To adjust the

seat forward or backward” on page 4-3.

 Always place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never put

it behind you or under your arm.

 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible

across your hips, not around your waist.

 Never modify or alter the seat belts in

your vehicle.

 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious

injury or death during deployment of the

driver’s airbag, always properly wear the

seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far

back as possible while maintaining a posi-

tion that still enables you to fully apply the

pedals, easily control the steering wheel,

and safely operate the vehicle.

 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-

ger of serious injury or death from a

deploying airbag, make sure the passenger

always wears the seat belt properly,

remains seated all the way back and

upright in their seat, and moves the seat as

far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen-

tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on

page 4-21 for additional information.

 Never hold an infant or child in your arms

or on your lap when riding in this vehicle

even when you are wearing your seat belt.

Never place any part of the seat belt you

are wearing around an infant or child.

Failure to follow these simple instructions

creates a risk of serious injury or death to

your child in the event of an accident or

sudden stop.

WARNING

 Children 12 years old and under should

always ride in the rear seat and be prop-

erly restrained. This reduces their risk of

serious injury or death in an accident,

especially due to a deploying front passen-

ger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-

tems” on page 4-14 for additional

information.

 Any child who is too small to properly

wear a seat belt must be properly

restrained in an appropriate child

restraint system.

 Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing

child safety seat and positioned in the rear

seat.

 In the event of an accident, all seat belt

assemblies, including retractors and

attachment hardware, should be inspected

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer to determine whether replacement

is necessary.

Seat belt instructions

WARNING

NOTE

 For instructions on installing a child restraint

system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a

child restraint system using the seat belt” on

page 4-18.

BK0212400US.book 9 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Seat belts

4-10 Seat and restraint systems

2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the

webbing so that it easily pulls across your

body.

3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding

the latch plate. Push the latch plate into

the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull

up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is

locked securely in the buckle.

4. The lap part of the belt must always be

worn low and snug across the hips. Pull

up on the shoulder portion of the belt to

take up any slack in the lap belt.

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of serious injury or

death in the event of an accident or sud-

den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in

the upright position while the vehicle is in

motion.

Seat belt performance during an accident

can be adversely affected if the seatbacks

are reclined. The more a seatback is

reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-

mance will be adversely affected. If the

seat belt is not properly positioned against

the body during an accident, there is

increased risk you will slide under the belt

and receive serious injury or death.

NOTE

 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled

out, pull it once with force and let it retract

all the way.

Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

NOTE

 With the exception of the seat belt for the

driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi-

tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the

seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-

tor will switch to its ALR child restraint

installation function (see page 4-18).

When the ALR function has been activated,

the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,

let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat

belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.

BK0212400US.book 10 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Seat belts

Seat and restraint systems 4-11

5. To release the belt, press the button on the

buckle and allow the belt to retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it

out and check for kinks or twists in the

webbing. Then make sure it remains

untwisted as it retracts.

N00418400384

A tone and warning light are used to remind

the driver to fasten the seat belt.

If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or the operation mode is put in ON

without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a

warning light will come on and a tone will

sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind

you to fasten your seat belt.

If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still

unfastened, the warning light will blink and

the tone will sound intermittently until the

seat belt is fastened.

N00418300237

The front passenger seat belt warning light is

located at shown in the illustration.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

ON, this indicator normally comes on and

goes off a few seconds later.

The light comes on when a person sits on the

front passenger seat but does not fasten the

WARNING

 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and

is worn as low as possible across the hips,

not around the waist. Failure to follow this

instruction will increase the risk of serious

injury or death in the event of an accident.

 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not

twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may

adversely affect seat belt performance.

Driver’s seat belt

reminder/warning light

WARNING

 In order to reduce the risk of serious

injury or death in an accident, always fas-

ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-

one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she

is also seated and fastening a seat belt.

Children should additionally be restrained

in a secure child restraint system.

NOTE

 If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas-

tened, the warning light and the tone will

issue further warnings each time the vehicle

starts moving from a stop.

Front passenger seat belt warn-

ing light

BK0212400US.book 11 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Seat belt use during pregnancy

4-12 Seat and restraint systems

seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-

sequently fastened.

N00406300357

The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.

To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A)

and slide the anchor to the desired position.

Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into

position.

N00406700205

If your seat belt is not long enough, even

when fully extended, a seat belt extender

must be obtained. The extender may be used

for either of the front seats.

N00406800147

Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-

nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant

women are more likely to be seriously injured

WARNING

 When a child booster seat is used on the

front passenger seat, the front passenger

seat belt warning light will not come on, if

the seat belt is not fastened when the

booster seat is used. Confirm that the

child is wearing the seat belt properly.

 Do not install any accessory or sticker that

makes the light difficult to see.

Adjustable seat belt shoulder

anchor (front seats)

WARNING

 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so

that the shoulder belt is positioned across

the center of your shoulder without touch-

ing your neck. The shoulder belt should

not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-

ure to follow this instruction can adversely

affect seat belt performance and increase

the risk of serious injury or death in the

event of an accident.

 Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when

the vehicle is not in motion.

 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in

position after adjusting it.

Seat belt extender

WARNING

 The extender should only be used if the

existing belt is not long enough. Anyone

who can use the standard seat belt should

not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an

extender can adversely affect seat belt

performance in an accident.

 When not required, the extender must be

removed and stowed.

Seat belt use during preg-

nancy

BK0212400US.book 12 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems

Seat and restraint systems 4-13

or killed in an accident if they do not wear

seat belts.

N00417701723

The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each

have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner

system and force limiter system.

The driver and front passenger seat belts are

equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-

tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side

collision, the pre-tensioner system operates

simultaneously with the deployment of the

front airbags, side airbags or curtain airbags.

The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within

the seat belt retractors (A). When activated,

the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt

webbing and increase seat belt performance.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes

the following components:

The airbag control unit monitors the readiness

of the electronic parts of the system whenever

the ignition switch or the operation mode is

under the following conditions. These include

all of the items listed above and all related

wiring.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“START” position.

[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

The operation mode is in ON.

The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate

under the same conditions as the airbag con-

trol unit.

When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,

some smoke is released and a loud noise will

be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care

should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,

as it may cause some temporary irritation to

people with respiratory problems.

The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a

moderate-to-severe front or side impact, even

if the seat belt is not being worn. The seat belt

pre-tensioners may not activate in certain col-

lisions, even though the vehicle may appear

to be severely damaged. Such non-activation

does not mean that something is wrong with

the seat belt pre-tensioner system, but rather

that the collision forces were not severe

enough to activate the system.

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of serious injury or

death to pregnant women and unborn

children in an accident, pregnant women

should always wear a seat belt. The lap

portion of the seat belt should be worn

snug and low across the hips and below

the rounding. Consult your doctor if you

have any additional questions or concerns.

Seat belt pre-tensioner and

force limiter systems

Pre-tensioner system

1- SRS warning light

2- Front impact sensors

3- Seat belt pre-tensioner

4- Side impact sensors

5- Airbag control unit

BK0212400US.book 13 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Child restraint systems

4-14 Seat and restraint systems

N00408700137

This warning light tells you if there is a prob-

lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat

belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS

warning light” on page 4-27.

N00408900142

In the event of an accident, the seat belt force

limiter system will help reduce the force

applied to the driver and front seat passenger.

N00407101753

When transporting infants or small children

in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint

system must always be used. This is required

by law in the U.S. and Canada.

Child restraint systems specifically designed

for infants and small children are offered by

several manufacturers. Choose only a child

restraint system with a label certifying that it

complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle

Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety

Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-

turer’s statement of compliance on the box

and child restraint system itself.

The child restraint system should be appropri-

ate for your child’s weight and height, and

should properly fit your vehicle’s seat.

For detailed information, refer to the instruc-

tion manual accompanying the child restraint

system.

All children should be properly restrained in

a restraint device that offers the maximum

protection for their size and age.

Be sure to check local, state, or provincial

requirements for child size and age that may

vary from the recommendations listed below.

 Children less than 1 year old and who

weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST

ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that

MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.

 Children older than 1 year of age and who

weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who

are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must

be in a forward-facing restraint used only

in the rear seat.

 Children who weigh more than 40 pounds

(18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches

(100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should

use a suitable child seat or a booster seat

in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and-

shoulder belt fits them properly.

WARNING

 The seat belt pre-tensioner system is

designed to work only once. After the seat

belt pre-tensioners have been activated,

they will not work again. They must

promptly be replaced and the entire seat

belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

SRS warning light

Force limiter system

Child restraint systems

Guidelines for child restraint

system selection

WARNING

 All children must be seated in the rear

seat, and properly restrained.

Accident statistics show that children of

all sizes and ages are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat, rather than in

the front seat.

 Be sure to select a child restraint system

that is appropriate not only for the child’s

size and age but also for your vehicle.

Some child restraint systems may not fit

your vehicle properly.

BK0212400US.book 14 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Child restraint systems

Seat and restraint systems 4-15

 Any child who is too large to use a child

restraint system should ride in the rear

seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt

properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-

tioned over the shoulder and across the

chest, not across their neck, and with the

lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,

not across their stomach. If necessary, a

booster seat should be used to help achieve

a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster

seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use

a booster seat that is certified as comply-

ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-

tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-

tions.

 Never hold an infant or child in your arms

or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,

even when you are wearing your seat belt.

Never place any part of the seat belt you

are wearing around an infant or child.

Failure to follow these simple instructions

creates a risk of serious injury or death to

your child in the event of an accident or

sudden stop.

WARNING

 Your vehicle is also equipped with a front

passenger’s airbag.

Never put REAR-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT

RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-

senger seat. This places the infant too

close to the passenger’s airbag. During

deployment of that airbag, the infant can

be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing

child restraint systems or infant restraint

systems must only be used in the rear seat.

WARNING

 FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat

whenever possible. If one must be used in

the front passenger seat, move the seat to

the most rearward position and make sure

the child stays in the child restraint sys-

tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow

these instructions could result in serious

injury or death to the child.

Airbag

BK0212400US.book 15 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Child restraint systems

4-16 Seat and restraint systems

N00418800157

The outboard seating positions in the rear seat

of your vehicle are equipped with lower

anchors for attaching child restraint systems

compatible with the LATCH system.

N00418900190

Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the

back of the rear seatbacks. These are for

securing a child restraint system tether strap

WARNING

 It is important to use an approved rear-

facing infant restraint until the infant is

one year old (unless the infant outgrows

the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s

neck and spine to develop enough to sup-

port the weight of their head in the event

of an accident.

 When installing a child restraint system,

follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer and follow the directions in

this manual. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death to your child in an

accident or sudden stop.

 After installation, push and pull the child

restraint system back and forth, and side

to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If

the child restraint system is not installed

securely, it may cause injury to the child

or other occupants in the event of an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

 When not in use, keep your child restraint

system secured with the seat belt, or

remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-

vent it from being thrown around inside

the vehicle during an accident.

NOTE

 Before purchasing a child restraint system,

try installing it in the rear seat to ensure

proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt

buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it

may be difficult to securely install some

manufacturer’s child restraint systems.

If the child restraint system can be pulled

forward or to either side easily on the seat

cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,

choose another manufacturer’s child restraint

system.

Depending on the seating position in the

vehicle and the child restraint system that

you have, the child restraint system can be

attached using one of the following 2 meth-

ods:

• Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear

seat ONLY if the child restraint system is

compatible with the LATCH system (See

page 4-16).

• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-18).

Installing a child restraint sys-

tem using the LATCH (Lower

Anchors and Tethers for chil-

dren) system

Lower anchor locations

Tether anchor locations

BK0212400US.book 16 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Child restraint systems

Seat and restraint systems 4-17

to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your

vehicle.

N00419000202

N00419100232

1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,

remove the head restraint from the loca-

tion where you wish to install the child

restraint system.

2. Open the gap a little between the seat

cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with

your hand to locate the lower anchors (C).

3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the

child restraint system into the lower

anchors (C) in accordance with the

instructions provided by the child restraint

system manufacturer.

Remember, the lower anchors provided

with your vehicle are designed to secure

suitable child restraint systems compat-

ible with the LATCH system in the out-

board positions of the rear seats only.

The anchor connectors are NOT

designed to secure a suitable child

restraint system in the center position

of the rear seat.

NOTE

 The attachments points are behind slits on

the seatback backboard cloth.

Examples of child restraint sys-

tems compatible with the LATCH

system

A- Rear-facing child restraint system

B- Front-facing child restraint system

C- Child restraint system lower anchor

connectors

D- Tether strap

(These are only examples.)

Using the LATCH system

A- Vehicle seat cushion

B- Vehicle seatback

C- Lower anchor

D- Connector

BK0212400US.book 17 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Child restraint systems

4-18 Seat and restraint systems

4. On a vehicle equipped with a rear shelf

panel, remove the rear shelf panel from

the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear shelf panel”

on page 5-109.)

5. Open the slit on the backboard cloth of the

seatback, latch the tether strap hook (E) of

the child restraint system to the tether

anchor bar (F) and tighten the tether strap

so it is securely fastened.

6. Push and pull the child restraint system in

all directions to ensure it is firmly

secured.

N00407300455

With the exception of the driver, the seat belt

in all other seating positions can be converted

from normal Emergency Locking Retractor

(ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull

the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the

retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint

installation function. Always use the ALR

child restraint installation function when you

install a child restraint system using the seat

belt.

Children 12 years old and under should

always be restrained in the rear seat, when-

ever possible, although the front passenger

seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.

NOTE

 In order to secure a child restraint system

compatible with the LATCH system, you

must use the lower anchor points in the out-

board positions of the rear seat. To secure a

child restraint system in the center position

of the rear seat, you must use the vehicle’s

center seat belt.

WARNING

 If there is any foreign material in or

around the lower anchors, remove it

before installing the child restraint sys-

tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away

from, not looped through or otherwise

interfering with, the child restraint sys-

tem. If foreign matter is not removed

and/or the seat belt interferes with the

child restraint system, the child restraint

system will not be secured properly, could

detach and move forward in the event of

sudden braking or an accident, and could

result in injury to the child or other vehi-

cle occupants.

 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust

the seat where the child restraint system is

installed.

WARNING

 Child restraint system tether anchors are

designed only to withstand loads from cor-

rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under

no circumstances are they to be used for

adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-

ing other items or equipment to the vehi-

cle.

Installing a child restraint sys-

tem using the seat belt (with

emergency/automatic locking

mechanism)

BK0212400US.book 18 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Child restraint systems

Seat and restraint systems 4-19

1. Place the child restraint system on the seat

where you wish to install it.

To help assure proper fitting of the child

restraint system, always remove the head

restraint.

2. Route the seat belt through the child

restraint system according to the instruc-

tions provided by the child restraint sys-

tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat

belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure

you hear a “click” when you insert the

latch plate into the buckle.

3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-

lation function, slowly pull the shoulder

part of the belt all the way out of the

retractor until it stops. Then let the belt

feed back into the retractor.

4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it.

If the belt is in the ALR function, you will

not be able to pull it out. If the webbing

can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR

function has not been activated and you

will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. After confirming that the belt is locked,

grab the shoulder part of the belt near the

buckle and pull up to remove any slack

from the lap part of the belt allowing the

slack to feed into the retractor. Remember,

if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child

restraint system will not be secure. It may

help to put your weight on the child

restraint system and/or push on its seat-

back while pulling up on the belt (See

illustration).

WARNING

 When you install a child restraint system

using the seat belt, always make sure the

retractor has been switched to the ALR

child restraint installation function. The

ALR function will keep the child restraint

system tightly secured to the seat.

Failure to convert the retractor to the

ALR function may allow the child

restraint system to move forward during

sudden braking or an accident, resulting

in serious injury or death to the child or

other occupants.

Installation

If your child restraint system requires the use

of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in

accordance with the following procedures.

BK0212400US.book 19 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

4-20 Seat and restraint systems

6. On a vehicle equipped with a rear shelf

panel, remove the rear shelf panel from

the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear shelf panel”

on page 5-109.)

7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the

child restraint system to the tether anchor

bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is

securely fastened.

8. Before putting your child in the restraint,

push and pull the restraint in all directions

to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this

before each use. If the child restraint sys-

tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1

through 7.

9. To remove a child restraint system from

the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,

remove the child from the restraint.

Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt

from the restraint and let the belt fully

retract.

10. Reinstall the head restraint.

Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.

N00407601631

Children who have outgrown a child restraint

system should be seated in the rear seat and

wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses

their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses

their stomach, a commercially available

booster seat must be used to raise the child so

that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder

and the lap belt remains positioned low

across their hips. The booster seat should fit

the vehicle seat and have a label certifying

compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint

Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-

tions.

N00407000364

The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with

mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an

organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the

shade. Do not allow them to retract until com-

pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re-

dye the belts. The color may rub off and the

webbing strength may be affected.

WARNING

 Child restraint system tether anchors are

designed only to withstand loads from cor-

rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under

no circumstances are they to be used for

adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-

ing other items or equipment to the vehi-

cle.

Children who have outgrown

child restraint systems

WARNING

 Any child who is too small to properly

wear a seat belt must be properly

restrained in an appropriate child

restraint system, to reduce their risk of

serious injury or death in an accident.

 A child should never be left unattended in,

or unsupervised around, your vehicle.

When you leave the vehicle, always take

the child out as well.

 Children can die from heat stroke if left or

trapped inside the vehicle, especially on

hot days.

 Keep your vehicle locked when not in use.

Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-

dren.

Maintenance and inspection

of seat belts

BK0212400US.book 20 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-21

Regularly check your seat belt buckles and

their release mechanisms for positive engage-

ment and release of the latch plate. Check the

retractors for automatic locking when in the

Automatic Locking Retractor function.

The entire seat belt assembly should be

replaced if the webbing shows any obvious

cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec-

tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or

severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-

ditions indicate a weakening of the belt,

which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-

mance in an accident.

N00407701791

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS), which includes air-

bags for the driver and passengers.

The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-

ment the primary protection of the driver and

front passenger seat belt systems by provid-

ing those occupants with protection against

head and chest injuries in certain moderate to

severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air-

bags, together with sensors at the front of the

vehicle and sensors attached to the front

seats, form an advanced airbag system.

The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to

supplement the primary protection of the

driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the

forward movement of the driver’s lower legs

and provide increased overall body protection

in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-

sions.

The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags

are also designed to supplement the seat belts.

The SRS side airbags provide the driver and

front passenger with protection against chest

injuries by deploying the bag on the side

impacted in moderate to severe side impact

collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide

the driver and passengers on the front seat

and rear outboard seat with protection against

head injuries by deploying a bag on the side

impacted in moderate to severe side impact

collisions.

The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use

of the seat belts. For maximum protection in

all types of accidents, seat belts must

ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or

rides in this vehicle (with infants and small

children in an appropriate child restraint sys-

tem in the rear seat, and older children buck-

led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint

systems” on page 4-14.

WARNING

 Do not attempt to repair or replace any

part of the seat belt assemblies. This work

should be done by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

perform the work could reduce the effec-

tiveness of the belts and could result in a

serious injury or death in an accident.

Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem (SRS) - airbag

WARNING

 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS

WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY

EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.

• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-

sengers properly positioned. This

reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,

and reduces the risk of serious injuries or

death when the airbags inflate.

During sudden braking just before a col-

lision, an unrestrained or improperly

restrained driver or passengers can move

forward into direct contact with, or

within close proximity to, the airbag

when it begins to inflate.

The beginning stage of airbag inflation is

the most forceful and can cause serious

injuries or death if the occupant comes in

contact with the airbag at this time.

• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in

rollovers, in rear impact collisions, and

in lower-speed frontal collisions because

the airbags are not designed to inflate in

those situations.

BK0212400US.book 21 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-22 Seat and restraint systems

• Seat belts reduce the risk of being

thrown from your vehicle in a collision or

rollover.

 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-

ERLY SEATED.

• A driver or front passenger sitting too

close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during airbag deployment can be

seriously injured or killed.

• Airbags inflate very quickly and with

great force. If the driver and front pas-

senger are not properly seated and

restrained, the airbag may not provide

the proper protection, and can cause

serious injuries or death when it inflates.

• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious

injury or death due to a deploying

driver’s airbag, always properly wear

your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat

as far back as possible, maintaining a

position that still allows the driver to

have good control of the steering wheel,

brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-

trols.

• To reduce the risk to the front passenger

of serious injury or death from a deploy-

ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the

passenger always wears the seat belt

properly, remains seated upright and all

the way back in the seat, and positions

the seat as far back as possible.

WARNING

• Seat all infants and children in the rear

seat, properly restrained in an appropri-

ate child restraint system.

 Airbags inflate very quickly and with

great force. Do not sit on the edge of the

seat or sit with your lower legs too close to

the instrument panel, or lean your head or

chest close to the steering wheel or the

instrument panel.

 Do not put your feet or legs on or against

the instrument panel.

WARNING

 Infants and small children should never

ride unrestrained, or lean against the

instrument panel. They should never ride

held in your arms or on your lap. They

can be seriously injured or killed in an

accident, especially when the airbags

inflate. Seat all infants and children in the

rear seat, properly restrained in an appro-

priate child restraint system. Refer to

“Child restraint systems” on page 4-14.

BK0212400US.book 22 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-23

N00407800522

The SRS includes the following components:

The airbag control unit monitors the readiness

of the electronic parts of the system whenever

WARNING

 NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT

RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-

senger seat. This places the infant too

close to the passenger’s airbag. During

deployment of that airbag, the infant can

be seriously injured or killed.

Rear-facing child restraint systems or

infant restraint systems must only be used

in the rear seat.

Airbag

WARNING

 FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat

whenever possible. If they must be used in

the front passenger seat, move the seat to

the most rearward position and make sure

the child stays in the child restraint sys-

tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow

these instructions could result in serious

injury or death to the child.

WARNING

 Older children should be seated in the

rear seat with their seat belt properly

worn, and with an appropriate booster

seat if needed.

Refer to “Children who have outgrown

child restraint systems” on page 4-20.

How the Supplemental

Restraint System works

1- Curtain airbag modules

2- Airbag module (Driver)

3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator

4- SRS warning light

5- Airbag module (Passenger)

6- Front impact sensors

7- Side airbag modules

8- Driver’s seat position sensor

9- Passenger’s seat occupant classifica-

tion sensor system

10- Side impact sensors

11- Airbag module (Driver’s knee)

12- Airbag control unit

BK0212400US.book 23 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-24 Seat and restraint systems

the ignition switch or the operation mode is

under the following conditions. These include

all of the items listed above and all related

wiring.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“START” position.

[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

The operation mode is in ON.

The airbags will operate under the same con-

ditions as the airbag control unit.

When the impact sensors detect a sufficient

front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),

the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.

When airbags deploy, some smoke is released

accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is

not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale

the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-

tion to people with respiratory problems.

An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you

may not even notice that the airbag was

inflated.

Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver

from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,

and does not prevent people from leaving the

vehicle.

N00418600256

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like situations,

such as an airbag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in under-

standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.

The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a

short period of time, typically 30 seconds or

less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record

such data as:

 How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

 Whether or not the driver and front pas-

senger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

 How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

 How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the vehi-

cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as

law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR.

N00417900223

The driver’s seat position sensor is attached

to the seat rail and provides the airbag control

unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft

position. The airbag control unit controls

deployment of the driver’s front airbag in

CAUTION

 Airbags inflate very quickly and with great

force. In certain situations, contact with an

inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-

sions, and bruises.

Event Data Recording

NOTE

 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only

if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data

are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-

ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,

name, gender, age, and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash inves-

tigation.

Driver’s seat position sensor

BK0212400US.book 24 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-25

accordance with the information it receives

from this sensor.

If there is a problem involving the driver’s

seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in

the instrument panel will come on. Refer to

“SRS warning light” on page 4-27.

N00418000364

The passenger’s seat occupant classification

sensor system is attached to the front passen-

ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-

trol unit with information regarding the

occupant on the front passenger seat. The air-

bag control unit controls deployment of the

passenger’s front airbag in accordance with

the information it receives from this system.

The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy

in an impact when the system senses no occu-

pant on the front passenger seat or a child in a

child restraint system. In this case, the pas-

senger’s airbag off indicator will illuminate.

Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on

page 4-26.

If there is a problem involving the passen-

ger’s seat occupant classification sensor sys-

tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument

panel will come on.

Refer to “SRS warning light” page 4-27.

WARNING

 If the SRS warning light comes on, have

the vehicle inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

 Please observe the following instructions

to ensure that the driver’s seat position

sensor can operate correctly.

• Adjust the seat to the correct position,

and sit well back against the seatback.

Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.

• Do not recline the seatback more than

necessary when driving.

• Do not place metallic objects or luggage

under the front seat.

 If the vehicle is involved in a severe

impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as

soon as possible.

Passenger’s seat occupant clas-

sification sensor system

WARNING

 If any of the following conditions occur,

you should immediately have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer as soon as possible:

• The SRS warning light does not initially

come on when the ignition switch or the

operation mode is under the following

conditions.

• [Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“START” position.

[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

The operation mode is in ON.

• The SRS warning light does not go out

after several seconds.

• The SRS warning light comes on while

you are driving.

 To ensure that the passenger’s seat occu-

pant classification sensor system can sense

correctly, observe the following instruc-

tions. Failure to follow these instructions

can adversely affect the performance of

the passenger’s airbag system.

• Adjust the seat to the correct position,

and sit well back against the seatback.

Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.

• Do not recline the seatback more than

necessary.

• Never have more than one person (adult

or child) sitting on the seat.

• Do not place anything between the seat

and the floor console.

• When attaching a child restraint system,

secure it firmly.

• Do not place luggage or other objects on

the seat.

WARNING

BK0212400US.book 25 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-26 Seat and restraint systems

N00418101359

The passenger’s airbag off indicator is

located at shown in the illustration.

The indicator normally comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position

or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes

out a few seconds later. In the following situ-

ations, the indicator will stay on to show that

the passenger front airbag is not operational.

 The front passenger seat is not occupied.

 The system senses that a child is using a

child restraint system on the front passen-

ger seat.

When the passenger’s seat occupant classifi-

cation sensor system senses there is a person

seated in the front passenger seat, the indica-

tor goes out to show that the passenger’s front

airbag is operational.

• Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.

• Do not modify or replace the seat and

seat belt.

• Do not place luggage or other objects

under the seat.

• Do not place and use an electronic device

such as a computer on the seat.

• Do not place heavy objects on the seat or

stick pins, needles, or other objects into

it.

• Do not remove the seat cushion skin.

• If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it

and dry the seat immediately.

 If the vehicle is involved in a severe

impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as

soon as possible.

Passenger’s airbag off indicator

WARNING

 If any of the following conditions occur,

you should immediately have the airbag

system in your vehicle inspected by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as

soon as possible:

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator

comes on when an adult is sitting on the

front passenger seat.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does

not come on when the front passenger

seat is not occupied.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does

not come on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position or the oper-

ation mode is put in ON.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does

not come on when a child is in a child

restraint system on the front passenger

seat.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator

comes on and goes out repeatedly.

 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-

cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off

indicator difficult or impossible to see.

You must be able to see the passenger’s

airbag off indicator and verify the status

of the passenger’s airbag system.

BK0212400US.book 26 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-27

N00408300579

There is a Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) warning light on the instrument panel.

The system checks itself every time the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or

the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS

warning light will come on for several sec-

onds and then go out. This is normal and

means the system is working properly.

If there is a problem involving one or more of

the SRS components, the warning light will

come on and stay on.

The SRS warning light is shared by the SRS

airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system.

N00407900321

The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-

ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.

The front passenger’s airbag is contained in

the instrument panel above the glove com-

partment. The driver’s airbag and the front

passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at

the same time. However, the front passen-

ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front

passenger seat is not occupied or when the

system senses that a child is in the child

restraint system.

N00404500036

The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is

designed to deploy at the same time as the

driver’s front airbag.

SRS warning light

WARNING

 If any of the following conditions occur,

there may be a problem with the SRS air-

bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and

they may not function properly in a colli-

sion or may suddenly activate without a

collision:

• Even when the ignition switch or the

operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-

ing light does not come on or it remains

on.

• The SRS warning light comes on while

driving.

The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-

sioners are designed to help reduce the

risk of serious injury or death in certain

collisions. If either of the above conditions

occurs, immediately have your vehicle

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

Driver’s and passenger’s front

airbag system

Driver’s knee airbag system

Driver

Front passenger

BK0212400US.book 27 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-28 Seat and restraint systems

N00408000606

Deployment of front airbags

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …

Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds

of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher

Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded

area between the arrows

BK0212400US.book 28 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-29

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a

moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical

condition is shown in the illustration to the

left.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

designed to deploy only in certain moderate

to severe frontal collisions within the shaded

area between the arrows in the illustration to

the right.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main

structure is above a specific threshold level.

The threshold level is approximately 15 mph

(25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a

solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If

the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is

below this threshold level, the front airbags

and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This

threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-

cle hits something that absorbs the impact,

either by bending or moving (for example,

another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard

rail).

The initial stage of airbag inflation is the

most forceful, and can cause serious injury or

death if you are too close to the deploying air-

bag. Accordingly, it is important that you

always wear the available seat belt.

In certain types of front collisions, the front

airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not

deploy, even if the deformation of the body

seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body

structure is designed to absorb the impact and

deform in order to help protect the occupants.

Some typical situations where the front air-

bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy

are shown in the illustrations.

Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag do not protect the occupant in all types of

frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your

seat belts properly.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

The front airbags and driver’s

knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY

when …

The front airbags and driver’s

knee airbag ARE NOT

DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when

…

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow

object

Collision where the vehicle slides under the

rear body of a truck

Oblique frontal impact

BK0212400US.book 29 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-30 Seat and restraint systems

they cannot provide protection to the occu-

pants.

Some typical situations are shown in the

illustration.

Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag do not protect the occupants in all types

of collisions, be sure to always wear the your

seat belts properly.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

may deploy if the underside of the vehicle

suffers a moderate to severe impact (under-

carriage impact). Some typical situations are

shown in the illustration.

Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag may deploy in certain types of unex-

pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,

and these unexpected impacts can move you

out of position, it is important to always wear

your seat belts properly. When worn properly,

seat belts can help maintain your distance

from the airbags when they begin to inflate.

The initial stage of airbag inflation is the

most forceful and can cause serious injury or

death if you are close to the deploying airbag.

Rear end collision to your vehicle

Side collision to your vehicle

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

The front airbags and driver’s

knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when

…

WARNING

 Do not attach anything to the steering

wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate-

rial, badges, etc. These could strike and

injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

 Do not set anything on, or attach anything

to, the instrument panel above the glove

compartment. Such items could strike and

injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

Collision with an elevated median/island or

curb

Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole

Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the

ground

BK0212400US.book 30 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-31

N00408100421

The side airbags (A) are contained in the

driver and front passenger seatbacks.

The side airbag is designed to inflate only on

the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even

with no passenger in the front seat.

A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-

cles equipped with side airbags.

WARNING

 Do not attach accessories to, or put them

in front of, the windshield. They could

restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and

injure an occupant, when the airbag

inflates.

 Do not attach additional keys or accesso-

ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the

ignition key. Such objects could prevent

the driver’s knee airbag from inflating

normally or could be propelled to cause

serious injury if the airbag inflates.

 Do not attach accessories to the lower por-

tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.

Such objects could prevent the driver’s

knee airbag from inflating normally or

could be propelled to cause serious injury

if the airbag inflates.

WARNING

 Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-

semble or repair the SRS airbags.

 Do not place objects, such as packages or

pets, between the airbags and the driver

or the front passenger. Such objects can

adversely affect airbag performance, or

cause serious injury or death when the

airbag deploys.

 Immediately after airbag inflation, some

parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do

not touch them. You could otherwise be

burned.

 The airbag system is designed to work

only once. After the airbags deploy, they

will not work again. They must promptly

be replaced and the entire airbag system

must be inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Side airbag system

BK0212400US.book 31 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-32 Seat and restraint systems

N00419200217

The curtain airbags are contained in the front

pillars and roof side rail.

The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only

on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,

even with no passenger in the seat.

Curtain airbag system

WARNING

 The side airbags and curtain airbags can

cause serious injury or death to anyone

too close to the airbag when it deploys. To

reduce the risk of injury from a deploying

side airbag and curtain airbag, all occu-

pants must be properly restrained and

seated well back, upright, and in the mid-

dle of the seat. Do not lean against the

door.

WARNING

 In order to reduce the risk of injury from

a deploying side airbag, do not allow any

rear seat passengers to hold onto the back

of either front seat. Special care should be

taken with children.

 Do not place any objects around the area

where the side airbags deploy. Such

objects can interfere with proper side air-

bag deployment, and cause injury during

deployment of the side airbag.

 Do not place stickers, labels or additional

trim on the back of either front seat. They

can interfere with proper side airbag

deployment.

WARNING

 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any

other object around the part where the

curtain airbag deploys, such as on the

windshield, side door glass or front and

rear pillars and roof side rail. When the

curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or

other object may be hurled with great

force or the curtain airbag may not inflate

correctly, resulting in death or serious

injury.

WARNING

 Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats

that have side airbags. Covers can inter-

fere with proper side airbag deployment

and adversely affect side airbag perfor-

mance.

BK0212400US.book 32 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-33

N00408200536

The side airbag and curtain airbag are

designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a

moderate to severe side impact to the middle

of the passenger compartment.

A typical situation is shown in the illustra-

tion.

The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-

mary means of protection in an accident. The

SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are

designed to provide additional protection.

Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all

occupants, be sure to always wear your seat

belts properly.

In certain types of side collisions, the side air-

bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even

if the deformation of the body seems to be

large, because the vehicle’s body structure is

designed to absorb the impact and to deform

in order to help protect the occupants. Some

typical situations where the side airbags and

curtain airbags may not deploy are shown in

the illustrations on the following page.

Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do

not protect the occupant in all types of side

collisions, be sure to always wear the seat

belts properly.

 Never install a rear-facing child restraint

system in the front passenger seat. Rear-

facing child restraint systems MUST

ONLY be used in the rear seat.

 Front-facing child restraint systems

should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.

If a front-facing child restraint system

must be used in the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as possible, and

make sure that the child stays in the child

restraint system, properly restrained and

away from the door.

 Do not allow a child to lean against or sit

close to the passenger door, even if the

child is seated in a child restraint system.

The child’s head should also not lean

against or be close to the section of the

seatback where the side airbag and cur-

tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if

the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.

Failure to follow all of these instructions

could lead to serious injury or death to the

child.

 Work done on or in the vicinity of the side

airbag or curtain airbag components

should be done only by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk

of a serious injury or death. Improper

work methods can cause accidental side

airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or

render a side airbag or curtain airbag

inoperable. Either of these situations

could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

Deployment of side airbag and

curtain airbag

The side airbag and curtain airbag

ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY

when...

Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the

vehicle body’s side structure

The side airbag and curtain airbag

MAY NOT DEPLOY when...

BK0212400US.book 33 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-34 Seat and restraint systems

The side airbag and curtain airbag are not

designed to deploy in situations where they

cannot provide protection to the occupants.

Some typical situations are shown in the

illustration.

Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do

not protect the occupant in all types of colli-

sions, be sure to always wear your seat belts

properly.

Side impact in an area away from the passenger

compartment

Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle colli-

sion with the side of vehicle

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow

object

The side airbag and curtain airbag

ARE NOT DESIGNED TO

DEPLOY when...

Oblique side impact

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

Head-on collision

Rear end collision to your vehicle

BK0212400US.book 34 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

Seat and restraint systems 4-35

N00408501725

SRS servicing

WARNING

 Any maintenance performed on or near

the components of the SRS should be per-

formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else

to do any service, inspection, maintenance

or repair on any SRS components or wir-

ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should

ever be handled, removed or disposed by

anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

Improper work methods on the SRS com-

ponents or wiring could result in an acci-

dental airbag deployment or could make

the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-

tions could result in serious injury or

death.

 Do not modify your steering wheel or any

other SRS component or related vehicle

part. For example, replacement of the

steering wheel, or modifications to the

front bumper or body structure can

adversely affect SRS performance and

may lead to injury.

 If your vehicle has received any damage,

you should have the SRS inspected by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to

make sure it is in proper working order.

 Do not modify your front seats, center pil-

lar or center console. Such modifications

can adversely affect SRS performance and

may lead to injury.

Also, if you discover any tear or open

seam in the seat fabric near the side air-

bag, have the seat inspected by an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

 If you have found any scratch, crack or

damage to the portion of the front and

rear pillars and roof side rail, you should

have the SRS inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

 When you transfer ownership of the vehicle

to another person, we urge you to alert the

new owner that it is equipped with the SRS

and refer that owner to the applicable sec-

tions in this owner’s manual.

 If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,

we urge you to first take it to an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can

be made safe for disposal.

 If any of the following parts needs to be

modified for use by a handicapped person,

the advanced airbag system will be greatly

affected. Please consult an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

• Driver’s seat

• Front passenger seat

• Front seat belt

WARNING

• Steering wheel

• Instrument panel

[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]

To contact Mitsubishi Motors

North America, Inc.

call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motors North Amer-

ica, Inc.

Customer Relations Depart-

ment

P.O. Box 6400

Cypress, CA 90630-0064

[For vehicles sold in Canada]

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales

of Canada, Inc.

call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-

ada, Inc.

Customer Relations Depart-

ment

P.O. Box 41009

4141 Dixie Road

Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 35 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

4-36 Seat and restraint systems

N00408600383

Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS

are located in the vehicle as shown in the

illustration.

[For vehicles sold in Puerto

Rico]

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales

of Caribbean, Inc.

call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of

Caribbean, Inc.

Customer Service Department

P.O. Box 192216

SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216

[For vehicles sold in Guam]

To contact Triple J Enterprises

Inc.

call (671) 649-3673 or write to:

Triple J Enterprises, Inc.

P.O. Box 6066

TAMUNING

GUAM 96931

[For vehicles sold in Saipan]

To contact Triple J Motors

call (670) 234-7133 or write to:

Triple J Motors

P.O. Box 500487

SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

[For vehicles sold in American

Samoa]

To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.

call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:

Pacific Marketing, Inc.

P.O. Box 698

PAGO PAGO,

AMERICAN SAMOA AS,

96799

Warning label

* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.

BK0212400US.book 36 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Features and controls

Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-2

Keys .................................................................................................5-2

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-3

Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-6

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)

(if so equipped) ............................................................................5-9

Door locks ......................................................................................5-24

Power door locks ...........................................................................5-26

Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-27

Liftgate ...........................................................................................5-27

Manual window control (if so equipped)........................................5-28

Power window control ...................................................................5-29

Parking brake .................................................................................5-31

Steering wheel height adjustment ..................................................5-32

Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-32

Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-33

Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-35

Starting the engine .........................................................................5-36

Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-38

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-39

Service brake .................................................................................5-44

Hill start assist (if so equipped) ......................................................5-45

Brake assist system ........................................................................5-46

Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-46

Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................5-48

Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-49

Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-52

Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) ..........................5-56

Rear-view camera (if so equipped).................................................5-60

Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-62

Multi-information display .............................................................5-62

Indicator and warning light package .............................................5-70

Indicators .......................................................................................5-71

Warning lights ................................................................................5-72

Combination headlights and dimmer switch .................................5-74

Turn signal lever ............................................................................5-76

Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-77

Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ..........................................5-77

Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-78

Electric rear window defogger switch ...........................................5-80

Horn switch ...................................................................................5-81

Link System (if so equipped) .........................................................5-81

Bluetooth

2.0 interface (if so equipped).......................................5-81

USB input terminal (if so equipped) ...........................................5-101

Sun visors ....................................................................................5-105

12 V power outlets .......................................................................5-106

Interior lights ...............................................................................5-106

Storage spaces ..............................................................................5-107

Cup holders ..................................................................................5-108

Bottle holders ...............................................................................5-108

Rear shelf panel (if so equipped)..................................................5-109

Convenience hook .......................................................................5-109

Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-110

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Break-in recommendations

5-2 Features and controls

N00508700330

Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi-

cle without requiring a long break-in period

of low-speed driving.

However, you can add to the future perfor-

mance and economy of your vehicle by

observing the following precautions during

the first 300 miles (500 km).

Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during

the break-in period.

 Avoid revving the engine.

 Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts,

sudden acceleration, prolonged high-

speed driving and sudden braking. These

would have a detrimental effect on the

engine and also cause increased fuel and

oil consumption, which could result in

malfunction of the engine components. Be

particularly careful to avoid full accelera-

tion while in low shift position (low

gears).

 Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within

the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load

precautions” on page 6-10.)

 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.

N00508800621

Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.

Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.

Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.

Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.

Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys

are provided.

Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency

key in a safe place together as a set of spare

keys.

Break-in recommendations Keys

Type 1

1- Key for the electronic immobilizer

2- Key number plate

Type 2

1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and

keyless entry system

2- Key number plate

Type 3

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

Features and controls 5-3

N00509100780

[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand

Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-

key)]

For information on operations for vehicles

equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-

rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to

“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system)” on page 5-20.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-

hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key)]

The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-

nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle

theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-

bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is

1- F.A.S.T.-key

(with electronic immobilizer and key-

less entry system function)

2- Emergency key

3- Key number plate

NOTE

 The keyless entry key and F.A.S.T.-key are a

precision electronic device with a built-in

signal transmitter. Please observe the follow-

ing in order to prevent damage.

• Do not leave where it may be exposed to

heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on

top of the dashboard.

• Do not take the remote control transmitter

apart.

• Do not excessively bend the key or subject

it to strong impacts.

• Keep the remote control transmitter dry.

• Keep away from magnetic objects such as

key rings.

• Keep away from devices that produce mag-

netism, such as audio systems, computers

and televisions.

• Keep away from devices that emit strong

electromagnetic waves, such as cellular

phones, wireless devices and high fre-

quency equipment (including medical

devices).

• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners.

• Do not leave the key where it may be

exposed to high temperature or high humid-

ity.

 If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of

the vehicle immediately contact an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer of the key number, they can

make a new key. The key number is stamped

on the key number plate. Keep the key num-

ber plate in a safe place separate from the

key itself.

 No keys other than those registered in

advance can be used to start the engine.

Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft

starting system)” on page 5-3.

Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security

Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic

immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on

page 5-20.

NOTE

 When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-

tional status, the alarm operates if a door or

liftgate is opened after using the key, the

door lock knob or the power door lock

switch to unlock the vehicle.

 The system does not enter the preparation

status if the keyless entry system or the

F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-

cle.

Electronic immobilizer

(Anti-theft starting system)

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

5-4 Features and controls

attempted. A valid start attempt can only be

achieved (subject to certain conditions) using

a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.

All of the keys provided with your new vehi-

cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s

electronics.

Only keys that have been programmed to the

vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the

vehicle.

If you lose the key, you can order a key from

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by

referring to the key number.

To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the

vehicle keys must be changed.

Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to

have your ID code changed.

NOTE

 In the following cases, the vehicle may not

be able to recognize the registered ID code

from the key. This means the engine will not

start even when the key is turned to the

“START” position.

• When the key contacts a key ring or other

metallic or magnetic object (Type A)

• When the key grip contacts metal of

another key (Type B)

• When the key contacts or is close to other

immobilizer keys (including keys of other

vehicles) (Type C)

 In cases like the above, move the offending

object(s) away from the key and turn the key

back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then

try to start the engine again. If the engine

does not start, contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

 The key may not operate properly when it is

near an object or facility that emits strong

electromagnetic waves.

 Electronic immobilizer is not compatible

with commercially available remote starting

systems. Use of commercially available

remote starting systems may result in vehicle

starting problems and a loss of security pro-

tection.

 A system failure is suspected when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “START” posi-

tion, and the engine does not start. In such a

case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

CAUTION

 Do not make any alterations or additions to

the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi-

tions could cause failure of the immobilizer.

Replacement keys

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

Features and controls 5-5

To add a key, you must already have 2 regis-

tered keys. You need to register the ID code

to the vehicle.

Registering the ID code can be done by your-

self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or

by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-

low the “Customer key programming” proce-

dure below.

If you choose to have your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID

code, take your vehicle and all remaining

keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

N00562200139

You can program new keys to the system if

you have two valid (already registered) keys

and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for

your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors

dealer) by doing the following:

1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition

switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi-

tion for 5 seconds.

2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and

remove the first key.

3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first

key, insert the second valid key into the

ignition and turn it to the “ON” position.

About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer

indicator will start to blink.

4. When the immobilizer indicator starts

blinking, turn the second valid key to the

“OFF” position and remove it. Within 30

seconds after doing so, insert a blank

immobilizer key into the ignition switch

and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform

this operation no more than 30 seconds

after the immobilizer indicator starts

blinking. When registration of the ID

code is complete, the immobilizer indica-

tor will come on for 3 seconds then go off.

If an error occurs, the immobilizer indica-

tor will go off during the procedure.

5. If you wish to register another key, per-

form the process again from step 1.

Additional keys

NOTE

 You are provided with 2 keys, but you may

Customer key programming

(Except for vehicles sold in

Canada)

NOTE

 When the key registration is completed, the

immobilizer indicator will come on within

30 seconds of turning the ignition switch to

the “ON” position with the blank immobi-

lizer key (specially cut for your vehicle at

your Mitsubishi Motors dealer).

NOTE

 It is not possible to register a key if:

• the immobilizer indicator goes off during

the procedure

• the immobilizer indicator does not come on

within 30 seconds after step 4.

 The procedure will be terminated automati-

cally if:

• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses

from the moment when the first key is

turned to the “OFF” position to the moment

when the second key is turned to the “ON”

position

• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses

from the moment when the second key is

turned to the “OFF” position to the moment

when the blank immobilizer key is turned

to the “ON” position

• more than 20 seconds elapses after the

immobilizer indicator starts blinking

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

5-6 Features and controls

N00562300097

Your electronic immobilizer operates on a

radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-

cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-

cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada

Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This

device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules

and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS

standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions.

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference.

 This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of this device.

N00509000923

Press the remote control transmitter buttons

to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.

It can also help you signal for attention by

setting off the panic alarm.

Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the

doors and the liftgate.

The turn signal lights will also blink once.

Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the

driver’s door only.

Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK

button one more time to unlock all the doors

and liftgate.

The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.

The turn signal lights will also blink twice.

The horn of the keyless entry system answer-

back function can be changed as required.

This is done with the key removed from the

ignition switch.

General information

WARNING

 Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

Keyless entry system (if so

equipped)

LOCK ( ) button

UNLOCK ( ) button

3- PANIC button

4- Indicator light

To lock

NOTE

 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the

horn will sound once.

To unlock

NOTE

 The door and liftgate unlock function can be

set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when

the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.

Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock

function” on page 5-7.

Answerback function

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-7

The answerback function can be set in the

following three ways.

Each time the answerback function is set, a

chime will sound to tell you the condition of

the answerback function.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-

bination headlights and dimmer switch to

the “OFF” position.

3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-

onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)

during this time.

4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and

LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of

pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.

The turn signal lights answerback function

can be changed.

If you want to change the answerback func-

tion, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

N00543600118

The door and liftgate unlock function can be

set to the following two conditions.

Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-

tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the

condition of the door and liftgate unlock

function.

1. Put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-

bination headlights and dimmer switch to

the “OFF” position.

3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-

onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)

during this time.

4. Release in sequence the LOCK and

UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of

pressing the LOCK button in step 3.

N00543700034

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may acti-vate the alarm to call

attention as follows:

1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than

1 second.

2. The headlights will blink on and off and

the horn will sound intermittently for

about 3 minutes.

3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on

the remote control transmitter.

N00543800051

Only remote control transmitters pro-

grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can

lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate.

If you lose the remote control transmitter, you

can order a remote control transmitter from

NOTE

 The answerback function will not operate if

any of the doors are open.

Horn deactivation/reactivation

One chime: The horn will not sound.

Two chimes: The horn will sound.

Four chimes: The horn will sound if the

LOCK button is pressed twice

within 1 second.

Turn signal lights deactiva-

tion/reactivation

Setting of door and liftgate

unlock function

Number of

chimes

Condition

One chime

All doors and the liftgate

unlock

Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only

Using the panic alarm

Replacement remote control

transmitters

BK0212400US.book 7 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

5-8 Features and controls

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by

referring to the key number.

To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the

remote control transmitter must be changed.

Take your vehicle and all remote control

transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer to have your ID code changed.

N00543900078

To add a remote control transmitter, you must

already have 1 registered remote control

transmitter.

Registering the ID code can be done by your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Take your vehicle and any remaining keys to

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

N00546100114

Your keyless entry system operates on a radio

frequency subject to Federal Communica-

tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles

sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules

(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device

complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and

Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-

dard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions.

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference.

 This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of this device.

N00544100080

1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

electricity from your body by touching a

metal grounded object.

2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,

insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade

screwdriver into the notch in the remote

control transmitter case and use it to open

the case.

3. Remove the remote control transmitter

from the remote control transmitter case.

Then, open the remote control transmitter

using the method described in step 2.

Additional remote control

transmitters

NOTE

 You are provided with 2 remote control

transmitters, but you may register up to 4

remote control transmitters.

General information

WARNING

 Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

Procedure for replacing the

remote control transmitter bat-

tery

NOTE

 Be sure to perform the procedure with the

Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the

Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you

open the remote control transmitter case, the

buttons may come out.

BK0212400US.book 8 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-9

4. Remove the old battery.

5. Install a new battery with the + side (A)

down.

6. Close the remote control transmitter

firmly.

7. Place the remote control transmitter in the

remote control transmitter case, then

securely close the remote control trans-

mitter case.

8. Check the keyless entry system to see that

it works.

N00503101134

The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-

ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the

liftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engine

to be started and the operation mode to be

changed simply by carrying it.

The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the

remote control transmitter of the keyless

entry system.

Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security

Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry

system” on page 5-21.

+ side

- side

Coin type battery

CR1620

NOTE

 You may purchase a replacement battery at

an electric appliance store.

 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can

replace the battery for you if you prefer.

CAUTION

 When the remote control transmitter case is

opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.

out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-

nents.

Free-hand Advanced Secu-

rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-

key)

(if so equipped)

The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the

driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for

vehicle operations such as locking and

unlocking the doors and the liftgate,

starting the engine, and changing the

operation mode. When leaving the vehi-

cle, make sure you are carrying the

F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle.

WARNING

 Individuals who use implantable pace-

makers or implantable cardiovascular-

defibrillators should keep away from the

external and internal transmitters. The

electromagnetic waves used in the

F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of

implantable pacemakers and implantable

cardiovascular-defibrillators.

BK0212400US.book 9 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-10 Features and controls

The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-

key can be modified as stated below.

(Keyless entry operations are possible.)

For details, contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

• Enabling only the locking and unlocking

of the doors and the liftgate

• Enabling only the starting of the engine

• Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key

N00503200167

When a person enters the operating range of

the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-

key and presses the driver’s door lock/unlock

switch the liftgate switch, verification of the

ID code is performed.

The doors and the liftgate can only be locked

and unlocked, the engine can only be started

and the operation mode can only be changed

when the ID codes of the vehicle and

F.A.S.T.-key match.

A- External transmitter

B- Internal transmitter

WARNING

 Individuals using other electro-medical

apparatus besides implantable pacemak-

ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi-

brillators should check with the

manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm

the effect of the electromagnetic waves

used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag-

netic waves may affect the operations of

the electro-medical apparatus.

NOTE

 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic

waves.

In cases such as the following, operation

may be improper or unstable.

• The vehicle is near a facility that emits

strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV

transmitting tower, a power station, a radio

station or an airport

• The key is carried together with other com-

munication devices such as cellular phones

or radios, or electrical appliances such as

computers

• The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a

metal object

• A keyless entry system is being used

nearby

• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down

• The vehicle is in a location with strong

electromagnetic waves or noise

Use the emergency key in such circum-

stances.

Refer to “To operate without using the

F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-19.

 The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing

reception operations in its communication

with the vehicle. This means that the battery

is always running down, regardless of how

often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery

life is about 1 to 2 years, depending on the

usage conditions.

 Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-

ing reception operations, the reception of

strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate

the running down of the battery. Do not place

near to electrical appliances such as televi-

sions or computers.

Operating range of the

F.A.S.T.-key

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 10 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-11

The operating range is within about 2.3 feet

(70 cm) of the driver’s door lock/unlock

switch and the liftgate switch.

N00503300070

The operating range is the interior of the

vehicle.

NOTE

 When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run

down or there are strong electromagnetic

waves or noise in the area, the operating

range could decrease or operations could

become unstable.

Operating range for locking and

unlocking the doors and the lift-

gate

*: Front of the vehicle

Operating range

NOTE

 Only the doors and the liftgate that detect the

F.A.S.T.-key can be locked and unlocked.

 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.-

key is too close to the windshield, door win-

dows or liftgate.

 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3

feet (70 cm) of the driver’s door switch or

the tailgate switch, the system may not oper-

ate if the key is close to the ground or in a

high position.

 If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating

range, even a person not carrying the

F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors

or the liftgate by pressing the driver’s door

switch or the tailgate switch.

Operating range for starting the

engine and changing the opera-

tion mode

*: Front of the vehicle

Operating range

NOTE

 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-

ing range, it may not be possible to start the

engine and change the operation mode if the

key is in a storage space such as the glove

compartment, on top of the instrument panel,

or in the door pocket or luggage compart-

ment.

BK0212400US.book 11 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-12 Features and controls

N00503400228

While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the

driver’s door switch (A), or the liftgate switch

(B) within the operating range to lock all the

doors and the liftgate.

The turn signal lights will blink once and the

buzzer will sound once.

Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door

locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-24, 5-26 and

5-27 respectively.

While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the

operating range, you can unlock the doors

and the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key.

The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.

The turn signal lights will blink twice and the

buzzer will sound twice.

Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door

locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-24, 5-26 and

5-27 respectively.

Press the driver’s door switch (A) to unlock

only the driver’s door.

Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s

door switch one more time to unlock all the

doors and the liftgate.

 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,

it may not be possible to start the engine and

change the operation mode if the key is too

close to a door or door window.

To operate using the F.A.S.T.-

key

To lock

NOTE

 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-

key does not operate.

• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger

compartment

• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar

• The operation mode is not in OFF.

 The time within which locking confirmation

is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.

Driver’s door

Liftgate

To unlock

Driver’s switch

BK0212400US.book 12 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-13

Press the liftgate switch (B) to unlock all the

doors and the liftgate.

N00513500088

To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys

other than those registered in advance can be

used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-

lizer function)

While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine

switch can be used to start the engine.

NOTE

 Settings can be changed so that all doors and

the liftgate are unlocked automatically by

pressing the driver’s door switch once.

See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

for details.

NOTE

 If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked

using the driver’s door switch when all doors

and the liftgate are locked and no doors or

the liftgate are opened within about 30 sec-

onds, the doors and the liftgate will automat-

ically re-lock.

 The amount of time after unlocking until the

vehicle relocks automatically can be

adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer for details.

Liftgate switch

 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-

key does not operate.

• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar

• The operation mode is not in OFF.

 Functions settings can be modified as stated

below.

See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

for details.

• Activating the operation confirmation func-

tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only

during locking, or only during unlocking.

• Deactivating the operation confirmation

function (blinking of the turn signal lights)

and buzzer.

• Modifying the number of blinks in the

operation confirmation function (blinking

of the turn signal lights).

• Making the buzzer sound when the

F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger

compartment when all the doors and the

liftgate are closed.

Engine switch

NOTE

CAUTION

 The indicator light (A) will flash orange

when there is a problem or malfunction in

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter.

Never drive if the indicator light on the

engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi-

ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

 If the engine switch operation is not smooth

and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the

switch.

Immediately contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

 When operating the engine switch, press the

switch all the way in. If the switch is not

fully pressed, the engine may not start or the

operation mode may not change. If the

engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no

need to hold the engine switch down.

BK0212400US.book 13 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-14 Features and controls

The indicator light on the engine switch turns

off.

On vehicles equipped with continuously vari-

able transmission (CVT), the operation mode

cannot be put in OFF when the selector lever

is in any position other than the “P” (PARK)

position.

Allows operation of some electrical accesso-

ries.

The indicator light on the engine switch illu-

minates orange.

All electrical accessories can be used.

The indicator light on the engine switch illu-

minates green.

The indicator light turns off when the engine

is running.

N00568000025

If you press the engine switch without press-

ing the brake pedal {continuously variable

transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal

(manual transaxle) while the vehicle is sta-

tionary, you can change the operation mode

in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.

N00568101049

When the vehicle is in ACC operation mode

for approximately 30 minutes, the ACC

power auto-cutout function automatically

cuts power to the audio system and other

electronic devices that can be used during

ACC operation mode.

Operation mode of the engine

switch and its function

OFF

ACC

NOTE

 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code

which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the

one registered to the immobilizer computer.

(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft

starting system)” on page 5-20)

Changing the operation mode

CAUTION

 When the engine is not running, put the oper-

ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation

mode in ON or ACC for a long time when

the engine is not running may cause the bat-

tery to be discharged, making it impossible

to start the engine.

 When the battery is disconnected, the current

operation mode is memorized. After recon-

necting the battery, the memorized mode is

selected automatically. Before disconnect-

ing the battery for repair or replacement,

make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.

Be careful if you are not sure which opera-

tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery

is run down.

 The operation mode cannot be changed from

OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not

detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper-

ating range for starting the engine and

changing the operation mode” on page 5-11.

ACC power auto-cutout function

BK0212400US.book 14 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-15

To enable power after ACC power auto-cut-

out function, press the engine switch while in

ACC.

N00503500216

With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given

through buzzers and displayed symbols in

order to prevent mistaken operations or vehi-

cle theft.

When a warning operates, be sure to check

the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is

also shown if there is a problem in the

F.A.S.T.-key.

If the following warning shows, contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

If the following warnings show, the light goes

off if the correct action is taken.

 The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the

vehicle cannot be verified

 A door or the liftgate cannot be locked

even when the driver’s door switch or the

liftgate switch is pressed.

N00559801196

When the operation mode is in any mode

other than OFF, and a door is opened and the

F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger

compartment the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-

key and the vehicle can no longer be verified.

When the door is closed, the warning light

blinks and the buzzer sounds 4 times as a

warning. If the vehicle starts, the inner buzzer

sounds once.

NOTE

 It is possible to modify the functions as fol-

lows:

• The time until the power cuts out can be

changed to approximately 60 minutes.

• The ACC power auto-cutout function can

be deactivated.

For details, we recommend you to consult an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Warning activation

There is a problem in the

F.A.S.T.-key

Put the operation mode in

OFF and then start the engine

again.

If the warning is not can-

celled, there is a fault in the

electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system).

Please contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Someone may be carrying a

F.A.S.T.-key with a different

ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key

may not be within the operat-

ing range

Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-

out monitoring system” on

page 5-15.

The battery of the F.A.S.T.-

key is run down

Refer to “Key lock-in preven-

tion system” on page 5-16.

Refer to “Door ajar preven-

tion system” on page 5-16.

Refer to “Operation mode

OFF reminder system” on

page 5-16.

F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring

system

BK0212400US.book 15 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-16 Features and controls

N00559900158

When the operation mode is in OFF, the

F.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compart-

ment, all the doors and the liftgate are closed,

and someone tries to lock the vehicle by

pressing the driver’s door switch or the lift-

gate switch, the warning light blinks and the

buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warn-

ing, and the doors and the liftgate cannot be

locked.

N00560000159

When the operation mode is in OFF, and

someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing

the driver’s door switch or the liftgate switch

while one of the doors or the liftgate is not

fully closed, the warning light blinks and the

buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warn-

ing, and the doors and the liftgate cannot be

locked.

N00560100150

When the operation mode is in any mode

other than OFF, all the doors and the liftgate

are closed, and someone tries to lock the

vehicle by pressing the driver’s door switch

or the liftgate switch, the warning light blinks

and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as

a warning, and the doors and the liftgate can-

not be locked.

N00514601357

 The operation mode can be in any mode

to start the engine.

 The starter motor will be turning for up to

approximately 15 seconds if the engine

switch is released at once. Pressing the

engine switch again while the starter

motor is still turning will stop the starter

motor. The starter motor will be turning

for up to approximately 30 seconds while

the engine switch is pressed.

If the engine does not start, wait for a

while and then attempt to start the engine

again. Trying repeatedly with the starter

motor still turning will damage the starter

mechanism.

 If the engine will not start because the bat-

tery is weak or discharged, refer to

“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2

for instructions.

 A longer warm up period will only con-

sume extra fuel.

The engine is warmed up enough for driv-

ing when the low coolant temperature

indicator goes out.

Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-

cator” on page 5-71.

NOTE

 The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system

does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is

removed through a window without opening

a door.

This setting can be changed.

See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

for details.

 The warning may display even if the

F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for

starting the engine and changing the opera-

tion mode. The surrounding environment or

electromagnetic waves may make it impossi-

ble to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key

and vehicle.

Key lock-in prevention system

Door ajar prevention system

Operation mode OFF reminder

system

Starting and stopping the

engine

Tips for starting

BK0212400US.book 16 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-17

Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-

cally controlled fuel injection system. This is

a system that automatically controls fuel

injection. There is usually no need to depress

the accelerator pedal when starting the

engine.

To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds

between attempts to restart the engine.

1. Make sure all occupants are properly

seated with seat belts fastened.

2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

3. Press and hold the brake pedal down

firmly with your right foot.

4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way

down (manual transaxle).

5. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-

axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N”

(Neutral) position.

On vehicles equipped with continuously

variable transmission (CVT), make sure

the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)

position.

6. Press the engine switch.

7. Confirm that all warning lights and warn-

ing displays are functioning properly.

After several attempts, you may experience

that the engine still does not start.

1. Make sure that all electric devices, such

as lights, air conditioning blower and rear

window defogger, are turned off.

WARNING

 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly

ventilated area any longer than is needed

to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-

bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and

extremely poisonous, could build up and

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION

 Do not push-start the vehicle.

 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive

at high speeds until the engine has had a

chance to warm up.

Starting the engine

NOTE

 After the engine has not started for a while,

the brake pedal effort needed to start the

engine may become greater. If this occurs,

depress the brake pedal more firmly than

usual.

NOTE

 For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-

axle, the engine will not start unless the

clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter-

lock). This is a safety feature.

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with continuously

variable transmission (CVT), the engine can

only be started when the selector lever is in

the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-

tion.

For safety reasons, the engine should be

started when the selector lever is in the “P”

(PARK) position in which the driving wheels

lock.

NOTE

 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-

up. These will disappear as the engine warms

up.

When the engine is hard to start

BK0212400US.book 17 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-18 Features and controls

2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-

uously variable transmission (CVT)} or

the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press

the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it

there, then crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal, immediately after the

engine starts.

3. If the engine still will not start, the engine

could be flooded with too much gasoline.

While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)

or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle),

push the accelerator pedal all the way

down and hold it there, then press the

engine switch to crank the engine. If the

engine does not start after 5 to 6 seconds,

push the engine switch to stop cranking

the engine, and release the accelerator

pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF.

Wait a few seconds, and then press the

engine switch to crank the engine again

while depressing the brake pedal (CVT)

or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but

do not push the accelerator pedal. If the

engine fails to start, repeat these proce-

dures. If the engine still will not start, con-

tact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice for

assistance.

Startability of continuously variable trans-

mission (CVT) vehicles with an ambient

temperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower

When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20

°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start

from a standstill even with the selector lever

in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)

position.

This phenomenon occurs because the trans-

axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does

not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place

the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position

and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.

The transaxle will warm up, and you will be

able to start normally.

Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up

operation.

N00568200014

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Fully engage the parking brake while

depressing the brake pedal.

3. On vehicles with a manual transaxle,

press the engine switch to stop the engine,

and then move the gearshift lever to the

1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a

downhill) position.

On vehicles equipped with continuously

variable transmission (CVT), move the

selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,

and then press the engine switch to stop

the engine.

Stopping the engine

WARNING

 Do not operate the engine switch while

driving except in an emergency. If the

engine is stopped while driving, the brake

servomechanism will cease to function and

braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,

the power steering system will not func-

tion and it will require greater manual

effort to operate the steering. This could

result in a serious accident.

NOTE

 If you have to bring the engine to an emer-

gency stop while driving, press and hold the

engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press

it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will

stop and the operation mode will go to ACC.

 On vehicles equipped with continuously

variable transmission (CVT), do not stop the

engine with the selector lever in any position

other than the “P” (PARK) position. If the

engine is stopped with the selector lever in

any position other than the “P” (PARK) posi-

tion, the operation mode will go to ACC

rather than OFF.

Put the operation mode in OFF after placing

the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-

tion.

BK0212400US.book 18 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-19

N00568301054

Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the

floor console. Starting the engine and chang-

ing the operation mode should be now possi-

ble.

Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot

after starting the engine or changing the oper-

ation mode.

If the operation mode is in OFF and the

driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key

in the key slot, a warning is issued with the

warning light and the buzzer buzzing for

approximately 3 seconds to remind you to

remove the key.

N00514800017

N00515201174

The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-

key.

When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such

as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the

vehicle has run down, the emergency key can

be used to lock and unlock the passenger’s

door.

To use the emergency key (A), unlock the

lock knob (B) and remove it from the

F.A.S.T.-key (C).

Turn the emergency key toward the front of

the vehicle to lock the door. After checking

If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat-

ing properly

NOTE

 Do not insert into the key slot anything other

than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam-

age or a malfunction.

 Remove the object or additional key from the

F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the

key slot. The vehicle may not be able to

receive the registered ID code from the regis-

tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start

and the operation mode may not change.

F.A.S.T.-key reminder

To operate without using the

F.A.S.T.-key

Emergency key

NOTE

 Only use the emergency key in an emer-

gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key

has run down, replace the battery as soon as

possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.

 After using the emergency key, be sure to

reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.

Locking and unlocking the passenger’s

door

BK0212400US.book 19 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-20 Features and controls

that the door is locked, turn the emergency

key back to the center and remove it.

N00529600055

The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-

nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle

theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-

bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is

attempted. A valid start attempt can only be

achieved (subject to certain conditions) using

a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi-

lizer system.

All of the keys provided with your new vehi-

cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s

electronics.

N00561000042

Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro-

grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be

used to start the vehicle.

If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a

F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer by referring to the key number.

To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle

and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID

codes reprogrammed.

N00561100056

To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have

2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis-

ter the ID code to the vehicle.

Registering the ID code can be done by your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it

can be done by yourself (except for vehicles

sold in Canada).

For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-

low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-

ming” procedure below.

If you choose to have your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID

code, take your vehicle and all remaining

F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

N00561201201

You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the

system if you have two valid (already regis-

tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not regis-

tered) F.A.S.T.-key.

For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the

procedures below.

1. Open the driver’s door.

2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.-

key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per-

form the following procedure within 30

seconds.)

1- Lock

2- Unlock

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

theft starting system)

Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys

Additional F.A.S.T.-keys

NOTE

 You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but

you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys.

You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys for your

vehicle from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-

ming (Except for vehicles sold in

Canada)

NOTE

 Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.-

key programming is finished. Do not open or

close other doors.

BK0212400US.book 20 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-21

3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key

slot.

4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the

UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and

press the LOCK button during this time.

5. Release in sequence the LOCK and

UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of

pressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Per-

form the following procedure within 30

seconds.)

6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press

the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds

and press the LOCK button during this

time.

7. Release in sequence the LOCK and

UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of

pressing the LOCK button in step 6. The

immobilizer warning light will blink.

When registration of ID code is complete,

the buzzer will sound 3 times and the

immobilizer indicator will come on for 30

seconds.

If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program-

ming will be terminated and the buzzer

will sound for 3 seconds.

8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-

key, repeat the process from step 1 after

the operation mode is put in OFF.

N00515500213

Press the remote control transmitter buttons

to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.

It can also help you signal for attention by

setting off the panic alarm.

Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the

doors and the liftgate.

The turn signal lights will also blink once.

NOTE

 F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi-

nated if the operation mode is put in OFF

before the immobilizer warning light starts

blinking.

NOTE

 The immobilizer display will go off immedi-

ately if the operation mode is put in OFF.

 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if

the immobilizer warning light goes off dur-

ing the procedure.

Keyless entry system

LOCK ( ) button

UNLOCK ( ) button

3- PANIC button

4- Operation indicator light

To lock

BK0212400US.book 21 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

5-22 Features and controls

Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the

driver’s door only.

Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK

button one more time to unlock all the doors

and liftgate.

The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.

The turn signal lights will also blink twice.

The horn of the keyless entry system answer-

back function can be changed as required.

This is done with the key removed from the

ignition switch.

The answerback function can be set in the

following three ways.

1. Put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-

bination headlights and dimmer switch to

the “OFF” position.

3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-

onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)

during this time.

4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and

LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of

pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.

The turn signal lights answerback function

can be changes.

If you want to change the answerback func-

tion, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

The buzzer answerback function can be

turned ON or OFF as required.

N00544600098

The door and liftgate unlock function can be

set to the following two conditions.

Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-

tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the

condition of the door and liftgate unlock

function.

1. Put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-

bination headlights and dimmer switch to

the “OFF” position.

3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-

onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)

during this time.

NOTE

 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the

horn will sound once.

To unlock

NOTE

 The door and liftgate unlock function can be

set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when

the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.

Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock

function” on page 5-22.

Answerback function

Horn deactivation/reactivation

One chime: The horn will not sound.

Two chimes: The horn will sound.

Four chimes: The horn will sound if the

LOCK button is pressed twice

within 1 second.

Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-

tion

Buzzer deactivation/reactivation

Setting of door and liftgate unlock

function

Number of

chimes

Condition

One chime

All doors and the liftgate

unlock

Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only

BK0212400US.book 22 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-23

4. Release in sequence the LOCK and

UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of

pressing the LOCK button in step 3.

N00544700060

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you can acti-vate the alarm to call atten-

tion as follows:

1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than

1 second.

2. The headlights will blink on and off and

the horn will sound intermittently for

about 3 minutes.

3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on

the remote control transmitter.

N00562000065

Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre-

quency subject to Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold

in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For

vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-

plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions.

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference.

 This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of this device.

N00562100066

1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

electricity from your body by touching a

metal grounded object.

2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,

insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade

screwdriver into the notch in the case and

use it to open the case.

Using the panic alarm

NOTE

 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a

button is pressed.

 The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40

feet (12 m) away. However, this distance

may change if your vehicle is near a TV

transmitting tower, a power station, or a

radio station.

 If the following conditions are observed after

pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-

ton on the remote control transmitter, the

buttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be

replaced.

• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked

or unlocked.

• The panic alarm cannot be operated.

• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not

come on.

 If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a

replacement.

 If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-

key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-

key can be programmed for your vehicle.

 To use the new remote control transmitters, it

is necessary to register the key with the elec-

tronic immobilizer and keyless entry system.

Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft

starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key pro-

gramming” on page 5-20.

General information

NOTE

WARNING

 Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

Procedure for replacing the

remote control transmitter bat-

tery

BK0212400US.book 23 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Door locks

5-24 Features and controls

3. Remove the old battery.

4. Install a new battery with the + side (A)

up.

5. Close the case firmly.

6. Check the keyless entry system to see that

it works.

N00509200547

Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to

lock the door. After checking that the door is

locked, turn the key back to the center and

remove it.

NOTE

 Be sure to perform the procedure with the

Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the

Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you

open the case, the transmitter may come out.

+ side

- side

Coin type

battery

CR2032

NOTE

 You may purchase a replacement battery at

an electric appliance store.

 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can

replace the battery for you if you prefer.

CAUTION

 When the remote control transmitter case is

opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.

out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-

nents.

Door locks

WARNING

 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and

locked while driving.

• Locked doors, in combination with the

use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk

of ejection in an accident.

• Locked doors can help keep passengers,

especially small children, from opening

doors and falling out of moving vehicles.

• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders

from gaining access to your vehicle when

you slow or come to a stop.

 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.

Children who get into unlocked vehicles

may not be able to get out. Children

trapped inside vehicles can quickly be

overcome by heat and suffer serious

injury or death due to heat stroke.

 Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In

addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-

dren can activate switches and controls,

resulting in an injury or fatal accident.

 When closing a door, make sure that the

door is fully closed and the door-ajar

warning display goes out on the informa-

tion screen on the multi-information dis-

play. If the door is ajar it could open while

driving and cause an accident.

To lock and unlock with the key

(driver’s door)

WARNING

BK0212400US.book 24 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Door locks

Features and controls 5-25

Move the lock knob to the lock position to

lock the door.

All doors should be kept locked while driv-

ing.

The driver’s door can be unlocked without

using the lock knob by pulling on the inside

door handle.

1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked

position.

2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi-

cle. Close the door.

N00549600253

If the ignition switch is turned off and the

driver’s door is opened with the key in the

ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will

sound intermittently to remind you to remove

the key.

N00517300042

If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-

ation mode is in any mode other than OFF

when you push the lock knob forward with

the driver’s door or passenger’s door open,

1- Lock

2- Unlock

NOTE

 When locking or unlocking with the key,

only the driver’s door will be locked or

unlocked.

To lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate,

use the power door lock switches, the key-

less entry system or the F.A.S.T-key opera-

tion. (if so equipped)

Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-26,

“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-6 and

5-21, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-

key” on page 5-12.

 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,

the passenger’s door can be locked and

unlocked using the emergency key.

Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-19.

To lock or unlock the door from

the inside

1- Lock

2- Unlock

To lock the door without using

the key

Key reminder system (except

for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key)

Lock out protection

BK0212400US.book 25 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Power door locks

5-26 Features and controls

the lock knob will automatically return to the

unlocked position.

N00503800150

If the driver’s door is opened while the engine

is stopped and the operation mode is in any

position other than OFF, the operation mode

ON buzzer will sound intermittently to

remind you to put the operation mode in OFF.

N00509300610

All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked

or unlocked by pressing the power door lock

switch on the driver’s or the front passenger

door.

N00563400112

All doors and the liftgate will unlock when

the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

position or the operation mode is put in OFF.

All doors and the liftgate will unlock when

the selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK)

position with the ignition switch or the opera-

tion mode in ON.

Operation mode ON reminder

system (vehicles equipped with

the F.A.S.T.-key)

Power door locks

NOTE

 When locking or unlocking with the key on

the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will

lock or unlock.

 Repeated continuous operation between lock

and unlock could activate the power door

locking system’s built-in protection circuit,

and prevent the system from operating. If

this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-

ating the power door lock switch.

To lock and unlock the doors

and liftgate

Using the power door lock switch

(if so equipped)

1- Lock

2- Unlock

To unlock the doors and liftgate

You can select the functions to unlock the

doors and liftgate either using the ignition

switch or the engine switch, or using the

selector lever position {continuously vari-

able transmission (CVT)}.

These functions are not activated when the

vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-

vate or deactivate these functions, please

contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

Using the ignition switch or the

engine switch

Using the selector lever position

{continuously variable transmis-

sion (CVT)}

BK0212400US.book 26 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Child safety locks for rear door

Features and controls 5-27

N00509400291

Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-

gers, especially children, from opening the

rear door using the inside door handle.

A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-

vided on each rear door.

When the lever is in the lock position (1), the

rear door cannot be opened using the inside

door handle.

To open the rear door when the child safety

lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-

side door handle.

When the lever is in the release position (2),

the child safety lock is released and the rear

door can be opened using the inside door han-

dle.

N00510100243

Child safety locks for rear

door

1- To lock

2- To release

WARNING

 Always keep the doors tightly closed and

locked when driving. An unlocked door

may be accidentally opened by a passen-

ger, especially by a child who could fall

out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there

is a greater risk of someone being thrown

from the vehicle in an accident.

Liftgate

WARNING

 It is dangerous to drive with the liftgate

open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can

enter the passenger compartment.

CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can

cause unconsciousness and even death.

 When opening and closing the liftgate,

make sure that there are no people nearby

and be careful not to hit your head or

pinch your hands, neck, etc.

CAUTION

 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when

loading and unloading luggage. Heat from

the exhaust could lead to burns.

NOTE

 Locking and unlocking the doors by using

the power door lock switch, the keyless entry

system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation also

locks and unlocks the liftgate. (if so

equipped)

BK0212400US.book 27 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Manual window control (if so equipped)

5-28 Features and controls

After unlocking the tailgate, pull the tailgate

handle upward to open.

Pull the liftgate grip (A) downward as illus-

trated and release it before the liftgate closes

completely. Gently slam the liftgate from the

outside so that it is completely closed.

N00510700021

To open

1- Unlock

CAUTION

 Make sure there is no one standing nearby

when opening the liftgate.

To close

CAUTION

 To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not

attempt to close the liftgate without releasing

the liftgate grip (A).

 Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-

firm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgate

opens while driving the vehicle, objects

stored in the luggage compartment could fall

out into the road.

NOTE

 Gas struts (B) are installed in the locations

illustrated in order to support the liftgate.

Please observe the following in order to pre-

vent damage or faulty operation:

• Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts

when closing the liftgate.

• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,

etc., to the gas struts.

• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.

• Do not hang objects on the gas struts.

Manual window control (if so

equipped)

1- To open

2- To close

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 28 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Power window control

Features and controls 5-29

N00510800370

N00548700130

The main switch located on the driver’s door

can be used to operate all the windows.

A window can be opened or closed by operat-

ing the corresponding switch.

Press the switch down to open the window,

and pull up the switch to close it.

If the driver’s door window switch is fully

pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door

window automatically opens/closes com-

pletely. (Type 1)

If the driver’s door window switch is fully

pressed down, the driver’s door window auto-

matically opens completely. (Type 2)

If you want to stop the window movement,

operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-

tion.

Power window control

1- Open (down)

2- Close (up)

NOTE

 Never try to operate the main switch and

sub-switch in different directions at the same

time. This will freeze the window in posi-

tion.

 Operating the power windows repeatedly

with the engine stopped will run down the

battery. Use the window switches only while

the engine is running.

WARNING

 Before operating the power windows,

make sure that nothing can be trapped

(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

 Never leave the vehicle without carrying

the key.

 Never leave children or unreliable adults

unattended inside the vehicle.

Main switch

WARNING

1- Driver’s door window switch

2- Front passenger door window switch

3- Left rear door window switch

4- Right rear door window switch

5- Lock switch

Type 1

Type 2

BK0212400US.book 29 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Power window control

5-30 Features and controls

N00548800098

Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own pas-

senger door window, unless the driver’s win-

dow lock switch is activated.

N00548900132

The power windows can be run up or down

when the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in ON.

The door windows can be opened or closed

for a 30-second period after the engine is

stopped. However, once the driver’s door or

the front passenger’s door is opened, the

power windows cannot be operated.

N00549000169

When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-

senger door switches cannot be used to open

or close the door windows, and the main

switch will open or close only the driver’s

door window. To unlock the switch, press it

again.

N00528800122

If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the

door window is automatically lowered a little.

After the door window is lowered, clear the

obstruction, then pull up the switch again to

close the door window.

Sub switch

1- Close

2- Open

NOTE

 The rear door windows open only half-way.

Power window timer function

Lock switch

1- Lock

2- Unlock

Type 1

Type 2

WARNING

 Before driving with a child in the vehicle,

be sure to lock the window switch to make

it inoperative. Children tampering with

the switch could easily trap their hands or

heads in the window.

Safety mechanism (Driver’s

door window of Type 1 only)

WARNING

 If the battery terminals are disconnected

or the fuse for electric window is replaced,

the safety mechanism will be cancelled.

If a hand or head got trapped, a serious

injury could result.

CAUTION

 The safety mechanism is deactivated just

before the door window closes. This allows

the door window to close completely. There-

fore be especially careful that fingers are not

trapped in the door window opening.

BK0212400US.book 30 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Parking brake

Features and controls 5-31

N00551400043

Wind buffeting can be described as the per-

ception of pressure on the ears or a booming

or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit

wind buffeting when driving with one or both

rear door windows down or partially opened.

This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-

mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear

door windows open, open the front door win-

dows as well as the rear door windows to

minimize the condition.

N00511400399

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,

and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a

uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi-

tion for vehicles equipped with a manual

transaxle, set the selector lever to “P”

(PARK) position for vehicles equipped with a

continuously variable transmission (CVT).

 The safety mechanism is deactivated while

the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe-

cially careful that fingers are not trapped in

the door window opening.

 Do not deliberately trap your hands or head

in order to activate the safety mechanism.

Your hand or head could be trapped and per-

sonal injury could result.

NOTE

 The safety mechanism can be activated if the

driving conditions or other circumstances

cause the door window to be subjected to a

physical shock similar to that caused by

trapped hand or head.

 If the battery terminals are disconnected or

the fuse for electric window is replaced, the

safety mechanism will be cancelled and the

door window will not automatically

open/close completely.

If the window is open, repeatedly raise the

driver’s door window switch until the win-

dow has been fully closed. Following this,

release the switch, raise the switch once

again and hold it in this condition for at least

1 second, then release it. You should now be

able to operate the driver’s door window in

the normal fashion.

CAUTION

What to do if you hear wind

buffeting when driving

Parking brake

To apply

1- Pull the lever up without pushing the

button at the end of hand grip.

When the parking brake is set and the

ignition switch or the operation mode is

in the “ON” position, the brake warn-

ing light in the instrument cluster will

come on.

Before driving, be sure to release the

parking brake.

BK0212400US.book 31 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Steering wheel height adjustment

5-32 Features and controls

When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,

and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.

N00511501254

To adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position, move the lever upward or down-

ward while moving the steering wheel to the

desired level.

N00511600317

Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after

making any seat adjustments so as to have a

clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

To deactivate

1- Pull the lever up slightly.

2- Press and hold the button at the end of

the hand grip.

3- Push the lever downward.

CAUTION

 Before driving, be sure that the parking

brake is fully released and brake warning

light is off.

If you drive without the parking brake fully

released, the warning lamp will illuminate

and a buzzer sounds when the vehicle speed

exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).

If a vehicle is driven without releasing the

parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,

resulting in ineffective braking and possible

brake failure.

Steering wheel height

adjustment

A- Wheel lock

B- Release

WARNING

 After adjusting, make sure the lever is

secured in the locked (A) position.

 Do not attempt to adjust the steering

wheel while driving. This can be danger-

ous.

 When releasing the lever (moving it to the

position (B), be sure to hold the steering

wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering

wheel may slip down too suddenly.

Inside rearview mirror

BK0212400US.book 32 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Outside rearview mirrors

Features and controls 5-33

Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the

view through the rear window.

It is possible to move the mirror up and down

to adjust its position.

It is possible to move the mirror up/down and

left/right to adjust its position.

The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the

mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to

reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-

cles behind you during night driving.

N00512200206

Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after

making any seat adjustments so as to have a

clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

 Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-

view mirror while driving. This can be

dangerous.

Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-

ing.

To adjust the vertical mirror

position

To adjust the mirror position

To reduce the glare

1- Daytime position

2- Night position

Outside rearview mirrors

WARNING

 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-

view mirrors while driving. This can be

dangerous.

Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-

ing.

BK0212400US.book 33 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Outside rearview mirrors

5-34 Features and controls

N00549100144

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted

when the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in ON or ACC.

Move the lever (A) to the same side as the

mirror you wish to adjust.

Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-

tion.

N00549200099

The outside mirror can be manually folded in

towards the side window to prevent damage

when parking in tight locations.

N00549300218

When the rear window defogger switch is

pressed with the engine running, the outside

rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted.

Current will flow through the heater element

inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or

condensation.

The indicator light (A) will illuminate while

the defogger is on.

The heater will be turned off automatically in

about 20 minutes.

 Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.

The objects you see in the mirror will look

smaller and farther away than they

appear in a regular flat mirror.

Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-

tance of vehicles following you when

changing lanes.

To adjust the mirror position

L- Left outside mirror adjustment

R- Right outside mirror adjustment

WARNING

1- Up

2- Down

3- Right

4- Left

NOTE

 After adjusting, return the lever to the “•”

(OFF) position (C).

To fold the mirror

Door mirror heater (if so equipped)

Type 1

BK0212400US.book 34 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Ignition switch

Features and controls 5-35

N00512400686

[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand

Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-

key)]

For information on operations for vehicles

equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-

rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to

“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key):

Engine switch”on page 5-13.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-

ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]

The engine is off. The key can be inserted and

removed only when the switch is in this posi-

tion.

Allows operation of some electrical accesso-

ries with the engine off.

The engine runs and all accessories can be

used.

Engages the starter. Release the key when the

engine starts.It will automatically return to

the “ON” position.

N00550900201

1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)

position {continuously variable transmis-

sion (CVT)}.

2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and

remove it.

Ignition switch

Type 2

OFF

ACC

START

NOTE

 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code

which the transponder inside the key sends

must match the one registered to the immobi-

lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo-

bilizer” on page 5-20.)

To remove the key

BK0212400US.book 35 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Starting the engine

5-36 Features and controls

N00512601816

[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand

Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-

key)]

For information on operation for vehicles

equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-

rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to

“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping the

engine” on page 5-16.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-

ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]

 Do not operate the starter motor continu-

ously for longer than 15 seconds as this

could run the battery down or damage the

starter motor. If the engine does not start,

turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF”

position, wait a few seconds, and then try

again. Trying repeatedly with the engine

or starter motor still turning will damage

the starter mechanism.

 If the engine will not start because the bat-

tery is weak or discharged, refer to

“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)

for instructions.

 A longer warm up period will only con-

sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up

enough for driving when the low coolant

temperature indicator goes out.

Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-

cator” on page 5-71.

This model is equipped with an electronically

controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys-

tem that automatically controls fuel injection.

There is usually no need to depress the accel-

erator pedal when starting the engine.

The starter should not be run for more than 15

seconds at a time.

To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds

between attempts to restart the engine.

1. Make sure all occupants are properly

seated with seat belts fastened.

CAUTION

 If the engine is stopped while driving, the

brake servomechanism will cease to function

and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,

the power steering system will not function

and it will require greater manual effort to

operate the steering.

 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for

a long time when the engine is not running,

doing so will cause the battery to be dis-

charged.

 Do not turn the key to the “START” position

when the engine is running, doing so could

damage the starter motor.

Starting the engine

Tips for starting

WARNING

 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly

ventilated area any longer than is needed

to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-

bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and

extremely poisonous, could build up and

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION

 Do not push-start the vehicle.

 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive

at high speeds until the engine has had a

chance to warm up.

 Release the ignition switch as soon as the

engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor

will be damaged.

Starting the engine

BK0212400US.book 36 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Starting the engine

Features and controls 5-37

2. Insert the ignition key.

3. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with

your right foot.

5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way

down (manual transaxle).

6. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-

axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N”

(Neutral) position.

On vehicles equipped with continuously

variable transmission (CVT), make sure

the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)

position.

7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-

tion and make certain that all warning

lights are functioning properly before

starting the engine.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without pressing the accelerator

pedal. Release the key when the engine

starts.

After several attempts, you may experience

that the engine still does not start.

1. Make sure that all electric devices, such

as lights, air conditioning blower and rear

window defogger, are turned off.

2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-

uously variable transmission (CVT)} or

the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press

the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it

there, then crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal, immediately after the

engine starts.

3. If the engine still will not start, the engine

could be flooded with too much gasoline.

While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)

or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle),

push the accelerator pedal all the way

down and hold it there, then crank the

engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the igni-

tion switch to the “OFF” position and

release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few

seconds, and then crank the engine again

for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the

brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal

(manual transaxle), but do not push the

accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key

if the engine starts. If the engine fails to

start, repeat these procedures. If the

engine still will not start, contact your

local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice for assistance.

When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20

°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start

from a standstill even with the selector lever

in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)

position.

This phenomenon occurs because the trans-

axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle,

the starter will not operate unless the clutch

pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock).

NOTE

 On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter

will not operate unless the selector lever is in

the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-

tion.

For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”

(PARK) position so that the wheels are

locked.

NOTE

 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-

up. These will disappear as the engine warms

up.

When the engine is hard to start

Startability of CVT vehicle with

ambient temperature of -4 °F (-20

°C) or lower

BK0212400US.book 37 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

5-38 Features and controls

not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place

the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position

and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.

The transaxle will warm up, and you will be

able to start normally.

Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up

operation.

N00512700142

The shift pattern below is shown on the gear-

shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way

down while shifting gears.

Press the clutch pedal all the way down and

shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then

gradually release the clutch pedal while

depressing the accelerator pedal.

N00537400065

Always use care to change the gear with the

vehicle speed matched to the engine speed.

Proper shifting will improve fuel economy

and prolong engine life.

N00512900131

For the best fuel economy and performance in

using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed

below.

At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle

speeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruise

conditions (relatively steady speeds) will

improve your fuel economy.

Manual transaxle (if so

equipped)

NOTE

 During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-

cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed

up. This is normal and not harmful to the

transaxle.

To start

CAUTION

 Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse

while the vehicle is moving forward; doing

so will damage the transaxle.

 Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal

because this will cause premature clutch

wear or damage.

 Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position

(illegal in many states).

 Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest,

because this can result in premature wear of

the transaxle shift forks.

NOTE

 If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the

clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then

be easier.

 To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the

gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position,

and then shift it into reverse.

Proper shift points

CAUTION

 Avoid downshifting that may cause the

tachometer pointer to enter the red zone.

This puts the engine at risk of being dam-

aged.

Upshifting

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 38 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-39

At high altitude locations, upshift as listed

below.

N00513000096

It is recommended that you downshift to a

lower gear when needed to maintain the

desired speed, according to the table.

Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The

engine may suffer damage.

To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake

life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend-

ing a steep hill.

Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug-

ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as

when turning a corner or when driving up a

steep hill.

N00513100244

 Do not use the gearshift lever as a han-

drest. This can result in premature wear of

the transaxle shift forks.

 The table above shows the maximum rec-

ommended driving speed for in each gear.

Do not drive near or at these speeds for

prolonged periods of time.

N00560200050

The CVT will automatically and continuously

change its gear ratio depending on road and

driving conditions. This helps achieve

smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.

The transmission prevents unnecessary

upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is

released and ensures smooth driving.

Shift point

Upshift speeds

Acceleration Cruise

1st gear to

2nd gear

15 mph

(24 km/h)

15 mph

(24 km/h)

2nd gear to

3rd gear

28 mph

(45 km/h)

19 mph

(31 km/h)

3rd gear to

4th gear

36 mph

(58 km/h)

33 mph

(53 km/h)

4th gear to

5th gear

45 mph

(72 km/h)

45 mph

(72 km/h)

Shift point Upshift speeds

1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)

2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)

3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)

4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h)

Downshifting

Recommended downshifting speed

Downshifting speed Shift point

Under 20 mph

(32 km/h)

Shift down from cur-

rent gear to 2nd gear.

20 to 30 mph (32 to

48 km/h)

Shift down from cur-

rent gear to 3rd gear.

Driving precautions

Maximum possible driving speed

Shift

points

Maximum possible driving

speed

1st gear 28 mph (45 km/h)

2nd gear 53 mph (85 km/h)

3rd gear 78 mph (125 km/h)

4th gear 105 mph (170 km/h)

Continuously variable

transmission (CVT)

(if so

equipped)

DRIVING UPHILL

Shift

points

Maximum possible driving

speed

BK0212400US.book 39 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

5-40 Features and controls

According to the conditions, the transmission

will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio

to achieve stronger engine braking. This may

help reduce your need to use the service

brake.

N00560300051

As an additional safety precaution, models

equipped with a continuously variable trans-

mission have a shift-lock device that holds

the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.

To move the selector lever from the “P”

(PARK) position to another position, follow

the steps below.

1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.

2. Move the selector lever to the desired

position.

The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-

cally when the selector lever is in the “D”

(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of

the vehicle and the position of the accelerator

pedal.

DRIVING DOWNHILL

Selector lever operation

NOTE

 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”

(PARK) to another position if the ignition

switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi-

tion, or if the key has been removed, or oper-

ation mode is in “OFF” or “ACC”, or if the

brake pedal is not pressed and held down.

Set the selector lever in the gate to

operate while the brake pedal is

depressed.

Set the selector lever in the gate to

operate.

WARNING

 Always press the brake pedal when shift-

ing the selector lever into a selector posi-

tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.

When beginning to drive, do not shift the

selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL)

position while pressing the accelerator

pedal. This will cause the vehicle to

“jump” forward or backward.

NOTE

 To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,

make sure you stop briefly at each position.

After operating, check the position in the

multi-information display.

 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,

the shift-lock device activates to prevent the

selector lever from being moved from the

“P” (PARK) position.

 For a shift indicated by in the illustra-

tion, depress the brake pedal before moving

the selector lever. If you attempt to move the

selector lever before depressing the brake

pedal, the selector lever may not move.

BK0212400US.book 40 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-41

N00563300049

When the selector lever cannot be shifted

from the “P” (PARK) position to another

position while the brake pedal is pressed and

held down with the ignition switch or the

operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat

or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-

tioning.

Immediately have your vehicle checked by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

If you need to move the vehicle, shift the

selector lever as follows.

1. Make sure the parking brake is fully

applied.

2. Stop the engine if it is running.

3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its

tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry

gently as shown to remove the cover.

4. Depress the brake pedal with the right

foot.

5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock

release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to

the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while

pressing the screwdriver down.

N00560400078

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

ON, the selector lever position is shown on

the multi-information display.

N00560600067

This position locks the transmission to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can

be started from the “P” (PARK) position.

When the selector lever cannot be

shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-

tion

Selector lever position display

Selector lever positions

“P” PARK

BK0212400US.book 41 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

5-42 Features and controls

Move the lever to this position only after the

vehicle has come to a complete stop.

At this position, the transmission is disen-

gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on

a manual transaxle and should be used when

the vehicle is not moving for an extended

length of time during driving, such as in a

traffic jam.

This position is used for most city and high-

way driving. The transmission will automati-

cally and continuously change its gear ratio

depending on road and driving conditions.

This position is for use when light engine

braking at high-speed is needed, or driving up

very steep hills and for engine braking at low

speeds when descending steep gradients.

N00549500018

N00574601023

When the selector lever position indicator

blinks while you are driving, there could be a

malfunction in the automatic transaxle system

or CVT fluid temperature becomes abnor-

mally high.

“R” REVERSE

CAUTION

 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”

(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in

motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P”

(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while

the vehicle is in motion, the transmission

may be damaged.

“N” NEUTRAL

WARNING

 Never move the selector lever to the “N”

(NEUTRAL) position while driving since

you could accidentally slip it into the “P”

(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position,

damaging the transmission.

 To prevent the vehicle from rolling when

stopped on a slope, the engine should be

started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in

“N” (NEUTRAL) position.

 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot

on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in

“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-

ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-

tion.

“D” DRIVE

CAUTION

 To prevent transmission damage, never shift

into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”

(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in

motion.

“B” BRAKE

WARNING

When a malfunction occurs in

the automatic transaxle

When the selector lever position

indicator blinks

NOTE

 The “A” indicator blinks only if the CVT

selector lever switch is broken.

It is not seen during normal driving.

BK0212400US.book 42 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-43

N00560801066

To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)

position (when passing another vehicle) push

the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will

automatically downshift.

For short waiting periods, such as at traffic

lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever

position and held stationary with the service

brake.

For longer waiting periods with the engine

running, place the selector lever in the “N”

(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking

brake, while holding the vehicle stationary

with the service brake.

CAUTION

 If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while

driving, the indicator will blink.

In this case, immediately park your vehicle

in a safe place and follow these procedures:

[If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec-

ond), the CVT fluid is overheating.]

Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not

turn off the engine. Move the selector lever

to the “P” (PARK) position and open the

bonnet. Keep the engine, idling.

After a while, move the selector lever into

any position other than “P” (PARK) position

and confirm that the indicator stops blinking.

It is safe to continue driving if the indicator

no longer blinks.

If the indicator continues blinking or blinks

intermittently, have your vehicle inspected at

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

repair facility of your choice.

[If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2

seconds), the CVT safety device may be

operating due to a malfunction.]

Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility of

your choice as soon as possible.

Operation of the CVT

CAUTION

 Before selecting a position with the engine

running and the vehicle stationary, firmly

depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-

cle from creeping.

The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the

CVT is engaged, especially when the engine

speed or idle speed is high, or with the air

conditioning (cooling or heating) operating.

Do not release the brake pedal until you are

ready to drive away.

 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at

all times.

Using the left foot could cause driver move-

ment delay in case of an emergency.

 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run

the engine at high rpms when shifting from

the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).

 Operating the accelerator pedal while the

other foot is resting on the brake pedal will

affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-

mature wear of brake pads.

 Use the selector lever in the correct shift

position in accordance with driving condi-

tions.

Never coast downhill backward in the driv-

ing shift position “D” (DRIVE) or coast for-

ward in the “R” (REVERSE) position.

Engine stopping and increased brake pedal

and steering effort could lead to an accident.

 Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal

pressed when the vehicle is stationary.

This can damage the CVT.

Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal

while holding down the brake pedal with the

selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,

the engine revolutions may not rise as high

as when performing the same operation with

the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)

position.

Passing acceleration

Waiting

CAUTION

BK0212400US.book 43 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Service brake

5-44 Features and controls

Prior to moving off after having stopped the

vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in

“D” (DRIVE) position.

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,

and then move the selector lever to the “P”

(PARK) position.

If the CVT does not shift while driving, or

your vehicle does not pick up enough speed

when starting on an uphill slope, it may be

that there is something unusual happening in

the transmission, causing a safety device to

activate. Have your vehicle checked at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice as soon as possi-

ble.

N00517500318

Overuse of the brake can cause weakening,

resulting in poor brake response and prema-

ture wear of the brake pads.

When driving down a long or steep hill, use

engine braking by moving the selector lever

to “B” (BRAKE) position.

N00517600436

Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes

for more braking force with less brake pedal

effort.

Your brakes are designed to operate at full

capacity, even if the power assist is not being

used.

If the power assist is not being used, the effort

needed to press the brake pedal is greater.

If you should lose the power assist for some

reason, the brakes will still work.

If the power brake unit or either of the two

brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-

erly, the rest of the brake system will still

work, but the vehicle will not slow down as

quickly.

You will know this has happened if you find

you need to press the brake down farther, or

harder when slowing down or stopping, or if

the brake warning light and the warning dis-

play in the multi-information display come

on. Have the brake system repaired at an

CAUTION

 To avoid transmission overheating, never try

to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by

using the accelerator pedal. Always apply

the parking brake and/or service brake.

 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while

the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-

ation may occur if the selector lever is in a

position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”

(NEUTRAL).

Parking

When the CVT makes no speed

change

Service brake

Brake pedal

WARNING

 Do not leave any objects near the brake

pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;

doing so could prevent the full pedal

stroke that would be necessary in an

emergency. Make sure that the pedal can

be operated freely at all times. Make sure

the floor mat is securely held in place.

CAUTION

 It is important not to drive the vehicle with

your foot resting on the brake pedal when

braking is not required. This practice can

result in very high brake temperatures, pre-

mature lining wear, and possible damage to

the brakes.

Power brakes

BK0212400US.book 44 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Hill start assist (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-45

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice immediately.

N00550700124

The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a

metallic squeal when the brake pads have

worn down enough to need service.

If you hear this sound, have the brake pads

replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

N00562600087

The hill start assist makes it easy to start off

on a steep uphill slope by preventing the

vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the

braking force for about 2 second when you

move your foot from the brake pedal to the

accelerator pedal.

N00562700091

1. Stop the vehicle completely using the

brake pedal.

2. Place the selector lever into the “D” posi-

tion.

3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start

assist will maintain the braking force

applied while stopping for approximately

2 seconds.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill

start assist gradually will decrease the

braking force as the vehicle starts moving.

WARNING

 Never coast downhill with the engine OFF.

Keep the engine running whenever your

vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the

engine while driving, the power brake

booster will stop working and your brakes

will not work as well.

 If the power assist is lost or if either brake

hydraulic system stops working properly,

take your vehicle to an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice immediately.

Brake pad wear alarm

WARNING

 Driving with worn brake pads will make it

harder to stop, and can cause an accident.

Hill start assist (if so equipped)

CAUTION

 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to

prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.

Under certain circumstances, even when hill

start assist is activated, the vehicle may

move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf-

ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily

loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-

pery.

 The hill start assist is not designed to keep

the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes

for more than 2 seconds.

 When facing uphill, do not rely on using the

hill start assist to maintain a stopped position

as an alternative to depressing the brake

pedal.

Doing so could cause an accident.

 Do not perform the following operation

while the hill start assist is operating.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or

“ACC” position.

[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. The

hill start assist could stop operating, which

could result in an accident.

To operate

NOTE

 When reversing on an uphill slope, place the

selector lever into the “R” position.

CAUTION

BK0212400US.book 45 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Brake assist system

5-46 Features and controls

N00562800092

If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-

tem, the following indicator will turn on.

N00567300092

The brake assist system is a device assisting

drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal

firmly such as in emergency stop situations

and provides greater braking force.

If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the

brakes will be applied with more force than

usual.

N00517900338

The anti-lock braking system helps prevent

the wheels from locking up when braking.

NOTE

 The hill start assist is activated when all of

the following conditions are met.

• The engine is running.

(The hill start assist will not be activated

while the engine is starting or immediately

after the engine is started.)

• The selector lever is in any position other

than “P” or “N”.

• The vehicle is completely stationary, with

the brake pedal depressed.

• The parking brake is released.

 The hill start assist will not operate if the

accelerator pedal is depressed before the

brake pedal is released.

 The hill start assist also operates when

reversing on an uphill slope.

 When the hill start assist is activated, you

may feel the operating sound or vibration

from under the body.

This is a normal result of the hill start assist

operation, and does not indicate a problem.

Warning indicator

ASC indicator

CAUTION

 If the warning is displayed, the hill start

assist will not operate. Start off carefully.

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the

engine.

Restart the engine and check whether the

indicator goes out, in which case the hill start

assist is again working normally.

If they remain displayed or reappear fre-

quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle

immediately, but the vehicle should be

inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice as soon as possible.

Brake assist system

CAUTION

 The brake assist system is not a device

designed to exercise braking force greater

than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a

sufficient distance between vehicles in front

of you without relying too much on the brake

assist system.

NOTE

 Once the brake assist system is operational,

it maintains great braking force even if the

brake pedal is lightly released.

To stop its operation, completely remove

your foot from the brake pedal.

 When the brake assist system is in use while

driving, you may feel as if the depressed

brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small

motions in conjunction with the operation

noise, or the vehicle body and the steering

wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake

assist system is operating normally and does

not indicate faulty operation. Continue to

depress the brake pedal.

 When the anti-lock brake system warning

light is illuminated, the brake assist system is

not functioning.

Anti-lock braking system

BK0212400US.book 46 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Anti-lock braking system

Features and controls 5-47

This helps maintain vehicle drivability and

steering wheel handling.

 When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden

braking), steering is slightly different

from normal driving conditions. Use the

steering wheel carefully.

 Always keep a safe distance from the

vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-

cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking

system, leave a greater braking distance

when:

• Driving on gravel or snow-covered

roads.

• Driving on uneven road surfaces.

 Operation of anti-lock braking system is

not restricted situations where brakes are

applied suddenly. This system may also

prevent the wheels from locking when

you drive over manholes, steel roadwork

plates, road markings, or any uneven road

surface.

 When the anti-lock braking system is in

use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-

ing and hear a unique sound. It may also

feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.

In this situation, simply hold the brake

pedal down firmly. Do not pump the

brake, which will result in reduced

braking performance.

N00531600674

If there is a malfunction in the system, the

anti-lock braking system warning light will

come on.

Under normal conditions, the ABS warning

light comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position or the operation

mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds

later.

Driving hints

CAUTION

 The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent

accidents. It is your responsibility to take

safety precautions and to drive carefully.

 To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking

system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the

same size and the same type.

NOTE

 You may feel the operating sound or vibra-

tion from under the body when driving

immediately after starting the engine. This is

a normal result the anti-lock braking system

makes when performing a self-check. It does

not indicate a problem.

 The anti-lock braking system can be used

after the vehicle has reached a speed over

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops

working when the vehicle slows below 3

mph (5 km/h).

Anti-lock braking system warn-

ing light

CAUTION

 Any of the following indicates that the anti-

lock braking system is not functioning and

only the standard brake system is working.

(The standard brake system is functioning

normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle

to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

a repair facility of your choice.

BK0212400US.book 47 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Electric power steering system (EPS)

5-48 Features and controls

N00531700604

 Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-

ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Test the system by restarting the engine

and driving at a speed of about 12 mph

(20 km/h) or higher.

If the warning light then remains off dur-

ing driving, there is no abnormal condi-

tion.

However, if the warning light does not

disappear, or if they come on again when

the vehicle is driven, have the vehicle

checked by an authorized MITSUBISHI

MOTORS dealer or repair facility of your

choice as soon as possible.

The anti-lock braking system and brake force

distribution function may not work, so hard

braking could make the vehicle unstable.

Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an

authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or

repair facility of your choice.

N00529200080

After driving on snow or icy roads, remove

any snow and ice which may have be left

around the wheels. On vehicles that have an

anti-lock braking system, be careful not to

damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the

cables located at each wheel.

N00568400074

The power steering system operates while the

engine is running. It helps reduce the effort

needed to turn the steering wheel.

The power steering system has mechanical

steering capability in case the power assist is

lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-

son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-

cle, but you will notice it takes much more

effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-

cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put

in ON, the warning light does not come on

or it remains on and does not go off.

• The warning light comes on while driving

If the warning light illuminate

while driving

If only the anti-lock braking sys-

tem warning light illuminate

CAUTION

If the anti-lock braking system

warning light and brake warning

light illuminate at the same time

After driving on icy roads

Electric power steering sys-

tem (EPS)

Front Rear

BK0212400US.book 48 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Active stability control (ASC)

Features and controls 5-49

If there is a malfunction in the system, the

warning light will come on.

Under normal conditions, the warning lamp

comes on when the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position or the operation mode is

put in ON, and goes off after the engine has

started.

N00559100176

The Active stability control (ASC) takes

overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-

tem, traction control function and skid control

function to help maintain the vehicle’s control

and traction. Please read this section in con-

junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-

ing system, traction control function and skid

control function.

Anti-lock braking system  P.5-46

Traction control function  P.5-50

Skid control function  P.5 -50

WARNING

 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is

moving. Stopping the engine would make

the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,

possibly resulting in an accident.

NOTE

 During repeated full-lock turning of the

steering wheel (for example, while you are

manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking

space), a protection function may be acti-

vated to prevent overheating of the power

steering system. This function will make the

steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In

this event, limit your turning of the steering

wheel for a while. When the system has

cooled down, the steering effort will return

to normal.

 If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-

cle is stationary with the headlights on, the

headlights may become dim. This behavior

is not abnormal. The headlights will return to

their original brightness after a short while.

Electric power steering system

warning light

CAUTION

 If the warning light appears while the engine

is running, have the vehicle inspected by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-

sible. It may become harder to turn the steer-

ing wheel.

Active stability control

(ASC)

CAUTION

 Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC

cannot prevent the natural laws of physics

from acting on the vehicle. This system, like

any other system, has limits and cannot help

you to maintain traction and control of the

vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-

ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s

responsibillty to drive carefully, This means

taking into account the traffic, road and envi-

ronmental conditions.

 Be sure to use the same specified type and

size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the

ASC may not work properly.

BK0212400US.book 49 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Active stability control (ASC)

5-50 Features and controls

N00559200076

On slippery surfaces, the traction control

function prevents the drive wheels from spin-

ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to

start moving from a stopped condition. It also

provides sufficient driving force and steering

performance as the vehicle turns while press-

ing the acceleration pedal.

N00559300051

The skid control function is designed to help

the driver maintain control of the vehicle on

slippery roads or during rapid steering

maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine

output and the brake on each wheel.

N00559400254

The ASC is automatically activated when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position

or the operation mode is put in ON. You can

deactivate the system by pressing down the

“ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer.

When the ASC is deactivated, the indica-

tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC,

momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch;

the indicator is turned off.

 Do not install any aftermarket limited slip

differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC

may stop functioning properly.

NOTE

 An operating sound or vibration may be

emitted from under the body in the following

situations. The sound or vibration is associ-

ated with checking the operations of the

ASC. At this time, you may feel a shock

from under the body and the brake pedal if

you depress it. These do not indicate a mal-

function.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put

in ON.

• When the vehicle is driven for a while after

the engine is turned on.

 When the ASC is activated, you may feel a

vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-

ing sound from the engine compartment.

This indicates that the system is operating

normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.

 When the anti-lock braking system warning

light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.

Traction control function

CAUTION

 When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy

road, be sure to install snow tires and drive

the vehicle at moderate speeds.

Skid control function

NOTE

 The skid control function operates at speeds

of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.

ASC OFF switch

CAUTION

 For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch

should be operated when your vehicle is

stopped.

 Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in

normal circumstances.

NOTE

 Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both

the stability control function and the traction

control function.

BK0212400US.book 50 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Active stability control (ASC)

Features and controls 5-51

N00546500118

N00546600119

If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-

tem, the following indicator will turn on.

N00546300031

 When moving out of mud, sand or fresh

snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not

allow the engine speed to increase. In such

situations, temporarily turning off ASC with

the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to

move out your vehicle.

 If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”

switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-

taken operation protection function” will

activate and the ASC will turn back on.

ASC operation indicator or

ASC OFF indicator

ASC operation indicator

The indicator will blink when the

ASC is operating.

ASC OFF indicator

This indicator will turn on when the

ASC is turned off with the “ASC

OFF” switch.

CAUTION

 When indicator blinks, ASC is operating,

which means that the road is slippery or that

your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip.

If this happens, drive slower with less accel-

erator input.

NOTE

 The indicator may turn on when you start

the engine. This means that the battery volt-

age momentarily dropped when the engine

was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-

tion, provided that the display goes out

immediately.

 When a compact spare tire has been put on

your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire

will be lower, making it more likely that the

indicator will blink.

ASC warning indicator

ASC indicator

ASC OFF indicator

CAUTION

 The system may be malfunctioning.

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the

engine.

Restart the engine and check whether the

indicator goes out. If they go out, there is no

abnormal condition. If they do not go out or

appear frequently, it is not necessary to stop

the vehicle immediately, but you should have

your vehicle inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice as soon as possible.

Towing

CAUTION

 When towing the vehicle with only the front

wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the

ground, do not place the ignition switch in

the “ON” position or do not put the operation

mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in

the “ON” position or putting the operation

mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate,

resulting in an accident.

Note that the correct towing method depends

on the transmission type and the vehicle’s

drive configuration.

For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-17.

BK0212400US.book 51 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cruise control (if so equipped)

5-52 Features and controls

N00518300573

Cruise control is an automatic speed control

system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-

vated at speeds from about 25 mph

(40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at

speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

Used to turn on and off the cruise control.

Used to reduce the set speed and to set the

desired speed.

Used to increase the set speed and to return to

the original set speed.

Used to deactivate the set speed driving.

N00518400385

1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” posi-

tion or the operation mode is in ON, press

the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch

(A) to turn on the cruise control. The indi-

cator in the meter cluster will come on.

Cruise control (if so equipped)

CAUTION

 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,

turn off the cruise control for safety.

 Do not use cruise control when driving con-

ditions will not allow you to stay at the same

speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads

that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,

slippery, on a steep downhill slope.

 On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle,

do not move the gearshift lever to the “N”

(Neutral) position while driving at a set

speed without depressing the clutch pedal.

The engine will run too fast and might be

damaged.

NOTE

 Cruise control may not be able to keep your

speed on uphills or downhills.

 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.

You may use the accelerator pedal if you

want to stay at your set speed.

 Your speed may increase to more than the set

speed on a steep downhill. You have to use

the brake to control your speed. As a result,

the set speed driving is deactivated.

Cruise control switches

A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch

B- SET - switch

NOTE

C- RES + switch

D- CANCEL switch

NOTE

 When operating the cruise control switches,

press the cruise control switches correctly.

The set speed driving may be deactivated

automatically if two or more switches of the

cruise control are pressed at the same time.

To activate

BK0212400US.book 52 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cruise control (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-53

2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired

speed, then press and release the SET -

switch (B) when the indicator is illumi-

nated. The vehicle will then maintain the

desired speed.

N00518500344

There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.

Press and hold the RES + switch (C) while

driving at the set speed, and your speed will

then gradually increase.

When you reach your desired speed, release

the switch. Your new cruising speed is now

set.

To increase your speed in small amounts,

press the RES + switch for less than about 1

second and release it.

Each time you press the RES + switch, your

vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

While driving at the set speed, use the accel-

erator pedal to reach your desired speed and

then press the SET - switch (B) and release

the switch momentarily to set a new desired

cruising speed.

N00518600273

There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.

Indicator

NOTE

 When you release the SET - switch, the vehi-

cle speed will be set.

To increase the set speed

RES + switch

Accelerator pedal

To decrease the set speed

BK0212400US.book 53 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cruise control (if so equipped)

5-54 Features and controls

Press and hold the SET - switch (B) while

driving at the set speed, and your speed will

slow down gradually.

When you reach your desired speed, release

the switch. Your new cruising speed is now

set.

To slow down your speed in small amounts,

press the SET - switch for less than about 1

second and release it.

Each time you press the SET - switch, your

vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph (1.6

km/h).

While driving at the set speed, use the brake

pedal, which disengages the cruise control,

then press the SET - switch (B) and release

the switch momentarily to set a new desired

cruising speed.

N00541700056

Depress the accelerator pedal as you would

normally. When you release the pedal, you

will return to your set speed.

Depress the brake pedal to decrease the

speed. To return to the previously set speed,

press the RES + switch (C).

Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page

5-55.

SET - switch

Brake pedal

To temporarily increase or

decrease the speed

To temporarily increase the speed

To temporarily decrease the speed

BK0212400US.book 54 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cruise control (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-55

N00518800565

The set speed driving can be deactivated as

follows:

 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF

switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned

off.)

 Press the CANCEL switch (D).

 Depress the brake pedal.

The set speed driving is deactivated automati-

cally in any of the following ways.

 When you depress the clutch pedal (on

vehicles equipped with manual transaxle).

 When your speed slows to about 10 mph

(15 km/h) or more below the set speed

because of a hill, etc.

 When your speed slows to about 25 mph

(40 km/h) or less.

 When the active stability control (ASC)

starts operating.

Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”

on page 5-49.

Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

vated as follow:

 When the engine speed rises and

approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the

red-colored part of the tachometer dial).

N00518900306

If the set speed driving is deactivated by the

condition described in “To deactivate” on

page 5-55, you can resume the previously set

speed by pressing the RES + switch (C) while

driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)

or higher.

Under either of the following conditions,

however, using the switch does not allow you

to resume the previously set speed. In these

situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:

 The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF

switch is pressed.

 [Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or

“ACC” position.

[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

To deactivate

WARNING

 On vehicles equipped with continuously

variable transmission (CVT), although the

set speed driving will be deactivated when

shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position,

never move the selector lever to the “N”

(NEUTRAL) position while driving.

You would have no engine braking and

could cause a serious accident.

CAUTION

 When the set speed driving is deactivated

automatically in any situation other than

those listed above, there may be a system

malfunction.

Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF

switch to turn off the cruise control and have

your vehicle inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

To resume the set speed

BK0212400US.book 55 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)

5-56 Features and controls

Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.

 Indicator is turned OFF.

N00530201553

The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire

inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels

to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The

system only indicates when a tire is signifi-

cantly under-inflated.

Tire pressure monitoring

system

(if so equipped)

WARNING

 The compact spare wheel (if so equipped)

does not have a tire inflation pressure sen-

sor.

When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-

sure monitoring system will not work

properly.

See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer as soon as possible to replace or

repair the original tire.

NOTE

 The tire pressure monitoring system is not a

substitute for regularly checking tire infla-

tion pressures.

Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures

as described in “Tires” on page 9-12.

 The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is

installed in the illustrated location.

• On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has

the metallic air valve (B), replace grommet

and washer (C) with a new one when the

tire is replaced.

• On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has

the rubber air valve (D), replace rubber air

valve (D) with a new one when the tire is

replaced.

For details, please contact your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

Type 1

Type 2

BK0212400US.book 56 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-57

N00532701347

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in

ON, the tire pressure monitoring system

warning light normally illuminates and goes

off a few seconds later.

If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for

the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated,

the warning light will remain illuminated

while the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in ON.

Refer to “If the warning light illuminates

while driving” on page 5-58 and take the nec-

essary measures.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size

than the size indicated on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure

for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-

tale illuminates, you should stop and check

your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-

nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-

cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please

note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not reached

the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale.

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem warning light

CAUTION

 If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-

ing light does not illuminate when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or

the operation mode is put in ON, it means

that the tire pressure monitoring system is

not working properly. Have the system

inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

In such situations, a malfunctioning of the

system may be preventing the monitoring of

the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,

sharp turning and high-speed driving.

 If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-

sure monitoring system, the tire pressure

monitoring system warning light will blink

for approximately 1 minute and then remain

continuously illuminated. The warning light

will issue further warnings each time the

engine is restarted as long as the malfunction

exists.

Check to see whether the warning light goes

off after few minutes driving.

If it then goes off during driving, there is no

problem.

However, if the warning light does not go

off, or if it blinks again when the engine is

restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

In such situations, a malfunctioning of the

system may be preventing the monitoring of

the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when

the warning light appears while driving,

avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and

high-speed driving.

BK0212400US.book 57 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)

5-58 Features and controls

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined

with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately one min-

ute and then remain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue upon subsequent

vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction

exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illumi-

nated, the system may not be able to detect or

signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-

ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-

function telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that

the replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-

erly.

N00532800501

1. If the tire pressure monitoring system

warning light illuminates, avoid hard

braking, sharp steering maneuvers and

high speeds. You should stop and adjust

the tires to the proper inflation pressure as

soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at

the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page

9-12.

2. If the tire pressure monitoring system

warning light remains illuminated after

you have been driving for about 20 min-

utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-

sure, one or more of the tires may have a

puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a

puncture, have it repaired by an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as

possible.

If the warning light illuminates

while driving

NOTE

 When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-

sure, do not apply excessive force to the

valve stem to avoid breakage.

 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-

sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the

valve stem.

Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could

get into the valve, resulting in damage to the

tire inflation pressure sensor.

 Do not use metal valve caps, which may

cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion

and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-

sors.

 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-

ing light will go off after a few minutes of

driving.

WARNING

 If the warning light illuminates while you

are driving, avoid hard braking, sharp

steering maneuvers and high speeds.

Driving with an under-inflated tire

adversely affects vehicle performance and

can result in an accident.

CAUTION

 The warning light may not illuminate imme-

diately in the event of a tire blowout or rapid

leak.

NOTE

 To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-

tion pressure sensors, have any punctured

tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,

damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor is

not covered by your warranty.

BK0212400US.book 58 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-59

The tire pressure monitoring system may not

work normally in the following circum-

stances:

 A wireless facility or device using the

same frequency is near the vehicle.

 Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders

and/or on the wheels.

 The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery

is dead.

 Wheels other than Mitsubishi Genuine

wheels are being used.

 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-

tion pressure sensors are being used.

 Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-

rized by the vehicle are used.

 Compact spare tire (if so equipped) is fit-

ted on a road wheel.

 A window tint that affects the radio wave

signals is installed.

N00532900153

If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure

sensors are installed, their ID codes must be

programmed into the tire pressure monitoring

system. Have tire and wheel replacement per-

formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire

inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel

replacement is not done by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by

your warranty.

N00533000236

Your tire pressure monitoring system oper-

ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) Rules

(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry

Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).

This device complies with part 15 of FCC

Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt

RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two con-

ditions.

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference

 This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray

on any tire.

Such a spray could damage the tire inflation

pressure sensors.

Have any puncture repaired by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

 Using the tire repair kit may damage the tire

inflation pressure sensor. The vehicle must

promptly be inspected and repaired by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer after

using the tire repair kit.

NOTE

 Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-

ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to

large variations in ambient temperature, the

tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated

(causing the warning light come on) when

the ambient temperature is relatively low. If

the warning light comes on, adjust the tire

inflation pressure.

Whenever the tires and wheels

are replaced with new ones

CAUTION

 The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent

the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure

sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of

the sensors.

General information

WARNING

 Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

BK0212400US.book 59 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

5-60 Features and controls

N00546200144

When the gearshift lever or the selector lever

is in the “R” position with the ignition switch

or the operation mode is in ON, the rear-view

image will be displayed on the screen of the

Mitsubishi Multi Entertainment System.

When the gearshift lever or the selector lever

is shifted out of the “R” position, the rear-

view image will go off.

The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at

the left side of the liftgate handle.

Reference lines and upper surface of the rear

bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.

 Red line (B) indicates approximately 20

inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.

 Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-

mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the

vehicle body.

 Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-

tance from the rear bumper.

Rear-view camera (if so

equipped)

WARNING

 Never rely solely on the rear-view camera

to clear the area behind your vehicle.

Always check visually behind and all

around your vehicle for persons, animals,

obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to

do so can result in vehicle damage, serious

injury or death.

 The rear-view camera is an aid system for

backing up, but it is not a substitute for

your visual confirmation.

 The view on the screen is limited, and

objects outside the view, such as under the

bumper or around either corner of the

bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen.

Location of rear-view camera

CAUTION

 If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image

cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the

lens with clean water and gently wipe with a

clean, soft cloth.

 To avoid damaging the camera;

• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish

it by using an abrasive compound.

• Do not disassemble the camera.

• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.

• Do not spray the camera and its surround-

ings with high-pressure water.

• Make sure that the liftgate is securely

closed when backing up.

Reference lines on the screen

1: Approximately at the rear edge of the

rear bumper

2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)

3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)

BK0212400US.book 60 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-61

CAUTION

 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle

lens. As a result, images and distances shown

on the screen are not exact.

 Actual distance may be different from dis-

tance indicated by the lines on the screen,

depending on the loading condition of the

vehicle and road surface condition.

The reference lines for distance and vehicle

width are based on a level, flat road surface.

In the following cases, objects shown on the

screen will appear to be farther off than they

actually are.

• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed

down with the weight of passengers and

luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1)

• When there is an upward slope at the back.

(Case 2)

Case 1

A- Actual objects

B- Objects shown on the screen

CAUTION

 The reference lines for distance and vehicle

width are intended to indicate the distance to

a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.

They may not indicate correct distance

depending on the shape of an obstacle.

For example, when there is an object behind

the vehicle that has upper sections projecting

in the direction of the vehicle, the reference

lines on the screen will indicate that point A

is the farthest point and point B is the closest

point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B

are actually the same distance from the vehi-

cle, and point C is farther off than point A

and B.

Case 2

A- Actual objects

B- Objects shown on the screen

NOTE

 Mirror image is displayed on the screen.

 Monitor brightness is adjusted automatically

by sensors.

 It is possible to change the display language

of the screen.

For details, please refer to the separated

owner’s manual for “Mitsubishi Multi Enter-

tainment System”.

 Under certain circumstances, it may become

difficult to see an image on the screen, even

when the system is functioning correctly.

• In a dark area, such as at night.

• When water drops or condensation are on

the lens.

• When sun light or headlights shine directly

into the lens.

BK0212400US.book 61 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Instrument cluster

5-62 Features and controls

N00519000391

N00519100262

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in

miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour

(km/h).

N00519200292

The tachometer shows engine revolutions per

minute. This allows the driver to determine

the most efficient selector position and engine

speed combinations.

This gauge also assists in evaluating engine

performance.

N00555001318

The multi-information display displays the

odometer, trip odometer, service reminder,

fuel remaining, selector lever position, aver-

age fuel consumption, driving range, etc.

Instrument cluster

1- Tachometer  P.5-62

2- Multi-information display  P.5-62

3- Speedometer  P.5-62

4- Multi-information display switch

Speedometer

Tachometer

Type A

Type B

CAUTION

 The red zone indicates an engine speed

beyond the range of safe operation.

Select the correct shift position (manual

transaxle) or selector position (CVT) to con-

trol the engine speed so that the tachometer

indicator does not enter the red zone.

Multi-information display

BK0212400US.book 62 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-63

N00574800015

Each time you lightly press the multi-information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.

1- Information display  P.5-63

2- Selector lever position display* 

P.5-41

3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-66

NOTE

 When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in OFF, the selector lever position

display and fuel remaining display are not

displayed.

Information display

BK0212400US.book 63 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Multi-information display

5-64 Features and controls

N00574900016

The odometer indicates the total distance the

vehicle has traveled.

N00575000014

The trip odometer indicates the distance trav-

eled between two points.

1- Odometer  P.5-64

Trip odometer  P.5-64

4- Instrument panel light dimmer control

 P.5-65

5- Driving range display  P.5-65

6- Average fuel consumption display 

P.5-66

7- Service reminder (distance)  P.5-67

8- Service reminder (month)  P.5-67

NOTE

 When the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF, the driving range display and average fuel consumption display are not displayed.

 While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch.

Odometer Trip odometer

Usage examples for trip odometer , trip

odometer

BK0212400US.book 64 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-65

To return the display to 0, hold down the

multi-information display switch for about 1

second or more. Only the currently displayed

value will be reset.

Example

If trip odometer is displayed, only trip

odometer will be reset.

N00575100015

Each time you press the multi-information

display switch (2), there is a sound and the

brightness of the instrument panel lights

changes.

N00575200016

This displays the approximate driving range

(how many more miles or kilometers you can

drive). When the driving range falls below

approximately 30 miles (50 km), “---” is dis-

played.

It is possible to measure two currently trav-

eled distances, from home using trip odom-

eter and from a particular point on the

way using trip odometer .

To reset the trip odometer

NOTE

 Both trip odometers and can count

up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.

When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9

miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo-

meters.

 When disconnecting the battery terminal, the

memories of trip odometer displays and

are cleared, and their displays return to

“0.0 miles/kilometers”.

Instrument panel light dimmer

control

1- Brightness level

2- Multi-information display switch

NOTE

 You can adjust to 8 different levels for when

the parking lights or headlights are illumi-

nated and 8 for when they are not.

Each time you reduce two brightness levels,

the segment display of the brightness level

decreases one by one.

Bright Dim

 If you press and hold the switch for longer

than about 1 second, the brightness automati-

cally scrolls through its different levels, and

stops scrolling when you release the switch.

Select your desired level of brightness.

 The brightness level of the instruments is

stored when the ignition switch is turned to

the “OFF” position or the operation mode is

put in OFF.

Driving range display

NOTE

 The driving range is determined based on the

fuel consumption data. This may vary

depending on the driving conditions and hab-

its. Treat the distance displayed as just a

rough guideline.

 When you refuel, the driving range display is

updated.

However, if you only add a small amount of

fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.

Fill to a full tank whenever possible.

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 65 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Multi-information display

5-66 Features and controls

N00575300017

This displays the average fuel consumption

from the last reset to the present.

The reset mode conditions for the average

fuel consumption display can be switched

between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”.

For information on how to change the aver-

age fuel consumption display setting, refer to

“Changing the function settings” on page

5-68.

N00575400018

The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel

level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch

or the operation mode in ON.

When the remaining fuel level runs low (one

segment is displayed), the last segment of the

fuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is

 When your vehicle is stopped on an

extremely steep hill, the driving range value

may, change. This is due to the movement of

fuel in the tank and does not indicate any

breakdown.

 The display setting can be changed to the

preferred units (miles or km).

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on

page 5-68.

Average fuel consumption dis-

play

NOTE

 The average fuel consumption display can be

reset separately in both auto reset mode and

manual reset mode.

 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-

sumption cannot be measured.

NOTE

 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset

mode”.

 Average fuel consumption may vary depend

on the driving conditions (road conditions,

how you drive, etc.).

The actual fuel consumption may differ from

the fuel consumption displayed, so treat the

fuel consumption displayed as just a rough

guideline.

 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase

from memory the manual reset mode or auto

reset mode setting for the average fuel con-

sumption display.

 The display setting can be changed to the

preferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}.

Refer to “Changing the function settings” on

page 5-68.

Fuel remaining display

NOTE

1- Full

0- Empty

NOTE

 It may take several seconds to stabilize the

display after refilling the tank.

 If fuel is added with the ignition switch or

the operation mode in ON, the remaining

fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel

level.

 The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel

tank filler door is located on the left side of

the vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank”

on page 3-3.)

Fuel remaining warning display

BK0212400US.book 66 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-67

turned to the “ON” position or the operation

mode is changed to ON.

When the remaining fuel level very runs low

(no segments displayed), “ ” and the bar

graph flash.

If the warning display appears, refuel as soon

as possible.

N00556701266

Displays the approximate time until the next

recommended periodic inspection. “---” is

displayed when the inspection time has

arrived.

1. Shows the time until the next periodic

inspection.

2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-

tion is due. Contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice to have the system

checked.

3. After your vehicle is inspected at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it

displays the time until the next periodic

inspection.

NOTE

 On hills or curves, the display may be incor-

rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

CAUTION

 Running out of gas could damage the cata-

lytic converter. If the warning display

appears, refuel as soon as possible.

Service reminder

NOTE

 The service reminder time can be modified

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,

to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to

“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi-

cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For

further information, please contact your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Distance

Month

NOTE

 Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100

km) and the time in units of 1 month.

NOTE

 When the next periodic inspection is

approaching, the spanner mark will be dis-

played whenever the ignition switch is

turned from the “LOCK” position to the

“ON” position or when the operation mode is

changed from OFF to ON.

The spanner mark will continuously be dis-

played, even on non-service reminder dis-

plays (odometer, trip meter, etc.), until the

service reminder is reset.

When the service reminder resets, the span-

ner mark will not be displayed until the next

periodic inspection.

BK0212400US.book 67 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Multi-information display

5-68 Features and controls

The “---” display can be reset while the igni-

tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-

tion display switch a few times, the infor-

mation display switches to the service

reminder display.

2. Press and hold the multi-information dis-

play switch for about 1 second or more to

make the spanner mark start flashing. (If

there is no operation for about 10 seconds

with flashing, the display will revert to its

original indication.)

3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly

press the multi-information meter switch,

the display switches from “---” to

“cLEAr”. After that, the time until the

next periodic inspection is shown.

N00556800143

When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in ON, the fuel consumption unit,

displayed in the multi-information display,

and the average fuel consumption reset mode

can be modified as desired.

N00575500019

You can change the mode condition for the

average fuel consumption display to “Auto

reset” or “Manual reset”.

To reset

CAUTION

 The customer is responsible for making sure

that regular inspections and maintenance and

periodic inspections and maintenance are

performed.

Inspections and maintenance must be per-

formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-

tions.

NOTE

 The “---” display cannot be reset while the

ignition switch or the operation mode is in

ON.

 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-

tance and a certain period of time, the dis-

play is reset and the time until the next

periodic inspection is displayed.

 If you accidentally reset the display, consult

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for

assistance.

Changing the function settings

CAUTION

 The driver should not operate the display

while the vehicle is in motion.

 When operating the system, stop the vehicle

in a safe area.

Changing the reset mode for aver-

age fuel consumption

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 68 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Multi-information display

Features and controls 5-69

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-

tion display switch a few times, the infor-

mation display switches to the driving

range display.

Refer to “Information display” on page

5-63.

2. Each time you press the multi-information

display switch for 1 second or more on

driving range display, you can switch

reset mode for average fuel consumption.

(A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset

mode)

 When the average fuel consumption is

being displayed, if you hold down the

multi-information display switch, these

calculations will be reset to zero.

 When the following operation is per-

formed, the mode setting changes auto-

matically from manual to auto.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-

tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

Change the operation mode to ON from

ACC or OFF.

 When the average fuel consumption is

being displayed, if you hold down the

multi-information display switch, these

calculations will be reset to zero.

 When the engine switch or the operation

mode is in the following conditions, the

average fuel consumption display will

automatically reset.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch has been set to the

“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4

hours or more.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

The operation mode has been set to ACC

or OFF for about 4 hours or more.

N00557100156

The fuel consumption display unit can be

changed. The distance and amount units are

also switched to match the selected fuel con-

sumption unit.

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-

tion display switch a few times, the infor-

mation display switches to the average

fuel consumption display.

Refer to “Information display” on page

5-63.

2. Press and hold the multi-information dis-

play switch for about 5 seconds or more

until buzzer sound is heard twice.

Manual reset mode

Auto reset mode Manual reset mode

Auto reset mode

NOTE

 The average fuel consumption display can be

reset separately for the auto reset mode and

for the manual reset mode.

 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase

from memory the manual reset mode or auto

reset mode setting for the average fuel con-

sumption display.

 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset

mode”.

Changing the fuel consumption

display unit

BK0212400US.book 69 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Indicator and warning light package

5-70 Features and controls

3. Press and hold the multi-information dis-

play switch to switch in sequence from

“km/L”  “L/100 km”  “mpg” 

“km/L”.

The distance units is also changed in the fol-

lowing combinations to match the selected

fuel consumption unit.

N00519800849

NOTE

 The display units for the driving range, the

average fuel consumption are changed, but

the units for the indicating needle (speedom-

eter), the odometer, the trip odometer and the

service reminder will remain unchanged.

 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of

the unit setting is erased and it returns auto-

matically to factory setting.

Fuel consumption

Distance

(driving range)

km/L km

L/100 km km

mpg mile (s)

Indicator and warning light package

BK0212400US.book 70 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Indicators

Features and controls 5-71

N00519900127

N00520000216

The arrows will flash in time with the corre-

sponding exterior turn signals when the turn

signal lever is used.

Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-

ing flasher switch is pressed.

N00520100086

A blue light comes on when the headlights

are on high beam.

N00520200175

This indicator comes on while the front fog

lights are on.

N00575600010

This indicator comes on in green while the

coolant temperature is low.

N00568800036

This indicator comes on while fuel-efficient

driving is achieved.

1- High beam indicator  P.5-71

2- Electric power steering system warning

light  P.5- 48

3- Tire pressure monitoring system warn-

ing light (if so equipped)  P.5-57

4- Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning

lights  P.5-71

5- Front fog light indicator (if so

equipped)  P.5-71

6- Door-ajar warning light  P.5-74

7- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

warning light  P.4-27

8- High coolant temperature warning light

(red)  P.5-73

9- Low coolant temperature indicator

(green)  P.5-71

10- Oil pressure warning light  P.5-73

11- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-

VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check

engine light”)  P.5-72

12- Charging system warning light 

P.5-73

13- Brake warning light  P.5-72

14- Anti-lock braking system warning light

 P.5-47

15- Multi-information display  P.5-62

16- Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning

light  P.4- 11

17- Cruise control indicator (if so

equipped)  P.5-52

18- Active stability control (ASC) indica-

tor/warning light  P.5-51, 5-51

19- Active stability control (ASC) OFF

indicator/warning light  P.5-51, 5-51

20- ECO indicator  P.5-71

21- For details, refer to “Warning activa-

tor” on page 5-15 (if so equipped)

22- For details, refer to “Warning activa-

tor” on page 5-15 (if so equipped)

Indicators

Turn signal indicators/Hazard

warning lights

NOTE

 If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if

the indicator stays on without flashing, check

for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or

turn signal connection.

High beam indicator

Front fog light indicator (if so

equipped)

Low coolant temperature indi-

cator - green

NOTE

 When the indicator goes out, this should be

used as a rough indication of when the heat-

ing starts working.

ECO indicator

BK0212400US.book 71 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Warning lights

5-72 Features and controls

N00520300147

N00520400526

This light comes on when the ignition switch

is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or

the operation mode is put in ON.

When the engine is started, the light should

go off a few seconds later.

The warning light also illuminates after start-

ing the engine under the following condi-

tions.

 When the parking brake is still applied.

 When the brake fluid level is low.

 When the brake system circuit is not

working properly.

When the vehicle is moving at more than 5

mph (8 km/h) and the parking brake applied,

a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that

the parking brake is not properly release.

Before driving, be sure that the parking brake

is fully released and the brake warning light

is off.

N00520500804

This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-

nostic (OBD) system which monitors the

emissions, engine control system or continu-

ously variable transmission (CVT) control

system. If a problem is detected in one of

these systems, this indicator illuminates or

flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position or the operation mode is

put in ON, this indicator normally comes on

and goes off after the engine has started.

This indicator will come on if the fuel tank

filler cap is not properly tightened. If this

indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-

ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is

properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise

until you hear clicking sounds.)

If this indicator does not go off after several

seconds or lights up while driving, have the

system checked as soon as possible at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

Warning lights

Brake warning light and buzzer

CAUTION

 If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock

braking system warning light are illuminated

at the same time, the braking force distribu-

tion function will not operate, the vehicle

may be destabilized during sudden braking

under the following conditions.

• When the brake warning light does not go

out even when the parking brake is

released.

• When the brake warning light stays on

while driving.

If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking

and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in a

safe place, and contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice as soon as possible.

 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the

following manner when brake performance

is deteriorated.

• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when

you press down on the brake pedal harder

than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal

may go all the way to the floor.

• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking

to reduce your speed and slowly apply the

parking brake.

Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the

stop lights and to alert the vehicles behind

you.

Engine malfunction indicator

(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”

or “Check engine light”)

BK0212400US.book 72 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Warning lights

Features and controls 5-73

N00520600313

This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-

tion in the charging system or when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position

(engine off) or the operation mode is put in

ON. When the engine is started, the light

should go out. Check to make sure that the

light has gone out before driving.

N00520700170

This light comes on when the engine oil pres-

sure is below normal. If the light stays on

while driving, stop the engine as soon as pos-

sible. Do not run the engine until the cause of

the low oil pressure is corrected.

N00575700011

This light comes on in red if the coolant tem-

perature becomes excessively high.

CAUTION

 Driving for a long time with the engine mal-

function indicator on may cause more dam-

age to the emission control system. This

could also affect fuel economy and drivabil-

ity.

 If this indicator does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have

the system checked at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

 If the engine malfunction indicator comes on

while the engine is running, avoid driving at

high speeds.

During vehicle operation with the indicator

on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you

depress the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-

cator on, you must depress the brake pedal

more firmly than usual since the engine

idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-

cle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to

creep forward.

NOTE

 Do not disconnect the battery cable when the

engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE

ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is

on.

The engine electronic control module stores

critical OBD information (especially exhaust

emission data), which may be lost if the bat-

tery cable is disconnected while the engine

malfunction indicator is on. This will make it

difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-

lems.

Charging system warning light

CAUTION

 If the warning light stays on while the engine

is running, park your vehicle in a safe place

as soon as possible and contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice to have the system checked.

Oil pressure warning light

CAUTION

 If this light comes on when the engine oil

level is not low, have your vehicle checked at

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

 This warning light does not show the amount

of oil in the crankcase. This can only be

determined by checking the oil level with the

dipstick with the engine turned off.

High coolant temperature

warning light - red

BK0212400US.book 73 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

5-74 Features and controls

N00520900329

This light comes on when any door or the lift-

gate is open or not completely closed.

When the vehicle is moving at more than 5

mph (8 km/h) and any door or the liftgate is

open or ajar, a tone will sound 4 times to

inform the driver that any door or the liftgate

is not properly shut.

N00522500736

Rotate the switch to operate the lights.

The combinations of switch operations and

illuminated lights differ in accordance with

the following conditions.

Except for vehicles equipped with daytime

running lights

[When the engine is started, and the parking

brake is released]

The daytime running lights will be illumi-

nated:

CAUTION

 If the light comes on during vehicle opera-

tion, it indicates that the engine is possibly

overheating. Continued driving could make

the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle

in a safe place and take appropriate action.

(Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.)

NOTE

 The high coolant temperature warning light

may illuminate when the vehicle has been

driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This

illuminating does not necessarily indicate a

problem. It should stop if you keep the

engine running for a while or continue driv-

ing the vehicle.

Door-ajar warning light and

buzzer

CAUTION

 Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar

warning light is off.

NOTE

 When the auto cut-out function of the doom

light is been activated, the light goes out

automatically after about 30 minutes.

Refer to “Dome light” on page 5-106.

Combination headlights and

dimmer switch

Headlights

OFF All lights off

Parking, tail, front and rear side-

marker lights, license plate and

instrument panel lights on

Headlights and other lights on

Vehicles equipped with daytime running

lights

OFF

The daytime running lights illumi-

nated

The daytime running lights illumi-

nated

Parking, tail, front and rear side-

marker lights, license plate and

instrument panel lights on

Headlights and other lights on

BK0212400US.book 74 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

Features and controls 5-75

[When the engine is not running, or when the

engine is running but the parking brake is not

released]

The engine starts when the lights are off.

N00532600570

 If the following operation is performed

with the combination headlights and dim-

mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,

the lights automatically turn off.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

or “ACC” position or the key is removed

from the ignition switch and the driver’s

door is opened.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

The operation mode is changed to OFF or

ACC and the driver’s door is opened.

 If the following operation is performed

with the combination headlights and dim-

mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,

the lights automatically turn off after

about 3 minutes.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”

or “ACC” position or the key is removed

from the ignition switch and the driver’s

door is not opened.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-

key]

The operation mode is changed to OFF or

ACC and the driver’s door is not opened.

If the combination headlights and dimmer

switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-

tion again after the engine is turned off, the

about 3-minute auto-cutout function

NOTE

 Once the daytime running light come on,

they do not go out until the ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or

the operation mode is changed to OFF or

ACC.

OFF All lights off

Parking, tail, front and rear side-

marker lights, license plate and

instrument panel lights on

Headlights and other lights on

NOTE

 Do not leave the headlights and other lights

on for a long period of time when the engine

is not running. The battery will run down.

 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been

washed, the inside of the lens sometimes

becomes foggy. This is the same as when

window glass mists up on a humid day, and

does not indicate a problem. When the light

is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.

However, if water collects inside the light,

have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

Light auto-cutout function

(headlights and other lights)

NOTE

 The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-

vated.

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for details.

When you want to keep the lights

on:

BK0212400US.book 75 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Turn signal lever

5-76 Features and controls

described above will not work. The lights (the

parking lights, tail lights and license plate

lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto-

matically.

N00549800226

[When using a key to start the engine]

If the driver’s door is opened with the key in

the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed

from the ignition switch while the lights are

on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn

off the lights.

[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the

engine]

If the driver’s door is opened with the opera-

tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the

operation mode is changed to OFF while the

lights are on, the tone will sound to remind

you to turn off the lights.

In either case, the lights will turn off automat-

ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn

the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop

the tone.

N00549900142

To change the headlights from high beam to

low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal

lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low

beam as a courtesy whenever there are

oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic

moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue

light in the instrument cluster indicates when

the headlights are on high beam.

N00550000185

You can flash the high beams by pulling the

lever gently toward you (2). The lights will

go back to normal when you let go. While the

high beam is on, you will see a blue light on

the instrument panel.

N00522600519

When changing lanes, or to making a gradual

turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-

tion (1). It will return to the neutral position

when you let go. Use the full position (2)

when making a normal turn. The lever will

return to the neutral position when the turn is

complete. There may be times when the lever

does not return to the neutral position. This

usually happens when the steering wheel is

turned only slightly. You can easily return the

lever by hand.

Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly

then release it, the turn signal lights and the

indicator light in the instrument cluster will

flash three times.

Headlight reminder buzzer

Dimmer (high/low beam

change)

Headlight flasher

NOTE

 You can flash the high beams by pulling the

lever toward you, even if the light switch is

off.

 If you turn the lights off with the head lights

set to high-beam illumination, the headlights

are automatically returned to their low-beam

setting when the light switch is next turned

to the “ ” position.

Turn signal lever

BK0212400US.book 76 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Hazard warning flasher switch

Features and controls 5-77

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for details.

N00522700318

If you press the flasher switch, the turn sig-

nals will flash intermittently, and so will the

hazard warning lights. This is an emergency

warning system and should not be used when

the vehicle is in motion, except for emergen-

cies.

If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers

will keep working after the ignition switch is

removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.

N00522800393

The front fog lights illuminate only when the

headlights are on low beam.

Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”

position turns on the front fog lights as well

as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To

turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of

the “OFF” position.

The knob will return to the neutral position

when it is released.

NOTE

 A light in the instrument panel flashes to

show when the turn signal lights are working

properly.

If this light flashes faster than usual, check

for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-

functioning connection in the signal.

If the panel light does not come on when the

lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a

burned out bulb in the panel.

Have the system inspected by your autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice.

 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

• Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash

function for lane changes.

• Adjust the time required to operate the

lever for the 3-flash function.

• Changing of the tone of a sounding buzzer

as the turn signal lights flash.

Hazard warning flasher

switch

NOTE

 If the flashers are used for several hours, the

battery will run down. This could make it

difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle.

Front fog light switch (if so

equipped)

NOTE

 If the headlights are switched to high beam,

the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-

minate again when the headlights are

switched back to low beam.

BK0212400US.book 77 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Wiper and washer switch

5-78 Features and controls

N00523000666

The windshield wiper and washer can be

operated with the ignition switch or the oper-

ation mode is in ON or ACC.

If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do

not operate the wipers until the ice has melted

and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper

motor may be damaged.

With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive

intermittent operation) position, the intermit-

tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the

knob (A).

The misting function can be used when the

ignition switch or the operation mode is in

ON or ACC.

The wipers will operate once if the wiper

lever is raised to the “MIST” position and

released. This operation is useful when it is

drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to

operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”

position.

 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or

“ ” position while the front fog lights are

illuminated, they will automatically turn off.

They can be turned back on again by rotating

the combination headlights and dimmer

switch back to “ ” position, and turning

the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-

tion.

 Do not use fog lights except in conditions of

fog, otherwise excessive light glare may

temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.

Wiper and washer switch

CAUTION

 If the washer is used in cold weather, the

washer fluid sprayed against the glass may

freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm

the glass with the defroster before using the

washer.

Windshield wipers

NOTE

MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate once.

OFF- Off

INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)

LO- Slow

HI- Fast

To adjust intermittent intervals

1- Fast

2- Slow

NOTE

 The speed-sensitive-operation function of

the windshield wipers can be deactivated.

For further information, please contact your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

Misting function

BK0212400US.book 78 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Wiper and washer switch

Features and controls 5-79

N00504600298

To turn on the windshield washer, pull the

lever toward you with the ignition switch or

the operation mode is in ON or ACC.

The wipers will wipe automatically several

times when the washer fluid is sprayed.

To turn off the spray, release the lever.

N00523200408

The rear window wiper and washer can be

operated when the ignition switch or the

operation mode is in ON or ACC.

Turn the knob to operate the rear window

wiper.

N00523500254

Windshield washer

Rear window wiper and washer

OFF- Off

INT- The wiper operates continuously for

several seconds then operates inter-

mittently at intervals of about 8 sec-

onds.

Washer fluid will be sprayed onto

the rear window glass while the

knob is turned fully in either direc-

tion.

When the washer fluid is sprayed,

the wiper will automatically operate

2 or 3 times.

NOTE

 On vehicles with CVT, to ensure a clear rear-

ward view, the wiper perform several contin-

uous operations when the reverse gear is

engaged and the switch is in the “INT” posi-

tion.

Following this continuous operation, the

wiper will automatically switch to intermit-

tent operation.

 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

• Adjustment of the interval for intermittent

operation.

• Changing intermittent wiper operation to

continuous wiper operation.

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for details.

 The washer fluid reservoir is located in the

engine compartment.

Check the fluid level regularly and refill if

necessary. (Refer to “Washer fluid” on page

9-9.)

Precautions to observe when

using wipers and washers

CAUTION

 If the washer is used in cold weather, washer

fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze,

blocking your view. Heat the glass with the

defroster before using the washer.

BK0212400US.book 79 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Electric rear window defogger switch

5-80 Features and controls

N00523700403

The rear window defogger can be used when

the engine is running.

The indicator light (A) will come on when

you press the electric rear window defogger

switch. Electric current will flow through the

heating wires on the rear window to help

clear away moisture or frost.

After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys-

tem will shut off automatically.

To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-

utes have passed, press the switch again. The

indicator light will go out and the defogger

will turn off.

If you need the defogger for more than 20

minutes, press the switch again. This will add

20 more minutes.

NOTE

 Do not use the wipers when the windshield is

dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the

wiper blades prematurely.

 Before using the wipers in cold weather,

check to be sure that the wiper blades are not

frozen to the windshield or rear window.

Using the wipers while the blades are frozen

could cause the wiper motor to burn out.

 If the wipers are left on the glass out of the

parked position and they become blocked by

ice or other deposits on the glass, the motor

may still burn out even if the wiper switch is

OFF. If deposits form on the windshield,

park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the

engine, and clean the glass so that the wipers

can operate smoothly.

 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-

onds at a time. Do not operate the washer

when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or

the pump may fail.

 During cold weather, add a recommended

washer solution that will not freeze in the

washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer

may not work or may be damaged.

 Replace the wiper blades when they are

worn. Use the proper size replacement

blades. For further information, please con-

tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer.

Electric rear window defog-

ger switch

Type 1

CAUTION

 The rear window defogger is not designed to

melt snow. Remove any snow manually

before using the rear window defogger.

 Use the rear window defogger only after the

engine has started and is running. Be sure to

turn the defogger switch off immediately

after the window is clear to save on battery

power.

Type 2

BK0212400US.book 80 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Horn switch

Features and controls 5-81

N00523800185

To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark

on the steering wheel.

N00563700043

The Link System takes control of the devices

connected via the USB input terminal or the

Bluetooth

2.0 interface allowing the con-

nected devices to be operated by using the

switches in the vehicle or voice commands.

See the following section for details on how

to operate.

Refer to “Bluetooth

2.0 interface” on page

5-81.

Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-101.

Refer to “To play tracks from USB device”

on page 7-27.

Refer to “To play tracks from a Bluetooth

device” on page 7-35.

Bluetooth

is a registered trademark of

BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.

N00563800015

You have acquired a device that includes soft-

ware licensed by Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-

tion from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the

automotive experience business unit), and

their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a

complete list of these 3rd party products and

their end user license agreements, please go

to the following website.

http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis-

closure.pdf

N00563901257

For information on operations for vehicles

equipped with the Mitsubishi Multi Entertain-

ment System (MMES), refer to the separate

owner’s manual for details.

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface allows for mak-

ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle

using a cellular phone compatible with a

wireless communication technology com-

monly known as Bluetooth

. It also allows

the user to play music, saved in a Bluetooth

music player, through the vehicle’s speakers.

The system is equipped with a voice recogni-

tion function, which allows you to make

hands-free calls by simple switch and voice

 Do not place stickers, tape, or other items

that are attached with adhesive over the grid

wires on the rear window.

 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a

soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid

wires.

NOTE

 If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir-

rors, mist can also be removed from the out-

side rearview mirrors when the rear window

defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Door

mirror heater” on page 5-34.)

Horn switch

CAUTION

Link System (if so equipped)

Link System End User License

Agreement

Bluetooth

2.0 interface (if so

equipped)

For vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi

Multi Entertainment System (MMES)

Except for vehicles equipped with Mit-

subishi Multi Entertainment System

(MMES)

BK0212400US.book 81 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5-82 Features and controls

command operations using a defined voice

tree.

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface can be used

when the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in ON or ACC.

Before you can use the Bluetooth

2.0 inter-

face, you must pair the Bluetooth

device

and Bluetooth

2.0 interface. Refer to “Con-

necting the Bluetooth

2.0 interface and

Bluetooth

device” on page 5-87.

Bluetooth

is a registered trademark of

BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.

Steering control switch and microphone 

P.5-83

Voice recognition function  P.5-84

Useful voice commands  P.5-85

Speaker enrollment function  P.5-86

Connecting the Bluetooth

2.0 interface and

the Bluetooth

device  P.5-87

Operating a music player connected via Blue-

tooth

 P.5-91

How to make or receive hands-free calls 

P.5-91

Phonebook function  P.5-94

WARNING

 Although the Bluetooth

2.0 interface

allows you to make hands-free calls, if you

choose to use the cellular phone while

driving, you must not allow yourself to be

distracted from the safe operation of your

vehicle. Anything, including cellular

phone usage, that distracts you from the

safe operation of your vehicle increases

your risk of an accident.

 Refer to and comply with all state and

local laws in your area regarding cellular

phone usage while driving.

NOTE

 For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,

if the operation mode is left in ACC, the

accessory power will automatically turn off

after a certain period of time and you will no

longer be able to use the Bluetooth

2.0

interface. The accessory power comes on

again if the engine switch is operated.

Refer to “ACC power auto-cutout function”

on page 5-14.

 The Bluetooth

2.0 interface cannot be used

if the Bluetooth

device has a dead battery

or the device power is turned off.

 Hands-free calls will not be possible if your

phone does not have service available.

 If you place the Bluetooth

device in the

cargo area, you may not be able to use the

Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

 Some Bluetooth

devices are not compatible

with the Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

 You can confirm the Link System software

version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3

times (press and hold 2 times and then press

briefly) within 10 seconds.

 For detail of the Bluetooth

2.0 interface,

refer to the following website:

[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]

You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North

America website.

[For vehicles sold in Canada]

You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-

site.

Please read and agree to the “Warning about

Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies”,

the websites mentioned above may connect

you to websites other than the Mitsubishi

Motors website.

http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-

ucts/index.html

 Software updates by cellular phone/digital

audio device manufacturers may

change/alter device connectivity.

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 82 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-83

N00564000072

Press this button to increase the volume.

Press this button to decrease the volume.

 Press this button to change to voice recog-

nition mode.

While the system is in voice recognition

mode, “Listening” will appear on the

audio display.

 If you press the button briefly while in

voice recognition mode, it will interrupt

prompting and allow voice command

input.

Pressing the button longer will deactivate

the voice recognition mode.

 Pressing this button briefly during a call

will enable voice recognition and allow

voice command input.

 Press this button when an incoming call is

received to answer the telephone.

 When another call is received during a

call, press this button to put the first caller

on hold and talk to the new caller.

• In such circumstances, you can press the

button briefly to switch between callers.

You will switch to the first caller and the

other caller will be put on hold.

• To establish a three-way call in such situ-

ations, press the SPEECH button to enter

voice recognition mode and then say

“Join calls.”

 Press this button when an incoming call is

received to refuse the call.

 Press this button during a call to end the

current call.

When another call is on hold, you will

switch to that call.

 If this button is pressed in the voice recog-

nition mode, the voice recognition mode

will be deactivated.

Steering control switch and

microphone

1- Volume up button

2- Volume down button

3- SPEECH button

4- PICK-UP button

5- HANG-UP button

6- Microphone

Volume up button

Volume down button

SPEECH button

PICK-UP button

HANG-UP button

NOTE

 When you press the SPEECH button to enter

voice recognition mode with a cellular phone

paired to the system, current information on

the cellular phone, such as “remaining bat-

tery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,”

will be displayed on the audio display.*

*: Some cellular phones will not send this

information to the Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

BK0212400US.book 83 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5-84 Features and controls

Your voice will be recognized by a micro-

phone in the overhead console, allowing you

to make hands-free calls with voice com-

mands.

N00564100086

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface is equipped

with a voice recognition function.

Simply say voice commands and you can per-

form various operations and make or receive

hands-free calls.

With the Bluetooth

2.0 interface, voice rec-

ognition is possible for US English, North

American Spanish, Canadian French and Jap-

anese. The factory setting is “English.”

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Setup.”

3. Say “Language.”

4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan-

guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa-

nese.” Say the desired language.

(Example: “English”)

5. The voice guide will say “English (Span-

ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this

correct?” Say “Yes.”

If you say “No,” the system will return to

Step 4.

6. When the voice guide says “English

(Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,”

the language change process will be com-

pleted and the system will return to the

main menu.

 Call waiting and three-way calls can be used

by the Bluetooth

2.0 interface, only if it is

possible to use those services with your cel-

lular phone.

Microphone

NOTE

 If a cellular phone is within close proximity

of the microphone, it may distort the sound

quality. In this case, place the cellular phone

as far as possible from the microphone.

Voice recognition function

NOTE

 If the voice command that you say differs

from the predefined command or cannot be

recognised due to ambient noise or some

other reason, the Bluetooth

2.0 interface

will ask you for the voice command again up

to 3 times.

 For best performance and further reduction

of ambient noise, the vehicle windows

should be closed, lower the blower speed and

refrain from conversation with your passen-

gers while engaging the voice recognition

function.

 Some voice commands have alternative

commands.

 Depending on the selected language, some

functions may not be available.

 Language can be changed by using the audio

control panel besides the following proce-

dure.

For details, refer to “To change the language

(vehicles with Bluetooth

2.0 interface)” on

page 7-25.

Selecting the language

NOTE

 The voice guide will repeat the same mes-

sage twice. The first message is in the cur-

rent language, and the second message is in

the selected language.

 If many entries are registered in the vehicle

phonebook, changing the language will take

a longer time.

 Changing the language deletes the mobile

phonebook imported to the Bluetooth

2.0

interface. If you wish to use it, you will have

to import it again.

BK0212400US.book 84 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-85

N00564200016

N00564300017

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface is equipped

with a help function.

If you say “Help” when the system is waiting

for a voice command input, the system will

tell you a list of the commands that can be

used under the circumstances.

N00564400018

There are 2 cancel functions.

If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to

exit from the Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

If you are anywhere else within the system,

say “Cancel” to return to the main menu.

N00564500019

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface is equipped

with a confirmation function.

With the confirmation function activated, you

are given more opportunities than normal to

confirm a command when making various

settings to the Bluetooth

2.0 interface. This

allows you to decrease the possibility that a

setting is accidentally changed.

The confirmation function can be turned on

or off by following the steps below.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Setup.”

3. Say “Confirmation prompts.”

4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation

prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to

turn confirmation prompts <off/on>.”

Answer “Yes” to change the setting or

answer “No” to keep the current setting.

5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation

prompts are <off/on>” and then the sys-

tem will return to the main menu.

N00564600023

It is possible to use a passcode as a security

function by setting a passcode of your choice

for the Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

When the security function is turned on, it is

necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit

passcode in order to use all functions of the

Bluetooth

2.0 interface, except for recep-

tion.

Use the following procedure to turn on the

security function by setting a passcode.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Setup.”

3. Say “Passcode.”

4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis-

abled. Would you like to enable it?”

Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No” to cancel the setting of the

passcode and return to the main menu.

5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-

digit passcode. Remember this passcode.

It will be required to use this system.”

Say a 4-digit number which you want to

set as a passcode.

6. For confirmation purposes, the voice

guide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass-

code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No” to return to the passcode

input in Step 5.

7. When the registration of the passcode is

completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-

code is enabled” and the system will

return to the main menu.

Useful voice commands

Help function

Canceling

Confirmation function setting

Security function

Setting the passcode

NOTE

 Passcode will be required to access the sys-

tem after the next ignition cycle.

BK0212400US.book 85 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5-86 Features and controls

If a passcode has been set and the security

function is enabled, the voice guide will say

“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass-

code to continue” when the SPEECH button

is pressed to enter voice recognition mode.

Say the 4-digit passcode number to enter the

passcode.

If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice

guide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect

passcode. Please try again.” Enter the correct

passcode.

Use the following procedure to turn off the

security function by disabling the passcode.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Setup.”

3. Say “Passcode.”

4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is

enabled. Would you like to disable it?”

Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No” to cancel the disabling of

the passcode and return to the main menu.

5. When the disabling of the passcode is

completed, the voice guide will say “Pass-

code is disabled” and the system will

return to the main menu.

N00564700011

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface can use the

speaker enrollment function to create a voice

model for one person per language.

This makes it easier for the Bluetooth

2.0

interface to recognise voice commands said

by you.

You can turn a voice model registered with

the speaker enrollment function on and off

whenever you want.

N00564800038

It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the

speaker enrollment process.

To ensure the best results, run through the

process while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-

ronment that is as quiet as possible (when

there is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-

cle windows are closed). Please turn off your

phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent

interruption of the process.

Use the following procedure for speaker

enrollment.

1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the

gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-

tion (manual transaxle), or the selector

lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin-

uously variable transmission (CVT)), and

pull the parking brake lever.

2. Press the SPEECH button.

 It is required for a little time after engine

stop that the entered passcode is actually

recorded in the system.

If the ignition switch or the operation mode

is made to ACC or ON or the engine is

started immediately after engine stop, there

is a case when the entered passcode is not

recorded in the system. At this time, please

try to enter the passcode again.

Entering the passcode

NOTE

 You can reenter the passcode as many times

as you want.

 If you have forgotten your passcode, say

“Cancel” to quit the voice input mode and

then check with an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer.

NOTE

Disabling the passcode

NOTE

 System must be unlocked to disable the pass-

code.

Speaker enrollment function

Speaker enrollment

NOTE

 Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the

vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the

vehicle in a safe area before attempting

speaker enrollment.

BK0212400US.book 86 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-87

3. Say “Voice training.”

4. The voice guide will say “This operation

must be performed in a quiet environment

while the vehicle is stopped. See the

owner’s manual for the list of required

training phrases. Press and release the

SPEECH button when you are ready to

begin. Press the HANG-UP button to can-

cel at any time.”

Press the SPEECH button to start the

speaker enrollment process.

5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.

Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in

table “Enrollment commands” on page

5-101.

The system will register your voice and

then move on to the registration of the

next command. Continue the process until

all phrases have been registered.

6. When all enrollment commands have

been read out, the voice guide will say

“Speaker enrollment is complete.” The

system will then end the speaker enroll-

ment process and return to the main

menu.

N00564900055

You can turn a voice model registered with

the speaker enrollment function on and off

whenever you want.

You can also retrain the system.

Use the following procedure to perform these

actions.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Voice training.”

3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-

ment process once already, the voice

guide will say either “Enrollment is

enabled. Would you like to disable or

retrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled.

Would you like to enable or retrain?”

4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voice

model is on; when enrollment is “dis-

abled,” the voice model is off. Say the

command that fits your needs.

Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll-

ment process and recreate a new voice

model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on

page 5-86.)

N00565000170

Before you can make or receive hands-free

calls or play music using the Bluetooth

2.0

interface function, you must pair the Blue-

tooth

device and Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

NOTE

 If you do not start the speaker enrollment

process within 3 minutes after pressing the

SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment

function will time out.

The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll-

ment has timed out.” The system will then

beep and the voice recognition mode will be

deactivated.

NOTE

 To repeat the most recent voice training com-

mand, press and release the SPEECH button.

 If you press the HANG-UP button anytime

during the process, the system will beep and

stop the speaker enrollment process.

NOTE

 Completing the speaker enrollment process

will turn on the voice model automatically.

 The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not

work in this mode.

Enabling and disabling the voice

model and retraining

Connecting the Bluetooth

2.0

interface and Bluetooth

device

BK0212400US.book 87 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5-88 Features and controls

Up to 7 Bluetooth

devices can be paired

with the Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

If multiple paired Bluetooth

devices are

available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or

music player most recently connected is auto-

matically connected to the Bluetooth

2.0

interface.

You can also change a Bluetooth

device to

be connected.

To pair a Bluetooth

device with the Blue-

tooth

2.0 interface, follow the steps below.

1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the

gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-

tion (manual transaxle), or the selector

lever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin-

uously variable transmission (CVT)), and

pull the parking brake lever.

2. Press the SPEECH button.

3. Say “Setup.”

4. Say “Pairing Options.”

5. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”

Say “Pair.”

6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-

digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number.

When the confirmation function is on, the

system will confirm whether the number

said is acceptable. Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No” to return to pairing code

selection.

7. The voice guide will say “Start pairing

procedure on the device. See the device

manual for instructions.” Enter in the

Bluetooth

device the 4-digit number you

have registered in Step 6.

NOTE

 Pairing is required only when the device is

used for the first time. Once the device has

been paired with the Bluetooth

2.0 inter-

face, all you need is to bring the device into

the vehicle next time and the device will

connect to the Bluetooth

2.0 interface auto-

matically (if supported by the device). The

device must have Bluetooth

turned ON to

connect.

To pair

NOTE

 You cannot pair any Bluetooth

device with

the Bluetooth

2.0 interface unless the vehi-

cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth

device with the Bluetooth

2.0 interface,

confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe

location.

NOTE

 If 7 devices have already been paired, the

voice guide will say “Maximum devices

paired” and then the system will end the

pairing process. To register a new device,

delete one device and then repeat the pairing

process.

(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting a

device” on page 5-89.)

NOTE

 Some Bluetooth

devices require a specific

pairing code. Please refer to the device man-

ual for pairing code requirements.

 The pairing code entered here is only used

for the Bluetooth

connection certification.

It is any 4-digit number the user would like

to select.

Remember the pairing code as it needs to be

keyed into the Bluetooth

device later in the

pairing process.

Depending on the connection settings of the

Bluetooth

device, this code may have to be

entered each time you connect the Blue-

tooth

device to the Bluetooth

2.0 inter-

face. For the default connection settings,

refer to the instructions for the device.

BK0212400US.book 88 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-89

8. The voice guide will say “Please say the

name of the device after the beep.” You

can assign a desired name for the Blue-

tooth

device and register it as a device

tag. Say the name you want to register

after the beep.

9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com-

plete,” after which a beep will be played

and the pairing process will end.

N00565100025

If multiple paired Bluetooth

devices are

available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or

music player most recently connected is auto-

matically connected to the Bluetooth

2.0

interface.

You can connect to the other paired cellular

phone or music player by following setting

change procedures.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Setup.”

3. Say “Select phone.”

4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”

the numbers of the cellular phones and

device tags of corresponding cellular

phones will be read out in order, starting

with the cellular phone that has been most

recently connected.

Say the number of the cellular phone that

you want to connect to.

When the confirmation function is on, the

system will ask you again whether the

phone that you want to connect to is cor-

rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con-

nect to the cellular phone.

Answer “No,” and the voice guide will

say “Please say.” Say the number of the

phone that you want to connect to.

5. The selected phone will be connected to

the Bluetooth

2.0 interface. The voice

guide will say “<device tag> selected”

and then the system will return to the

main menu.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Setup.”

3. Say “Select music player.”

NOTE

 Depending on the Bluetooth

device, it may

take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue-

tooth

2.0 interface.

 If the Bluetooth

2.0 interface cannot recog-

nize the Bluetooth

device, the voice guide

will say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair-

ing process will be cancelled.

Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-

ports Bluetooth

, and try pairing it again.

 If you enter the wrong number, the voice

guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-

ing process will be cancelled.

Confirm the number is right, and try pairing

it again.

NOTE

 When the confirmation function is on, after

repeating the device tag you have said, the

voice guide will ask “Is this correct?”

Answer “Yes.”

To change the device tag, answer “No” and

then say the device tag again.

Selecting a device

To select a cellular phone

NOTE

 You can connect to a phone at any time by

pressing the SPEECH button and saying the

number, even before all of the paired num-

bers and device tags of corresponding cellu-

lar phones are read out by the system.

To select a music player

BK0212400US.book 89 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5-90 Features and controls

4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”

the numbers of the music players and

device tags of corresponding music play-

ers will be read out in order, starting with

the music player that has been most

recently connected.

Say the number of the music player that

you want to connect to.

When the confirmation function is on, the

system will ask you again whether the

music player that you want to connect to

is correct. Answer “Yes” to continue and

connect to the music player.

Answer “No,” and the voice guide will

say “Please say.” Say the number of the

music player that you want to connect to.

5. The selected music player will be con-

nected to the Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

The voice guide will say “<device tag>

selected” and then the system will return

to the main menu.

Use the following procedure to delete a

paired Bluetooth

device from the Blue-

tooth

2.0 interface.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Setup.”

3. Say “Pairing Options.”

4. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”

Say “Delete.”

5. After the voice guide says “Please say,”

the numbers of the devices and device

tags of corresponding devices will be read

out in order, starting with the device that

has been most recently connected. After it

completes reading all pairs, the voice

guide will say “or all.”

Say the number of the device that you

want to delete from the system.

If you want to delete all paired phones

from the system, say “All.”

6. For confirmation purposes, the voice

guide will say “Deleting <device tag>

<number>. Is this correct?” or “Deleting

all devices. Is this correct?”

Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s).

Answer “No,” the system will return to

Step 4.

7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” and

then the system will end the device dele-

tion process.

N00565200013

You can check a paired Bluetooth

device by

following the steps below.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Setup.”

3. Say “Pairing Options.”

4. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”

Say “List.”

5. The voice guide will read out device tags

of corresponding devices in order, starting

with the Bluetooth

device that has been

most recently connected.

6. After the device tags of all paired Blue-

tooth

devices have been read, the system

will say “End of list, would you like to

start from the beginning?”

NOTE

 You can connect to a music player at any

time by pressing the SPEECH button and

saying the number, even before all of the

paired numbers and device tags of corre-

sponding music players are read out by the

system.

Deleting a device

NOTE

 If the device deletion process fails for some

reason, the voice guide will say “Delete

failed” and then the system will cancel delet-

ing the device.

To check a paired Bluetooth

device

BK0212400US.book 90 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-91

To hear the list again from the beginning,

answer “Yes.”

When you are done, answer “No” to

return to the main menu.

N00565300014

You can change the device tag of a paired cel-

lular phone or music player.

Follow the steps below to change a device

tag.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Setup.”

3. Say “Pairing Options.”

4. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”

Say “Edit.”

5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” and

read out the numbers of the Bluetooth

devices and device tags of corresponding

devices in order, starting with the Blue-

tooth

that has been most recently con-

nected.

After all paired device tags have been

read, the voice guide will say “Which

device, please?” Say the number of the

device tag you want to change.

6. The voice guide will say “New name,

please.” Say the name you want to regis-

ter as a new device tag.

When the confirmation function is on, the

voice guide will say “<New device tag>.

Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No,” you can say the new device

tag you want to register again.

7. The device tag is changed.

When the change is complete, the voice

guide will say “New name saved” and

then the system will return to the main

menu.

N00565400015

For the operation of a music player connected

via Bluetooth

, refer to “To play tracks from

a Bluetooth

device” on page 7-35.

N00565500087

You can make or receive hands-free calls

using a Bluetooth

compatible cellular phone

connected to the Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue-

tooth

2.0 interface to make calls without

dialing telephone numbers.

To make a call P.5-92

Send function P.5-93

Receiving calls P.5-93

Mute function P.5-93

Switching between hands-free mode and pri-

vate mode P.5-94

NOTE

 If you press and release the SPEECH button

and say “Continue” or “Previous” while the

list is being read, the system will advance or

rewind the list.

Say “Continue” to proceed to the device with

the next highest number or “Previous” to

return to the phone with the previous num-

ber.

 You can change the device tag by pressing

and releasing the SPEECH button and then

saying “Edit” while the list is being read.

 You can change the phone to be connected

by pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-

ton and then saying “Select phone” while the

list is being read.

 You can change the music player to be con-

nected by pressing and releasing the

SPEECH button and then saying “Select

music player” while the list is being read.

Changing a device tag

NOTE

 You can press and release the SPEECH but-

ton while the list is being read, and immedi-

ately say the number of the device tag you

want to change.

Operating a music player con-

nected via Bluetooth

How to make or receive hands-

free calls

BK0212400US.book 91 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5-92 Features and controls

N00565600020

You can make a call in the following 3 ways

using the Bluetooth

2.0 interface:

- By saying a telephone number

- By using the Bluetooth

2.0 interface’s

phonebook

- By redialing a telephone number

You can make a call by saying the telephone

number.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. After the voice guide says “Number

please,” say the telephone number.

4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num-

ber recognized>.”

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface will then

make the call.

When the confirmation function is on, the

system will confirm the telephone number

again. To continue with that number,

answer “Yes.”

To change the telephone number, answer

“No.” The system will say “Number

please” then say the telephone number

again.

You can make calls using the vehicle phone-

book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

For details on the phonebooks, refer to

“Phonebook function” on page 5-94.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Call.”

3. After the voice guide says “Name please,”

say the name you want to call, from those

registered in the phonebook.

4. If there is only 1 match, the system will

proceed to Step 5.

If there are 2 or more matches, the voice

guide will say “More than one match was

found, would you like to call <returned

name>.” If that person is the one you want

to call, answer “Yes.”

Answer “No,” the name of the next

matching person will be uttered by the

voice guide.

NOTE

 Hands-free calls may not operate correctly

when you place or receive the call directly

from your cellular phone, instead of using

the Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

To make a call

Making a call by using the telephone

number

NOTE

 In the case of English, the system will recog-

nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the

number “0.”

 The Bluetooth

2.0 interface supports num-

bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).

 The maximum supported telephone number

length is as follows:

• International telephone number: + and tele-

phone numbers (to 18 digits).

• Except for international telephone number:

telephone numbers (to 19 digits).

Making a call using a phonebook

NOTE

 If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone-

book and the mobile phonebook are empty,

the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone-

book is empty. Would you like to add a new

entry now?”

Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say

“Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.”

You can now create data in the vehicle

phonebook.

Answer “No,” the system will return to the

main menu.

NOTE

 If you say “No” to all names read by the sys-

tem, the voice guide will say “Name not

found, returning to main menu” and the sys-

tem will return to the main menu.

BK0212400US.book 92 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-93

5. If only 1 telephone number is registered

under the name you just said, the voice

guide will proceed to Step 6.

If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis-

tered that match the name you just said,

the voice guide will say “Would you like

to call <name> at [home], [work],

[mobile], or [other]?” Select the location

to call.

6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name>

<location>” and then the system will dial

the telephone number.

You can redial the last number called, based

on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel-

lular phone.

Use the following procedure to redial.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Redial.”

N00565700018

During a call, press the SPEECH button to

enter voice recognition mode, then say

“<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMF

tones.

For example, if during a call you need to sim-

ulate the pressing of a phone button as a

response to an automated system, press the

SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 pound

send” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel-

lular phone.

N00565800035

If an incoming phone call is received while

the ignition switch or the operation mode is in

ON or ACC, the audio system will be auto-

matically turned on and switched to the

incoming call, even when the audio system

was originally off.

The voice guide announcement for the

incoming call will be output from the front

passenger’s seat speaker.

If the CD player or radio was playing when

the incoming call was received, the audio sys-

tem will mute the sound from the CD player

or radio and output only the incoming call.

To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button

on the steering wheel control switch.

When the call is over, the audio system will

return to its previous state.

N00565900010

At any time during a call, you can mute the

vehicle microphone.

Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying

“Mute” during a call will turn ON the mute

function and mute the microphone.

NOTE

 If the name you selected has matching data

in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone

number is registered under the selected loca-

tion, the voice guide will say

“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for

<name>. Would you like to add location or

try again?”

Say “Try again,” and the system will return

to Step 3.

Say “Add location” and you can register an

additional telephone number under the

selected location.

 If the name you selected has matching data

in the mobile phonebook but no telephone

number is registered under the selected loca-

tion, the voice guide will say

“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for

<name>. Would you like to try again?”

Answer “Yes,” and the system will return to

Step 3.

Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled.

Start over again from Step 1.

NOTE

 When the confirmation function is on, the

system will check if the name and location of

the receiver are correct. If the name is cor-

rect, answer “Yes.”

To change the name or location to call,

answer “No.” The system will return to Step

Redialing

Send function

Receiving calls

Mute function

BK0212400US.book 93 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5-94 Features and controls

Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn

off the mute function and cancel the mute on

the microphone.

N00566600014

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface can switch

between hands-free mode (hands-free calls)

and private mode (calls using cellular phone).

If you press the SPEECH button and say

“Transfer call” during a hands-free call, you

can stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri-

vate mode.

To return to hands-free mode, press the

SPEECH button again and say “Transfer

call.”

N00566000018

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface has 2 types of

unique phonebooks that are different from the

phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They

are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile

phonebook.

These phonebooks are used to register tele-

phone numbers and make calls to desired

numbers via voice recognition function.

N00566101159

This phonebook is used when making calls

with the voice recognition function.

Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi-

cle phonebook per language.

Also, each entry has 4 locations associated

with: home, work, mobile and other. You can

tion.

You can register a desired name as a name for

any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle

phonebook.

Names and telephone numbers can be

changed later on.

The vehicle phonebook can be used with all

paired cellular phones.

You can register a telephone number in the

vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways:

Reading out a telephone number, and select-

ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from

the phonebook of the cellular phone.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Phonebook.”

3. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: new entry, edit number,

edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or

import contact.” Say “New entry.”

4. The voice guide will say “Name please.”

Say your preferred name to register it.

5. When the name has been registered, the

voice guide will say “home, work,

mobile, or other?” Say the location for

which you want to register a telephone

number.

Switching between hands-free

mode and private mode

Phonebook function

NOTE

 Disconnecting the battery cable will not

delete information registered in the phone-

book.

Vehicle phonebook

To register a telephone number in the

vehicle phonebook

To register by reading out a telephone

number

NOTE

 If the maximum number of entries are

already registered, the voice guide will say

“The phonebook is full. Would you like to

delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to

delete a registered name.

If you say “No,” the system will return to the

main menu.

BK0212400US.book 94 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-95

6. The voice guide will say “Number

please.” Say the telephone number to reg-

ister it.

7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone

number you have just read, and then reg-

ister the number.

When the telephone number has been reg-

istered, the voice guide will say “Number

saved. Would you like to add another

number for this entry?”

To add another telephone number for a

new location for the current entry, answer

“Yes.” The system will return to location

selection in Step 5.

Answer “No” to end the registration pro-

cess and return to the main menu.

You can select 1 phonebook entry from the

phonebook of the cellular phone and register

it in the vehicle phonebook.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Phonebook.”

3. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: new entry, edit number,

edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or

import contact.” Say “Import contact.”

4. The voice guide will say “Would you like

to import a single entry or all contacts?”

Say “Single entry.”

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface will become

ready to receive transferred phonebook

data.

NOTE

 When the confirmation function is on, the

voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-

rect?” Answer “Yes.”

If a telephone number has been registered for

the selected location, the voice guide will say

“The current number is <telephone number>,

number please.”

If you do not want to change the telephone

number, say “cancel” or the original number

to keep it registered.

NOTE

 In the case of English, the system will recog-

nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for the

number “0.”

NOTE

 When the confirmation function is on, after

repeating the telephone number you have

read, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-

rect?” Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No” to return to telephone number

registration in step 6.

To select and transfer one phonebook

entry from the phonebook of the cellular

phone

NOTE

 Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is

parked. Before transferring, make sure that

the vehicle is parked in a safe location.

 All or part of data may not be transferred,

even when the cellular phone supports Blue-

tooth

, depending on the compatibility of

the device.

 The maximum supported telephone number

length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of

20 digits or more will be truncated to the first

19 digits.

 If telephone numbers contain characters

other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters

are deleted before the transfer.

 For the connection settings on the cellular

phone side, refer to the instructions for the

cellular phone.

NOTE

 If the maximum number of entries are

already registered, the voice guide will say

“The phonebook is full. Would you like to

delete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want to

delete a registered name.

If you say “No,” the system will return to the

main menu.

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 95 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5-96 Features and controls

5. After the voice guide says “Ready to

receive a contact from the phone. Only a

home, a work, and a mobile number can

be imported,” the Bluetooth

2.0 inter-

face will receive the phonebook data from

the Bluetooth

compatible cellular phone.

6. Operate the Bluetooth

compatible cellu-

lar phone to set it up so that the phone-

book entry you want to register in the

vehicle phonebook can be transferred to

the Bluetooth

2.0 interface.

7. When the reception is complete, the voice

guide will say “<Number of telephone

numbers that had been registered in the

import source> numbers have been

imported. What name would you like to

use for these numbers?”

Say the name you want to register for this

phonebook entry.

8. The voice guide will say “Adding

<name>.”

When the confirmation function is on, the

system will ask if the name is correct.

Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No,” the voice guide will say

“Name please.” Register a different name.

9. The voice guide will say “Numbers

saved.”

10. The voice guide will say “Would you like

to import another contact?”

Answer “Yes” if you want to continue

with the registration. You can continue to

Answer “No,” the system will return to

the main menu.

You can change or delete a name or telephone

number registered in the vehicle phonebook.

You can also listen to the list of names regis-

tered in the vehicle phonebook.

[Editing a telephone number]

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Phonebook.”

3. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: new entry, edit number,

edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or

import contact”. Say “Edit number.”

4. The voice guide will say “Please say the

name of the entry you would like to edit,

or say list names.” Say the name of the

phonebook entry you want to edit.

5. The voice guide will say “Home, work,

mobile or other?” Select and say the loca-

tion where the telephone number you

want to change or add is registered.

NOTE

 If the Bluetooth

2.0 interface cannot recog-

nise the Bluetooth

compatible cellular

phone or the connection takes too much

time, the voice guide will say “Import con-

tact has timed out” and then the system will

cancel the registration. In such case, start

over again from Step 1.

 Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing

and holding the SPEECH button will cancel

the registration.

NOTE

 If the entered name is already used for other

phonebook entry or similar to a name used

for other phonebook entry, that name cannot

be registered.

To change the content registered in the

vehicle phonebook

NOTE

 The system must have at least one entry.

NOTE

 Say “List names,” and the names registered

in the phonebook will be read out in order.

Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to

the list of registered names” on page 5-98.

BK0212400US.book 96 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-97

When the confirmation function is on, the

system will check the target name and

location again. Answer “Yes” if you want

to continue with the editing.

Answer “No,” the system will return to

Step 3.

6. The voice guide will say “Number,

please.” Say the telephone number you

want to register.

7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone

number.

When the confirmation function is on, the

system will ask if the number is correct.

Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No,” the system will return to

the Step 3.

8. Once the telephone number is registered,

the voice guide will say “Number saved”

and then the system will return to the

main menu.

[Editing a name]

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Phonebook.”

3. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: new entry, edit number,

edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or

import contact.” Say “Edit name.”

4. The voice guide will say “Please say the

name of the entry you would like to edit,

or say list names.” Say the name you want

to edit.

5. The voice guide will say “Changing

<name>.”

When the confirmation function is on, the

system will check if the name is correct.

Answer “Yes” if you want to continue

with the editing based on this information.

Answer “No,” the system will return to

Step 4.

6. The voice guide will say “Name please.”

Say the new name you want to register.

7. The registered name will be changed.

When the change is complete, the system

will return to the main menu.

NOTE

 If the telephone number is already registered

in the selected location, the voice guide will

say “The current number is <current num-

ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele-

phone number to change the current number.

NOTE

 If the location where a telephone number

was already registered has been overwritten

with a new number, the voice guide will say

“Number changed” and then the system will

return to the main menu.

NOTE

 Say “List names,” and the names registered

in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer

to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list

of registered names” on page 5-98.

BK0212400US.book 97 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5-98 Features and controls

[Listening to the list of registered names]

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Phonebook.”

3. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: new entry, edit number,

edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or

import contact.” Say “List names.”

4. Bluetooth

2.0 interface will read out the

entries in the phonebook in order.

5. When the voice guide is done reading the

list, it will say “End of list, would you like

to start from the beginning?” When you

want to check the list again from the

beginning, answer “Yes.”

When you are done, answer “No” to

return to the previous or main menu.

[Deleting a telephone number]

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Phonebook.”

3. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: new entry, edit number,

edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or

import contact.” Say “Delete.”

4. The voice guide will say “Please say the

name of the entry you would like to

delete, or say list names.” Say the name of

the phonebook entry in which the tele-

phone number you want to delete is regis-

tered.

5. If only one telephone number is registered

in the selected phonebook entry, the voice

guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-

tion>.”

If multiple telephone numbers are regis-

tered in the selected phonebook entry, the

voice guide will say “Would you like to

delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other],

or all?”

Select the location to delete, and the voice

guide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-

tion>.”

6. The system will ask if you really want to

delete the selected telephone number(s) to

go ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.”

Answer “No,” the system will cancel

deleting the telephone number(s) and then

return to Step 4.

7. When the telephone number deletion is

complete, the voice guide will say

“<name> <location> deleted” and then

the system will return to the main menu.

If all locations are deleted, the system will

say “<name> and all locations deleted”

and the name will be removed from the

phonebook. If numbers still remain under

the entry, the name will retain the other

associated numbers.

You can delete all registered information

from the vehicle phonebook.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Phonebook.”

NOTE

 You can call, edit or delete a name that is

being read out.

Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” to

call the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or

“Delete” to delete it.

The system will beep and then execute your

command.

 If you press the SPEECH button and say

“Continue” or “Previous” while the list is

being read, the system will advance or

rewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed to

the next entry or “Previous” to return to the

previous entry.

NOTE

 Say “List names,” and the names registered

in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer

to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the list

of registered names” on page 5-98.

NOTE

 To delete the telephone numbers from all

locations, say “All.”

Erasing the phonebook

BK0212400US.book 98 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-99

3. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: new entry, edit number,

edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or

import contact.” Say “Erase all.”

4. For confirmation purposes, the voice

guide will ask “Are you sure you want to

erase everything from your hands-free

system phonebook?” Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all

registered information in the phonebook

and return to the main menu.

5. The voice guide will say “You are about

to delete everything from your hands-free

system phonebook. Do you want to con-

tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue.

Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of all

registered information in the phonebook

and return to the main menu.

6. The voice guide will say “Please wait,

erasing the hands-free system phone-

book” and then the system will delete all

data in the phonebook.

When the deletion is complete, the voice

guide will say “Hands-free system phone-

book erased” and then the system will

return to the main menu.

N00566200049

All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel-

lular phone can be transferred in a batch and

registered in the mobile phonebook.

Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing

up to 1,000 names, can be registered.

The Bluetooth

2.0 interface automatically

converts from text to voice the names regis-

tered in the transferred phonebook entries,

and creates names.

Follow the steps below to transfer to the

mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in

the cellular phone.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say “Phonebook.”

3. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: new entry, edit number,

edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or

import contact.” Say “Import contact.”

4. The voice guide will say “Would you like

to import a single entry or all contacts?”

Say “All contacts.”

Mobile phonebook

NOTE

 Only the mobile phonebook transferred from

the connected cellular phone can be used

with that cellular phone.

 You cannot change the names and telephone

numbers in the phonebook entries registered

in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select

and delete specific phonebook entries, either.

To change or delete any of the above, change

the applicable information in the source

phonebook of the cellular phone and then

transfer the phonebook again.

To import a devices phonebook

NOTE

 Transfer should be completed while the vehi-

cle is parked. Before transferring, make sure

that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.

 The already stored phonebook in the mobile

phonebook is overwritten by the stored

phonebook in the cellular phone.

 All or part of data may not be transferred,

even when the cellular phone supports Blue-

tooth

, depending on the compatibility of

the device.

 Only a home, a work, and a mobile number

can be imported.

 The maximum supported telephone number

length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of

20 digits or more will be truncated to the first

19 digits.

 If telephone numbers contain characters

other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters

are deleted before the transfer.

 For the connection settings on the cellular

phone side, refer to the instructions for the

cellular phone.

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 99 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

5-100 Features and controls

5. The voice guide will say “Importing the

contact list from the mobile phonebook.

This may take several minutes to com-

plete. Would you like to continue?”

Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobile

phonebook the phonebook stored in the

cellular phone will start.

Answer “No,” the system will return to

the main menu.

6. When the transfer is complete, the voice

guide will say “Import complete” and

then the system will return to the main

menu.

N00566301092

MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10

IC: 279B-MDGMY10

Your Bluetooth

2.0 interface operates on a

radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-

cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-

cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada

Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This

device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

 This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference.

 This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

The term “IC:” before the radio certification

number only signifies that Industry Canada

technical specifications were met.

The antenna used for this transmitter must not

be co-located or operating in conjunction

with any other antenna or transmitter. End-

users and installers must be provided with

installation instructions and transmitter oper-

ating conditions for satisfying RF exposure

compliance.

FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested

and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of

the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, use and can radiate

radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio com-

munications.

However, there is no guarantee that interfer-

ence will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception, which

can be determined by turning the equipment

off and on, the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one or more of the

following measures:

 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

 Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

NOTE

 The transfer may take some time to complete

depending on the number of contacts.

 If the Bluetooth

2.0 interface could not be

connected to the Bluetooth

compatible cel-

lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unable

to transfer contact list from phone” and then

the system will return to the main menu.

 If you press the HANG-UP button or press

and hold the SPEECH button during the data

transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and

the system will return to the main menu.

 If an error occurs during the data transfer, all

transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide

will say “Unable to complete the phonebook

import” and then the system will return to

the main menu.

 If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the

voice guide will say “There are no contacts

on the connected phone.”

General information

CAUTION

 Changes or modifications made to this

equipment not expressly approved by the

manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-

tion to operate this equipment.

BK0212400US.book 100 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

USB input terminal (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-101

 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

 Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus

complies with Canadian ICES-003.

N00566401080

N00566701083

You can connect your USB memory device or

iPod* to play music files stored in the USB

memory device or iPod.

The following explains how to connect and

remove a USB memory device or iPod.

*: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple

Inc. in the United States and other countries.

N00566800104

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

the ignition switch to the “OFF” position

or put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Open the glove compartment and remove

the connector cable (A, B) from clips (C).

3. Connect a commercially available USB

connector cable (D) to the USB memory

device (E).

Enrollment commands

USB input terminal (if so

equipped)

How to connect a USB memory

device

To connect

4. Connect the commercially available USB

connector cable (D) to the vehicle’s con-

nector cable (B).

Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of

the connector cable as shown in the illus-

tration.

5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on the

clips.

BK0212400US.book 101 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

USB input terminal (if so equipped)

5-102 Features and controls

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position or put the operation mode in

OFF.

2. Remove the commercially available USB

connector cable (D).

Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of

the connector cable as shown in the illus-

tration.

3. Fix the connector cable on the clips and

close the glove compartment.

N00566900091

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

the ignition switch to the “OFF” position

or put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Open the glove compartment and remove

the connector cable (A, B) from clips (C).

3. Connect the Dock connector (D) to the

iPod (E).

WARNING

 An open glove compartment door can

cause a serious injury or death to the front

passenger in an accident, even if the pas-

senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always

keep the glove compartment door closed

when driving.

NOTE

 Do not connect the USB memory device to

the vehicle’s connector cable directly.

The USB memory device may be damaged.

 When closing the glove compartment, be

careful not to trap the connector cable and

USB memory device.

To remove

How to connect an iPod

To connect

NOTE

 Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple

Inc.

On vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi Multi

Entertainment System (MMES), refer to the

separate “Mitsubishi Multi Entertainment

System owner’s manual” for details of con-

nection.

BK0212400US.book 102 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

USB input terminal (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-103

4. Connect the Dock connector (D) to the

connector cable (B).

Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of

the connector cable as shown in the illus-

tration.

5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on the

clips.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position or put the operation mode in

OFF.

2. Remove the Dock connector (D).

Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) of

the connector cable as shown in the illus-

tration.

3. Fix the connector cable on the clips and

close the glove compartment.

N00567001067

For details about the types of connectable

devices and supported file specifications,

refer to the separate owner's manual.

For details about the types of connectable

devices and supported file specifications,

refer to the following section.

N00567101143

Devices of the following types can be con-

nected.

WARNING

 An open glove compartment door can

cause a serious injury or death to the front

passenger in an accident, even if the pas-

senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always

keep the glove compartment door closed

when driving.

NOTE

 When closing the glove compartment, be

careful not to trap the connector cable and

iPod.

To remove

Types of connectable devices

and supported file specifica-

tions

For vehicles equipped with Mitsubishi

Multi Entertainment System (MMES)

Except for vehicles equipped with Mit-

subishi Multi Entertainment System

(MMES)

Device types

Model name Condition

USB memory device

Storage capacity of

256 Mbytes or

iPod*

fifth gen-

eration

F/W Ver.1.3 or

later

BK0212400US.book 103 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

USB input terminal (if so equipped)

5-104 Features and controls

On vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth

2.0 interface, for these connectable device

types, “iPod*,” “iPod classic*,” “iPod

nano*,” “iPod touch*” and “iPhone*,” refer

to the following website:

[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]

You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North

America website.

[For vehicles sold in Canada]

You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-

site. Please read and agree to the “Warning

about Links to the Web Sites of Other Com-

panies”. The websites mentioned above may

connect you to websites other than the Mit-

subishi Motors website.

http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-

ucts/index.html

*: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPod

touch” and “iPhone” are registered trade-

marks of Apple Inc. in the United States and

other countries.

iPod clas-

sic*

80GB/180

F/W Ver.1.1.2 or

later

120GB

F/W Ver.2.0.1 or

later

160GB

(late 2009)

F/W Ver.2.0.4 or

later

iPod

nano*

first gener-

ation

F/W Ver.1.3.1 or

later

second

generation

F/W Ver.1.1.3 or

later

third gen-

eration

F/W Ver.1.1.3 or

later

fourth

generation

F/W Ver.1.0.4 or

later

fifth gen-

eration

F/W Ver.1.0.2 or

later

sixth gen-

eration

F/W Ver.1.0 or

later

iPod

touch*

first gener-

ation

F/W Ver.3.1.3 or

later

second

generation

F/W Ver.4.2.1 or

later

third gen-

eration

F/W Ver.4.3.1 or

later

fourth

generation

F/W Ver.4.3.1 or

later

Model name Condition

iPhone*

iPhone

F/W Ver.3.1.3 or

later

iPhone 3G

F/W Ver.4.2.1 or

later

iPhone

3GS

F/W Ver.4.3.1 or

later

iPhone 4

F/W Ver.4.3.1 or

later

iPhone 4S

F/W Ver.5.0.1 or

later

Models other than

USB memory devices

and iPods

Digital audio

player supporting

mass storage class

Model name Condition

NOTE

 Depending on the type of the USB memory

device or other device connected, the con-

nected device may not function properly or

the available functions may be limited.

 It is recommended to use an iPod with firm-

ware updated to the latest version.

 You can charge your iPod by connecting it to

the USB input terminal when the ignition

switch or the operation mode is in ON or

ACC.

 Do not keep your USB memory device or

iPod in your vehicle.

 It is recommended that you back up the files

in case of data damage.

 Do not connect to the USB input terminal

any device (hard disk, card reader, memory

reader, etc.) other than the connectable

devices specified in the previous section.

The device and/or data may be damaged. If

any of these devices was connected by mis-

take, remove it after turning the ignition

switch to the “OFF” position or putting the

operation mode in OFF.

BK0212400US.book 104 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Sun visors

Features and controls 5-105

N00567200020

You can play music files of the following

specifications that are saved in a USB mem-

ory device or other device supporting mass

storage class. When you connect your iPod,

playable file specifications depend on the

connected iPod.

N00524600353

Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce

front glare while driving. To reduce side

glare, turn the visor to the side (2).

A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun

visor.

Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on

the sun visor.

File specifications

Item Condition

File format MP3, WMA, AAC

Maximum number of

levels (including the

root)

Level 8

Number of folders 700

Number of files 65,535

Sun visors

Vanity mirror

Card holder

BK0212400US.book 105 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

12 V power outlets

5-106 Features and controls

N00525000615

Accessories can be operated while the igni-

tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or

ACC.

To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the

cover, and insert the plug in the power outlet.

N00525300575

N00525800235

1- ( )

The light illuminates regardless of

whether a door or the liftgate is open or

closed.

2- (•)

Delayed off function

The light illuminates when a door or the

liftgate is opened. It goes off approxi-

mately 30 seconds after the door or lift-

gate is closed.

However, the light goes off immediately

with all doors and the liftgate closed in the

following cases:

• When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is

put in ON.

• When the power door lock function is

used to lock the vehicle.

12 V power outlets

CAUTION

 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory

operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.

 Also be aware that using electronic equip-

ment with the engine off may run the battery

down.

 When the power outlet is not in use, be sure

to close the power outlet cover. This will pre-

vent the power outlet from becoming

clogged and short circuiting.

Interior lights

NOTE

 Be aware that leaving the light illuminated

with the engine off may run the battery

down.

Never leave the vehicle without checking

that the light is off.

1- Cargo room light  P.5-107

2- Dome light  P.5-106

Dome light

BK0212400US.book 106 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Storage spaces

Features and controls 5-107

• When the remote control transmitter of

the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-

key is used to lock the vehicle.

• When the door lock/unlock switch or

liftgate switch is pressed to lock the

vehicle while carrying the F.A.S.T.-key.

Auto cut-out function

If the light is left switched on with the

ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “ACC”

position or the operation mode is in OFF

or ACC, and a door or the liftgate is

opened, it goes off automatically after

approximately 30 minutes.

The light will illuminate again after it

automatically goes off in the following

cases:

• When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is

put in ON.

• When the keyless entry system or the

F.A.S.T.-key is operated.

• When all doors and the liftgate are

closed.

3- ( )

The light goes off regardless of whether a

door or the liftgate is open or closed.

N00526100176

The light illuminates when the liftgate is

opened, and goes out when the liftgate is

closed.

N00526400528

NOTE

 When the key was used to start the engine: if

the key is removed while the doors and lift-

gate are closed, the light is illuminated and

after approximately 30 seconds it goes off.

 When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the

engine: if the operation mode is put in OFF

while the doors and liftgate are closed, the

light illuminates and after approximately 30

seconds it goes off.

 The time until the light goes off (delayed off)

can be adjusted. See your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.

 The auto cut-out function cannot be operated

when the dome light switch is in the “ ”

position.

Also, this function can be deactivated. See

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for

details.

Cargo room light

NOTE

Storage spaces

CAUTION

 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,

or spectacles in the cabin when parking the

vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will

become extremely hot, so lighters and other

flammable items may catch fire and

unopened drink cans (including beer cans)

may rupture. The heat may also deform or

crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-

tacle parts that are made of plastic.

 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while

driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a

storage space could otherwise cause injuries

during a sudden stop.

NOTE

 Do not leave valuables in any storage space

when leaving the vehicle.

BK0212400US.book 107 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cup holders

5-108 Features and controls

N00551500275

To open, pull the lever (A).

N00527301433

The cup holder is designed for holding cups

or drink-cans securely in its holes.

The cup holder is located in front of the floor

console.

N00537000175

N00502800065

Glove compartment

WARNING

 An open glove compartment door can

cause a serious injury or death to the front

passenger in an accident, even if the pas-

senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always

keep the glove compartment door closed

when driving.

NOTE

 The USB input terminal (if so equipped) is

located in the glove compartment. For

details, refer to “USB input terminal” on

page 5-101.

Cup holders

NOTE

 Plastic bottles may sometimes not fit

securely depending on the shape of the bot-

tle. Plastic bottles could fall if driving is

done while a plastic bottle is not securely

placed, so check that plastic bottles are

placed securely or use the bottle holder.

For the front seat

CAUTION

 Do not drink beverages while driving your

vehicle.

This is distracting and could cause an acci-

dent.

For the rear seat

Bottle holders

CAUTION

 Drink beverages while driving your vehicle

is distracting and can cause an accident.

 Vibration and shaking while driving may

cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as

spilling hot beverages could cause burns.

BK0212400US.book 108 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Rear shelf panel (if so equipped)

Features and controls 5-109

There are bottle holders located on the front

doors.

N00528200096

1. Insert the concave portion (A) on the

underside of the rear shelf panel into the

inside protruding portion (B) of the rear

pillar.

2. Hang the strap (C) of the rear shelf panel

on the hook (D).

Follow this procedure in reverse to remove.

N00574700014

Convenience hook is located on the seatback

of the passenger’s seat.

NOTE

 Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle

holder.

 Make sure all lids are tightly closed when

storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,

etc.

 Some beverages may not be stored, depend-

ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-

tles, etc.

Rear shelf panel (if so equipped)

CAUTION

 Do not place luggage or other items on the

rear shelf panel. Any items on the rear shelf

panel would obstruct your rearward view,

and they could fly forward and cause injuries

or other mishap in the event of hard braking.

To install

CAUTION

 Lightly push the rear shelf panel to make

sure that the concave portion (A) is set

firmly in the protruding portion (B) of the

liftgate. If the rear shelf panel is not securely

locked in place, it could unhook while driv-

ing and cause injuries.

To remove

Convenience hook

BK0212400US.book 109 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Assist grips

5-110 Features and controls

N00559000074

These grips are to support the body by hand

while seated in the vehicle.

NOTE

 To avoid damage to the convenience hook,

do not hang objects that weight more than 9

pounds (4 kg).

Assist grips

CAUTION

 Do not use the assist grips when getting into

or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could

detach causing you to fall.

BK0212400US.book 110 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Driving safety

Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2

Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2

Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3

Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4

Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4

Braking ............................................................................................6-5

Parking .............................................................................................6-5

Loading information ........................................................................6-6

Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10

Trailer towing ................................................................................6-10

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Fuel economy

6-2 Driving safety

N00628800178

Fuel economy is dependent on many factors.

Your personal driving habits can have a sig-

nificant effect on your fuel consumption.

Several recommendations for achieving the

greatest fuel economy are listed below.

 Whenever accelerating from a stop,

always accelerate slowly and smoothly.

 When parked for even a short period, do

not idle the engine. Shut it off.

 Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary

stops.

 Keep your tires inflated to the recom-

mended pressures.

 For freeway driving, maintain a speed of

approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when

traffic, roadway and weather conditions

safely permit.

 Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle

lubricated according to the recommenda-

tions in this manual.

 Always keep your vehicle well main-

tained. A poorly maintained engine

wastes fuel and costs money.

 Never overload your vehicle.

N00628900049

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent

causes of accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired

even with blood alcohol levels far below the

legal minimum. If you have been drinking,

don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use

public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-

ing a cold shower will not make you sober.

Similarly, prescription and nonprescription

drugs affect your alertness, perception and

reaction time. Consult with your doctor or

pharmacist before driving while under the

influence of any of these medications.

N00628600046

The original equipment floor mat provided

with your vehicle was specifically designed

for your vehicle. Always properly position

the floor mat and assure it does not interfere

with operation of the pedals. Always use the

retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to

secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will

help prevent the floor mat from moving for-

ward and possibly interfering with the opera-

tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat

from moving forward and possibly interfering

with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi

genuine floor mats are recommended.

N00628700047

1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the

floorboard.

2. Align the floor mat with the installation

holes over the retaining clips.

3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.

Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs

WARNING

 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.

Your perceptions are less accurate, your

reflexes are slower and your judgment is

impaired.

Floor mat

To install the floor mat

NOTE

 The shape of the mat and the number of

retaining clips may vary depending on the

vehicle model.

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Vehicle preparation before driving

Driving safety 6-3

N00629000702

For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always

check for the following:

 Before starting the vehicle, make certain

that you and all passengers are seated and

wearing their seat belts properly (with

children in the rear seat, in appropriate

restraints), and that all the doors and the

liftgate are locked.

 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as

possible, while keeping good visibility,

and good control of the steering wheel,

brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check

the instrument panel indicators and multi-

information display for any possible prob-

lem.

 Similarly, the front passenger seat should

also be moved as far back as possible.

 Make sure that infants and small children

are properly restrained in accordance with

all laws and regulations.

Check these by selecting the defroster mode,

and set the blower switch on high. You should

be able to feel the air blowing against the

windshield.

Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-

shield, door windows)” on page 7-10, 7-16.

Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or

uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,

glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look

for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check

the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires

(including spare tire) for proper pressure.

WARNING

 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not

properly installed, it can interfere with the

operation of the pedals. Interference with

the pedals can cause unintended accelera-

tion and/or increased stopping distances

resulting in a crash and injury. Always

make sure the floor mat does not interfere

with the accelerator or brake pedal.

 Always use the retaining clip on the

driver’s floorboard to secure the floor

mat.

 Always install the mat with the correct

side facing down.

 Never install a second mat over or under

an existing floor mat.

 Do not use a floor mat designed for

another model vehicle even if it is a

Mitsubishi genuine floor mat.

 Before driving, be sure to check the fol-

lowing:

• Periodically check that the floor mat is

properly secured with the retaining clips.

If you remove the floor mat while clean-

ing the inside of your vehicle or for any

other reason, always check the condition

of the floor mat after it has been rein-

stalled.

• While the vehicle is stopped with the

engine off, check that the floor mat is not

interfering with the pedals by depressing

the pedals fully.

Vehicle preparation before

driving

Seat belts and seats

Defrosters

Tires

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Safe driving techniques

6-4 Driving safety

Replace your tires before they are heavily

worn out.

On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system, there is a risk of damage

to the tire inflation pressure sensors when the

tire is replaced on the rim. Tire replacement

should, only be performed by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Have someone watch while you turn all the

exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn

signal indicators and high-beam indicators on

the instrument panel.

Check the ground under the vehicle after

parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or

other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are

correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need

to find out why immediately and have it

fixed.

N00629200137

Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and

your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you

can avoid an accident or injury. However, if

you give extra attention to the following

areas, you can better protect yourself and

your passengers:

 Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic,

road and weather conditions. Leave plenty

of stopping distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle ahead.

 Before changing lanes, check your mir-

rors, your blind spots, and use your turn-

signal light.

 While driving, watch the behavior of

other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.

 Always obey applicable laws and regula-

tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always

leave room for unexpected events, such as

sudden braking.

 If you plan to drive in another country,

obey their vehicle registration laws and

make sure you will be able to get the right

fuel.

N00629400474

 Check the battery. At the same time,

check the terminals and wiring. During

extremely cold weather, the battery will

not be as strong. Also, the battery power

level may drop because more power is

used for cold starting and driving.

Before driving the vehicle, check to see if

the engine runs at the proper speed and if

the headlights are as bright as normally.

Charge or replace the battery if necessary.

During extreme cold weather, it is possi-

ble that a very low battery could freeze.

 Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-

ing the engine, allow a short warm-up

time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then

drive your vehicle slowly.

 Stay at low speeds at first so that the man-

ual transaxle oil or the automatic transaxle

fluid has time to spread to all the lubrica-

tion points.

 Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in

cold weather conditions. This is normal

and shifting will get easier as the transaxle

warms up.

 Check the engine antifreeze.

If there is not enough coolant because of a

leak or from engine overheating, add

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long

Life Coolant Premium or equivalent.

Lights

Fluid leaks

Safe driving techniques

Driving during cold weather

WARNING

 The battery gives off explosive hydrogen

gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-

tery to explode, which could cause serious

injury or death.

Always wear protective clothes and a face

mask when working with your battery, or

let a skilled mechanic do it.

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Braking

Driving safety 6-5

Please read this section in conjunction

with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.

N00629500521

All parts of the brake system are critical to

safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice at regular intervals

according to the “WARRANTY AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

Check the brake system while driving at a

low speed immediately after starting, espe-

cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm

they work normally.

A film of water can be formed on the brake

discs or brake drums, and prevent normal

braking after driving in heavy rain or through

large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed.

If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving

slowly while lightly depressing the brake

pedal.

On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking

system, making the brakes less effective.

While driving in such conditions, pay close

attention to surrounding vehicles and to the

condition of the road surface. From time to

time, lightly depress the brake pedal and

check how effective the brakes are.

It is important to take advantage of the engine

braking by downshifting while driving on

steep downhill roads in order to prevent the

brakes from overheating.

N00629600333

When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,

and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.

If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.

Place the gearshift lever into the “R”

(Reverse) position when parking on a down-

hill slope, into the 1st position when parking

on an uphill slope.

Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set

when parked and that the selector lever is in

the “P” (PARK) position.

When parking on a hill, it is important to set

the parking brake before moving the selector

lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-

vents loading the parking brake against the

transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to

move the selector lever out of the “P”

(PARK) position.

Never leave the engine running while you

take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the

engine running in a closed or poorly venti-

lated place.

WARNING

 Never open the radiator cap when the

radiator is hot. You could be seriously

burned.

Braking

When brakes are wet

When driving in cold weather

When driving downhill

Parking

Parking on a hill

For vehicles equipped with man-

ual transaxle

For vehicles equipped with contin-

uously variable transmission

(CVT)

Parking with the engine run-

ning

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Loading information

6-6 Driving safety

Your front bumper can be damaged if you

scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks.

Be careful when traveling up or down steep

slopes where your bumper can scrape the

road.

More effort could be required to turn the

steering wheel.

Refer to “Electric power steering system

(EPS)” on page 5-48.

Always carry the key and lock all doors and

the liftgate when leaving the vehicle unat-

tended.

Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit

area.

N00629900424

It is very important to know how much

weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is

called the vehicle capacity weight and

includes the weight of all occupants, cargo,

non-factory-installed options, if any, being

towed. The tire and loading information plac-

ard located on the driver’s door sill of your

vehicle will show how much weight it may

properly carry.

It is important to familiarize yourself with the

following terms before loading your vehicle:

 Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load

on an individual tire that is determined by

distributing to each axle its share of the

maximum loaded vehicle weight and

dividing by two.

 Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an

individual tire that is determined by dis-

tributing to each axle its share of the curb

weight, accessory weight, and normal

occupant weight and dividing by two.

 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum

of -

(a) Curb weight;

(b) Accessory weight;

(d) Production options weight.

 Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi-

cle with standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool-

ant.

 Accessory weight: the combined weight

(in excess of those standard items which

may be replaced) of automatic transmis-

sion, power steering, power brakes, power

windows, power seats, radio, and heater,

to the extent that these items are available

as factory- installed equipment (whether

installed or not).

 Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo

and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)*

times the vehicle’s designated seating

capacity.

WARNING

 Leaving the engine running risks injury or

death from accidentally moving the gear-

shift lever (manual transaxle) or the selec-

tor lever (CVT) or from the accumulation

of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger

compartment.

Where you park

WARNING

 Do not park your vehicle in areas where

combustible materials such as dry grass or

leaves can come in contact with a hot

exhaust, since a fire could occur.

Do not keep the steering wheel

fully turned for a long time

When leaving the vehicle

Loading information

WARNING

 Never overload your vehicle. Overloading

can damage your vehicle, adversely affect

vehicle performance, including handling

and braking, cause tire failure, and result

in an accident.

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Loading information

Driving safety 6-7

 Production options weight: the combined

weight of those installed regular produc-

tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)

in excess of those standard items which

they replace, not previously considered in

curb weight or accessory weight, includ-

ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof

rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

 Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)*

times the number of specified occupants.

(In your vehicle the number is 3)

 Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu-

tion within the passenger compartment (In

your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front,

1 in second row seat)

N00630100396

The tire and loading information placard is

located on the inside sill of the driver’s door.

This placard shows the maximum number of

occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as

well as “the combined weight of occupants

and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle

capacity weight. This placard also tells you

the size and recommended inflation pressure

for the original equipment tires on your vehi-

cle. For more information, refer to “Tires” on

page 9-12.

*: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-

son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian

regulations.

Tire and loading information

placard

BK0212400US.book 7 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Loading information

6-8 Driving safety

N00630201277

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-

cle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650

lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650

lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

of your vehicle.

Steps for Determining Correct

Load Limit

NOTE

 The above steps for determining

correct load limit were written in

accordance with U.S.A. regula-

tions.

Your vehicle cannot tow a

trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.

BK0212400US.book 8 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Loading information

Driving safety 6-9

NOTE

 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size

of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.

 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information

on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of this manual.

BK0212400US.book 9 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cargo loads

6-10 Driving safety

N00629700435

N00630300082

To determine the cargo load capacity for your

vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle

occupants from the vehicle capacity weight.

For additional information, if needed, refer to

“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit”

on page 6-8.

DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers

listed on the safety certification label (A)

located on the inside sill of the driver’s door

as the guide for passengers and/or cargo

weight.

N00629800306

Cargo loads

Cargo load precautions

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of serious injury or

death, the combined weights of the driver,

passengers and cargo and must never

exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will

adversely affect vehicle performance,

including handling and braking, and may

cause an accident.

 Do not load cargo or luggage higher than

the top of the seatback. Be sure that your

cargo or luggage cannot move when your

vehicle is in motion.

Having either the rear view blocked, or

your cargo being thrown inside the cabin

if you suddenly have to brake can cause a

serious accident or injury or death.

 Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread the weight

evenly.

Trailer towing

WARNING

 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.

It may not be possible to maintain control

or adequate braking.

BK0212400US.book 10 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Comfort controls

Vents ................................................................................................7-2

Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) ...............7-4

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) .........................................7-7

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)...................................7-11

Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-17

Air purifier (if so equipped)............................................................7-18

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player

(if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-18

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) ..........................7-27

To play tracks from a Bluetooth

device

(vehicles with Bluetooth

2.0 interface) ...................................7-35

Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped).....7-37

Error codes .....................................................................................7-38

Handling of compact discs .............................................................7-40

Antenna ..........................................................................................7-41

General information about your radio ...........................................7-42

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Vents

7-2 Comfort controls

N00729900278

N00730200330

Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.

When the dimple (A) is pressed, the vents

open.

To close the vents, press the dimple on the

opposite side.

Change the direction of the air flow by turn-

ing the vent itself.

N00736400594

To change the position and amount of air

flowing from the vents, turn the mode selec-

tion dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on

page 7-5, 7-7.

On vehicles with the automatic air condition-

ing, press the MODE switch or defogger

Vents

*: Optional equipment

1- Center vents

2- Side vents

Air flow and direction adjust-

ments

Center vents

Side vents

1- Open

2- Close

NOTE

 On rare occasions, air from the vents of an

air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is

only moist air cooling suddenly and does not

indicate a problem.

 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the

vents as they could prevent the air condition-

ing from operating normally.

Changing the mode selection

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Vents

Comfort controls 7-3

switch. (Refer to “MODE switch” on page

7-13, “Defogger switch” on page 7-13.)

These symbols are used in the next several

illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air

coming from the vents.

: Small amount of air from the vents

: Medium amount of air from the vents

: Large amount of air from the vents

Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-

ger compartment.

Air flows to the upper part of the passenger

compartment, and flows to the leg area.

Air flows mainly to the leg area.

Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and

the door windows.

Face position

Foot/Face position

NOTE

 With the mode selection dial between the

“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly

to the upper part of the passenger compart-

ment. With the mode selection dial between

the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows

mainly to the leg area.

Foot position

Foot/Defroster position

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped)

7-4 Comfort controls

Air flows mainly to the windshield and the

door windows.

N00737700031

The heater can only be used while the engine

is running.

N00737800032

N00737900033

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion, select the blower speed by turning the

blower speed selection dial.

Turning the dial clockwise will increase the

blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-

wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to

the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow

will stop.

N00738000057

The temperature control lever is used to select

the desired air temperature.

NOTE

 With the mode selection dial between the

“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly

to the leg area. With the mode selection dial

between the “ ”and “ ” positions, air

flows mainly to the windshield and the door

windows.

Defroster position

Heater without air condi-

tioning function

(if so equipped)

Control panel

1- Temperature control lever

2- Air selection lever

3- Mode selection dial

4- Electric rear window defogger switch

 P. 5-80

5- Blower speed selection dial

Blower speed selection dial

Temperature control lever

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-5

N00738100061

To change the amount of air flowing from the

vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to

“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.

N00738200046

Normally, use the outside air position to keep

the windshield and side windows clear and to

quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-

shield.

To change the air selection, use the air selec-

tion lever.

 “ ” Outside air

 “ ” Recirculated air

If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in

some way, use the recirculation position.

Switch to the outside air position every now

and then to keep the windows from fogging

up.

N00738300047

Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-

tion and set the air selection lever to the out-

side air position.

Set the temperature control lever to the

desired temperature. Select the desired

blower speed to fit your needs.

1- Cooler

2- Warmer

Mode selection dial

Air selection lever

CAUTION

 Using recirculated air for a long time may

cause the windows to fog up.

Operating the system

Heating

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped)

7-6 Comfort controls

N00738400035

Set the mode selection dial to the positions

shown in the illustration and set the air selec-

tion lever to the outside air position.

The air flow will be directed to the leg area

and the upper part of the passenger compart-

ment. Set the desired blower speed.

Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated

or slightly warm air (depending upon the

position of the temperature control lever)

flows to the upper part of the passenger com-

partment.

N00738500081

Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”

and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the

windshield and door window.

Use this setting to keep the windshield and

door windows clear of mist, and to keep the

leg area heated (when driving in rain or

snow).

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”

position.

2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air

position.

3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-

ing the blower speed selection dial.

4. Select your desired temperature by setting

the temperature control lever.

For quick defrosting

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”

position.

2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air

position.

3. Set your blower to the maximum speed.

4. Set the temperature to the highest posi-

tion.

NOTE

 For quick heating, set the blower speed at the

3rd position.

Combination of unheated air and

heated air

Defrosting or defogging (wind-

shield, door windows)

CAUTION

 For safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows.

For ordinary defrosting

NOTE

 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the

side vents toward the door windows.

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-7

N00730300344

The air conditioning can only be used while

the engine is running.

N00730500304

N00736500205

When the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in ON, select the blower speed by

turning the blower speed selection dial.

Turning the dial clockwise will increase the

blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-

wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to

the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow

will stop.

N00736600248

The temperature control lever is used to select

the desired air temperature.

N00736700223

To change the amount of air flowing from the

vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to

“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.

Manual air conditioning (if so

equipped)

Control panel

1- Temperature control lever

2- Air selection lever

3- Mode selection dial

4- Electric rear window defogger

switch P.5-80

5- Air conditioning switch

6- Blower speed selection dial

Blower speed selection dial

Temperature control lever

1- Cooler

2- Warmer

NOTE

 While the engine coolant temperature is low,

the temperature of the air from the heater

will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,

even if you have selected warm air with the

lever.

Mode selection dial

BK0212400US.book 7 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-8 Comfort controls

N00736800413

Normally, use the outside air position to keep

the windshield and side windows clear and to

quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-

shield.

To change the air selection, use the air selec-

tion lever.

 “ ” Outside air

 “ ” Recirculated air

If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in

some way, use the recirculation position.

Switch to the outside air position every now

and then to keep the windows from fogging

up.

N00731000478

Push the switch, and the air conditioning

compressor will turn on. The air conditioning

indicator light (A) will come on.

Push the switch again and the air condition-

ing compressor will stop and the indicator

light (A) goes off.

N00731100264

Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-

tion and set the air selection lever to the out-

side air position.

Air selection lever

CAUTION

 Using recirculated air for a long time may

cause the windows to fog up.

Air conditioning switch

CAUTION

 Using the air conditioning slightly increases

the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure

your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when

shifting the transaxle into drive.

Operating the air conditioning

system

Heating

BK0212400US.book 8 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-9

Set the temperature control lever to the

desired temperature. Select the desired

blower speed to fit your needs.

N00731200340

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”

position.

2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air

position.

3. Push the air conditioning switch.

4. Change the temperature by setting the

temperature control lever.

5. Set the desired blower speed.

N00731300282

Set the mode selection dial to the positions

shown in the illustration and set the air selec-

tion lever to the outside air position.

The air flow will be directed to the leg area

and the upper part of the passenger compart-

ment. Set the desired blower speed.

Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated

or slightly warm air (depending upon the

position of the temperature control lever)

flows to the upper part of the passenger com-

partment.

NOTE

 For quick heating, set the blower speed at the

3rd position.

Cooling

NOTE

 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in

some way, set the air selection lever to the

recirculation position. Let in some outside

air from time to time for good ventilation.

 To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection

dial to the “ ” position.

Combination of unheated air and

heated air

BK0212400US.book 9 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-10 Comfort controls

N00731400560

Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”

and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the

windshield and door window.

Use this setting to keep the windshield and

door windows clear of mist, and to keep the

leg area heated (when driving in rain or

snow).

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”

position.

2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air

position.

3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-

ing the blower speed selection dial.

4. Select your desired temperature by setting

the temperature control lever.

5. Push the air conditioning switch.

For quick defrosting

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”

position.

2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air

position.

3. Set your blower to the maximum speed.

4. Set the temperature to the highest posi-

tion.

5. Push the air conditioning switch.

Defrosting or defogging (wind-

shield, door windows)

CAUTION

 For safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows.

For ordinary defrosting

NOTE

 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the

side vents toward the door windows.

 When defrosting, do not set the temperature

control dial near the maximum cool position.

This would blow cool air on the window

glass and fog it up.

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 10 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-11

N00731500301

The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.

N00711801624

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

Control panel

Type 1

Type 2

1- Temperature control switch

2- Air conditioning switch

3- MODE switch

4- Air selection switch

5- Blower speed selection switch

6- Defogger switch

7- AUTO switch

8- Electric rear window defogger switch

 P.5-80

9- OFF switch

10- Temperature display

11- Mode selection display

12- Air selection indicator

13- Air conditioning indicator

14- AUTO indicator

15- Blower speed display

NOTE

 There is an interior air temperature sensor

(A) in the illustrated position.

Never place anything over the sensor, since

doing so will prevent it from functioning

properly.

BK0212400US.book 11 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-12 Comfort controls

N00736900179

Press of the blower speed selection

switch to increase the blower speed.

Press of the blower speed selection

switch to decrease the blower speed.

The selected blower speed will be shown in

the display (A).

N00737000324

Press or of the temperature control

switch to the desired temperature.

The selected temperature will be shown in the

display (A).

The above indicates the factory settings. You

can personalize the air selection switch and

air conditioning switch to match your per-

sonal preferences.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice for assistance.

 A sound will be made every time you push

any of the switches.

Blower speed selection switch

NOTE

1- Increase

2- Decrease

Temperature control switch

NOTE

 While the engine coolant temperature is low,

the temperature of the air from the heater

will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,

even if you have selected warm air with the

switch.

To prevent the windshield and windows from

fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to

“ ” and the blower speed will be reduced.

 When the temperature is set to the highest or

the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-

tion, the air selection and the air conditioning

will be automatically changed as follows.

• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set

to the highest setting)

Outside air will be introduced and the air

conditioning will stop.

If the air selection and the air conditioning

are operated manually after an automatic

changeover, manual operation will be

selected.

• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set

to the lowest setting)

Inside air will be recirculated and the air

conditioning will operate.

BK0212400US.book 12 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-13

Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning

switch (Changing the function setting)” on

page7-15.

Refer to “Personalizing the air selection

(Changing the function setting)” on

page7-14.

N00737100208

To change the amount of air flowing from the

vents, press the MODE switch. Each time the

MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes

to the next one in the following sequence:

“”  “”  “”  “”  “”.

The selected mode is shown in the display

(A). Refer to “Changing the mode selection”

on page 7-2.

N00703400015

When this switch is pressed, the mode

changes to the “ ” mode. The indicator

light (A) will come on. The selected mode is

shown in the display (B). Refer to “Changing

the mode selection” on page 7-2.

N00737200368

Normally, use the outside air position to keep

the windshield and side windows clear and to

quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-

shield.

To change the air selection, simply press the

air selection switch.

The selected position will be shown in the

display (A).

 Outside air: “ ” indicator is ON

Outside air is introduced into the passen-

ger compartment.

 Recirculated air: “ ” indicator is ON

Air is recirculated inside the passenger

compartment.

When the air conditioning turns on, the air

selection is controlled automatically. When

MODE switch

Defogger switch

NOTE

 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air

conditioning system automatically operates

and outside air (as opposed to recirculated

air) is selected.

Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-

shield, door windows)” on page 7-16.

Air selection switch

BK0212400US.book 13 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-14 Comfort controls

the air conditioning turns off, the air selection

automatically goes back to the outside air

position.

If high cooling performance is desired, or if

the outside air is dusty or contaminated in

some way, use the recirculation position.

Switch to the outside air position every now

and then to keep the windows from fogging

up.

N00760000089

You can change the following functions to

match your preference.

 Enable automatic air control:

When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air

selection switch will also be automatically

controlled.

 Disable automatic air control:

Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,

the air selection switch will not be auto-

matically controlled.

 Changing the settings

Press the air selection switch for about 10

seconds or longer.

When the setting has changed, the system

will beep and the “ ” indicator will

flash.

• When the setting has changed from

enabled to disabled,

the system will beep three times and the

indicator will flash three times.

• When the setting has changed from dis-

abled to enabled,

the system will beep two times and the

indicator will flash three times.

N00737300343

Push the switch, and the air conditioning

compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator

will be shown in the display (A).

Push the switch again and the air condition-

ing compressor will stop and the indicator

goes off.

CAUTION

 Using recirculated air for a long time may

cause the windows to fog up.

NOTE

 If you press the AUTO switch to select auto-

matic control after manual operation, the air

selection switch will also be automatically

controlled.

Personalizing the air selection

(Changing the function setting)

NOTE

 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air

control”.

 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air

selection will automatically change to the

outside air position, even if the system is set

to “Disable automatic air control”, in order

to prevent windows from fogging up.

Air conditioning switch

CAUTION

 Using the air conditioning slightly increases

the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure

your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when

shifting the transaxle into drive.

BK0212400US.book 14 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-15

N00759800090

You can change the following functions to

match your preference.

 Enable automatic air conditioning control:

When the AUTO switch is pressed, or

when the temperature control switch has

been set to the minimum temperature, the

air conditioning switch is automatically

controlled.

 Disable automatic air conditioning con-

trol:

The air conditioning switch is not auto-

matically controlled, unless the air condi-

tioning switch is used.

 Changing the settings

Press the air conditioning switch for about

10 seconds or longer.

When the setting has changed, the system

will beep and the “ ” indicator will

flash.

• When the setting has changed from

enabled to disabled,

the system will beep three times and the

indicator will flash three times.

• When the setting has changed from dis-

abled to enabled,

the system will beep two times and the

indicator will flash three times.

N00703500016

When the AUTO switch is pressed, the mode

selection, blower speed adjustment, recircu-

lated/outside air selection, temperature

adjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF sta-

tus are all controlled automatically.

The “AUTO” indicator will be shown in the

display (A).

N00703600017

Push the switch to turn off the air condition-

ing system.

Personalizing the air conditioning

switch (Changing the function set-

ting)

NOTE

 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air

conditioning control”.

 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air

conditioning will run automatically, even if

the system is set to “Disable automatic air

conditioning control”, in order to prevent

windows from fogging up.

AUTO switch

OFF switch

BK0212400US.book 15 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

7-16 Comfort controls

N00731700361

In normal conditions, use the system in the

AUTO mode and follow these procedures:

1. Push the AUTO switch.

2. Set the temperature control switch to the

desired temperature. The temperature can

be set within a range of around 61 to 89

(Type 1) or 17 to 31 (Type 2).

The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower

speed, temperature adjustment and ON/OFF

of air conditioning will be controlled auto-

matically.

N00731800115

Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed

selection switch and the MODE switch to the

desired positions. To return to automatic

operation, press the AUTO switch.

N00732400466

To remove frost or mist from the windshield

and door windows, use the MODE switch or

defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”).

Use this setting to keep the windshield and

door windows clear of mist, and to keep the

leg area heated (when driving in rain or

snow).

1. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi-

tion.

2. Set the air selection switch to the outside

air position.

3. Select your desired blower speed by

pressing the blower speed selection

switch.

4. Select your desired temperature by press-

ing the temperature control switch.

5. Push the air conditioning switch.

Operating the air conditioning

system (automatic mode)

NOTE

 Set the temperature at about 75 (Type 1) or

24 (Type 2) under normal conditions.

Operating the air conditioning

system (manual mode)

Defrosting or defogging (wind-

shield, door windows)

CAUTION

 For safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows.

For ordinary defrosting

BK0212400US.book 16 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Important air conditioning operating tips

Comfort controls 7-17

For quick defrosting

1. Push the defogger switch to change to the

“ ” position.

2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.

3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-

tion.

N00733700336

1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever

possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the

vehicle interior extremely hot which then

requires more time to cool. If it is neces-

sary to park in the sun, open the windows

for the first few minutes of air condition-

ing to expel the hot air.

2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed

when the air conditioning is in use. The

entry of outside air through open windows

will reduce cooling efficiency.

3. When running the air conditioning, make

sure the air intake, which is located in

front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-

tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in

the air-intake chamber may reduce air

flow and plug the water drains.

If the air conditioning seems less effective

than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant

leak.

Have the system inspected by your authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

The air conditioning should be operated for at

least five minutes each week, even in cold

weather. This includes the quick defrosting

mode. Operating the air condition system

weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-

sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning

in the best operating condition.

NOTE

 While the mode selection is set “ ” posi-

tion, the air conditioning compressor will run

automatically. The outside air position will

also be selected automatically.

 If the mode selection is set “ ” position,

you cannot turn the air conditioning off or

select the recirculation position. This pre-

vents the windows from fogging up.

 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the

side vents toward the door windows.

 When defrosting, do not set the temperature

to the maximum cool position. This will

blow cool air on the window glass and fog it

up.

Important air conditioning

operating tips

Air conditioning system refrig-

erant and lubricant recommen-

dations

CAUTION

 The air conditioning system in your vehicle

must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-

134a and the lubricant ZXL 200PG.

Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will

cause severe damage and may require replac-

ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning

system.

The release of refrigerant into the atmo-

sphere is not recommended.

The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi-

cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone

layer. However, it may contribute slightly to

global warming.

It is recommended that the old refrigerant be

saved and recycled for future use.

During a long period of disuse

BK0212400US.book 17 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Air purifier (if so equipped)

7-18 Comfort controls

N00733800180

The air conditioning system is equipped with

an air filter to remove pollen and dust.

The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and

dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace

it periodically. For the maintenance interval,

refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-

NANCE MANUAL”.

N00734302131

The audio system can only be used when the

ignition switch or the operation mode is in

ON or ACC.

N00711900729

N00712000411

Turn the VOL knob clockwise to increase the

volume; counterclockwise to decrease the

volume.

The status will be displayed in the display.

Air purifier (if so equipped)

NOTE

 Operation in certain conditions such as driv-

ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the

air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-

vice life of the filter. When you feel that the

air flow is lower than normal or when the

windshield or windows start to fog up easily,

replace the air filter.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice for assistance.

AM/FM electronically tuned

radio with CD player

(if so

equipped)

NOTE

 To listen to the audio system while the

engine is not running, turn the ignition

switch to the “ACC” position or put the oper-

ation mode in ACC.

For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,

if the operation mode is left in ACC, the

accessory power will automatically turn off

after a certain period of time and you will no

longer be able to use the audio system. The

accessory power comes on again if the

engine switch is operated with it in the

“ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto-

cutout function” on page 5-14.

 If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,

it may create noise in the audio equipment.

This does not mean that anything is wrong

with your audio equipment. In such a case,

use the cellular phone at a place as far away

as possible from the audio equipment.

 If foreign objects or water get into the audio

equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor

comes from it, immediately turn off the

audio system and have it checked at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice. Never try to

repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys-

tem until it is inspected by a qualified per-

son.

 If the audio system is damaged by foreign

objects, water, or fire, have the system

checked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motors

technician.

Volume and tone control panel

1- PWR (On-Off) switch

2- VOL (Volume control) knob

3- Display

/MENU (Mode change) button

5- Sound control button

To adjust the volume

BK0212400US.book 18 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-19

N00712100685

Press the /MENU button to select BASS

 TREBLE  FADER  BALANCE 

Sound control mode off.

Press the sound control button either or

to select the desired bass level.

Press the sound control button either or

to select the desired treble level.

Press the sound control button either or

to balance the volume of sound from the

front and the rear speakers.

Press the sound control button either or

to balance the volume of sound from the

left and the right speakers.

N00734900915

N00735000926

1. Press the PWR switch or the RADIO but-

ton to turn on the radio.

Press and hold the PWR switch for 2 sec-

onds or longer to turn off the radio.

2. Press the RADIO button to select the

desired band (AM/FM1/FM2).

To adjust the tone

BASS (Bass tone control)

TREBLE (Treble tone control)

FADER (Front/Rear balance con-

trol) (if equipped with rear speak-

ers)

BALANCE (Left/Right balance

control)

NOTE

 The sound control mode will be canceled

when the another mode is selected or no

adjustment is performed for more than 10

seconds.

 In a two-speakers vehicle, keep the FADER

setting in the middle position. Since no rear

speakers are connected, adjusting the

FADER setting toward the “REAR” side will

result in a loss of sound output.

Radio control panel and display

1- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button

2- PWR (On-Off) switch

3- Display

4- Seek (Down-seek) button

5- Seek (Up-seek) button

6- Memory select buttons

To listen to the radio

BK0212400US.book 19 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)

7-20 Comfort controls

3. Press the seek button to tune to a station,

or press one of the memory select buttons

to tune in to a station memorized for that

button.

Refer to “Automatic tuning”, “Manual

tuning” or “To enter frequencies into the

memory”.

The frequency changes every time the seek

button is pressed. Press the button to select

the desired station.

After keeping the seek button depressed until

it beeps, release the button, and the selected

station reception will start.

As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can be

entered into the memory.

To store a frequency in the memory, follow

these steps:

1. Press the seek button to tune to the fre-

quency you wish to keep in the memory.

2. Press one of the memory select buttons

until it beeps.

The sound will be momentarily inter-

rupted while the frequency is being

entered into the memory. The number of

the button matching the entry in the mem-

ory as well as the frequency is displayed.

3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by

pressing the button and then releasing it

within 1 second.

N00735300756

N00735501087

1. Insert the disc with the label facing up.

When a disc is inserted, the CD indicator

will come on and the CD player will begin

playing even if the radio is being used.

The CD player will also start playback

when the CD button is pressed with a disc

in the player or with a disc set in the Disc-

loading slot, even if the radio is being

used.

To tune the radio

Manual tuning

Automatic tuning

To enter frequencies into the mem-

ory

CD control panel and display

1- CD (CD mode changeover) button

2- RADIO button

3- DISP (Display)/ (Return) button

4- CD eject button

5- CD indicator

6- Disc-loading slot

7- FOLDER indicator

8- TRACK indicator

9- Display

10- RPT (Repeat)/F-RPT (Folder repeat

mode) indicator

11- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder

random mode) indicator

12- SEL (Select) indicator

13- PAGE (Title scroll) button

14- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button

15- (Fast-forward/Track up) button

16- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch

17- RPT (Repeat) button

18- RDM (Random) button

To listen to a CD

To set a disc

BK0212400US.book 20 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-21

2. To stop the CD, turn off the power by

pressing the PWR switch for 2 seconds or

longer, or change over to the radio mode

by pressing the RADIO button, or eject

the disc by pressing the eject button.

When the CD eject button is pressed, the disc

automatically stops and is ejected.

Press the CD button if a disc is already in the

CD player. The CD player will enter CD

mode and start playback. The track number

and the playing time will appear on the dis-

play. The tracks in the disc will be played

continuously.

This CD player allows you to play MP3

(MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on

CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and

CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level

1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each

disc can hold up to 255 files in up to 100 fold-

ers, up to a maximum of 16 levels. The ID3

tag information can be displayed during MP3

playback. For information concerning ID3

tags, refer to “CD text and MP3 title display”

on page 7-23.

1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the

slot.

2. Press the CD button if a disc is already in

the CD player.

The display shows “READING”, then

playback will begin.

NOTE

 For information on adjusting the volume and

tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page

7-18 and “To adjust the tone” on page 7-19.

 3 inches (8 cm) compact disc cannot be

played on this CD player.

 For information concerning the handling of

compact discs, refer to “Handling of com-

pact discs” on page 7-40.

To eject a disc

NOTE

 If you do not remove the disc before 15 sec-

onds have elapsed, the CD player will auto-

matically reload the disc and stop.

To listen to a music CD

To listen to an MP3 CD

NOTE

 While listening to a disc on which CD-DA

(CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both

been recorded, you can switch between read-

ing of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files,

and the external audio input mode by press-

ing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer

(until you hear a beep).

For information on the external audio input,

refer to “To use the external audio input

function” on page 7-26.

 With a disc that contains both CD-DA and

MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automati-

cally played first.

 The playback sound quality differs depend-

ing on the encoding software and the bit rate.

For details, refer to the user manual of your

encoding software.

 Depending on file/folder configurations on a

disc, it may take some time before playback

starts.

 MP3 encode software and writing software

are not supplied with this unit.

 You may encounter trouble in playing an

MP3 or displaying the information of MP3

files recorded with certain writing software

or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).

 If you record too many folders or files other

than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time

before playback starts.

 This unit does not record MP3 files.

 For information on CD-Rs/RWs, refer to

“Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 7-41.

BK0212400US.book 21 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)

7-22 Comfort controls

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback

order (Example)

The disc is fast-forwarded while the but-

ton is held down.

Playback will begin once the button is

released.

The disc is fast-reversed while the button

is held down.

Playback will begin once the button is

released.

The disc will skip as many songs as the num-

ber of times the button is pressed.

The display window will display the track

number of the track selected.

The disc will skip as many songs as the num-

ber of times the button is pressed.

The display window will display the track

number of the track selected.

Operate the SEL switch to select desired file.

When this mode is activated by pressing the

SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be dis-

played in the display.

CAUTION

 Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 for-

mat which has the “.mp3” file name may

produce noise from the speakers and speaker

damage, and can damage your hearing.

Folder selection

in the order

File selection

in the order

Root folder (Root directory)

Level 1 Level 3 Level 4Level 2

To fast-forward/reverse the disc

Fast-forward

Fast-reverse

To select a desired track

Track up

Track down

To find a file (MP3 CDs only)

Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or

to select the folder or

file.

Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder or

file

NOTE

 To cancel the selection, press the button

to return to the previous step.

 If no operation is performed for 10 seconds

or more or other button is operated after the

SEL switch has been turned, searching of the

desired file is canceled.

 If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or

more after the file is displayed, playback

starts.

 When the SEL indicator is not shown on the

display and the SEL switch is operated, the

volume adjustment is activated.

BK0212400US.book 22 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-23

Press the RPT button to repeat the same track.

If the RPT button is pressed, the RPT indica-

tor will come on.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

While a song is playing, press the RPT button

for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a

beep). The F-RPT indicator will come on and

the disc will repeat all the songs in the folder

that contains the song currently playing.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

If the RDM button is pressed, the RDM indi-

cator will come on and the tracks that are

played will be selected at random.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

If the RDM button is pressed, the F-RDM

indicator will come on and the tracks that are

played will be selected at random from the

folder that is currently selected.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

Press the RDM button for 2 seconds or longer

(until you hear a beep). The RDM indicator

will come on and the tracks that are played

will be selected at random from all folders on

the disc currently selected.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00752100179

This CD player can display CD text and MP3

titles, including ID3 tag information.

The CD player can display disc and track

titles for discs with converted disc and track

title information. Press the DISP button

repeatedly to make selections in the following

sequence: disc name  track name  normal

display mode.

To repeat tracks

To repeat a track

To repeat songs in the same folder (MP3

CDs only)

NOTE

 With a disc that contains both CD-DA and

MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files

of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3

files only) to be repeated.

To change the order of tracks for

playback

Random playback for a disc (music CDs

only)

Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs

only)

Random playback for all folders on a

disc (MP3 CDs only)

NOTE

 With a disc that contains both CD-DA and

MP3 files, the random mode causes only

files of the same format (CD-DA only or

MP3 files only) to be played in a random

sequence.

CD text and MP3 title display

CD text

NOTE

 The display can show up to 11 characters. If

a disc name or track name has more than 11

characters, press the PAGE button to view

the next 11 characters.

 When there is no title information to be dis-

played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.

 Characters that the CD player cannot display

are shown as “•”.

BK0212400US.book 23 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)

7-24 Comfort controls

The CD player can display folder and file

titles for discs with converted folder and file

information. Press the DISP button repeat-

edly to make selections in the following

sequence: folder name  file name  nor-

mal display mode.

The CD player can display ID3 tag informa-

tion for files that have been recorded with

ID3 tag information.

1. Press the DISP button for 2 seconds or

longer to switch to the ID3 tag informa-

tion.

2. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make

selections in the following sequence:

album TAG  track TAG  artist TAG

 normal display mode.

N00702600010

Press the button to switch the clock mode.

To exit the clock mode, press the button.

N00702700011

1. Press and hold the button and the clock

display flashes.

2. Press the or button to adjust the

“hours” digit.

MP3 titles

ID3 tag information

NOTE

 To return from ID3 tag information to the

folder name, press the DISP button again for

2 seconds or longer.

 When there is no title information to be dis-

played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.

 The display can show up to 11 characters. If

a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag

information has more than 11 characters,

press the PAGE button to view the next 11

characters.

 Characters that the CD player cannot display

are shown as “•”.

To display the clock

A- (Clock) button

NOTE

Example

CD player mode Clock mode

NOTE

 While the clock mode is selected, the display

will switch to the applicable operation dis-

play whenever the CD player, external audio

input mode or radio, etc. is operated. Then, if

no entries are made for 7 seconds, the dis-

play will automatically return to the clock

mode.

To adjust the clock

A- (Clock) button

B- (Clock adjustment up) button

C- (Clock adjustment down) button

BK0212400US.book 24 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-25

If you keep pressing the button, fast-for-

ward begins.

3. When the “hours” digit is adjusted, press

the button to flash the “minutes” digit.

Press the or button to adjust the

“minutes” digit.

If you keep pressing the button, fast-for-

ward begins.

4. When the time is set, press the button

to stop the clock display from flashing.

N00702800012

1. Press and hold the /MENU button until

you hear a beep. “GracenoteDB” will

appear on the display.

Each time the /MENU button is

pressed, this switches in the order Grace-

note DB, PHONE SET and cancel.

2. Press the or buttons several times

to select “DB Version” and then press the

/MENU button to determine.

The Gracenote DB version is displayed.

N00702900013

It is possible to set the language used for

voice control.

1. Press and hold the /MENU button until

you hear a beep. “GracenoteDB” will

appear on the display.

2. Press the /MENU button to select

“PHONE SET”.

Then press the or buttons several

times to select “LANGUAGE” and then

press the /MENU button to determine.

NOTE

 Reset the time after the battery terminals are

disconnected and reconnected.

 Seconds do not appear in the clock display,

but after adjusting the “minutes” setting, the

clock begins to operate from 0 seconds.

To confirm the version number

of the Gracenote DB (vehicles

with a Bluetooth

2.0 interface)

A-

/MENU button

B-

button

C-

button

To change the language (vehi-

cles with Bluetooth

2.0 inter-

face)

A-

/MENU button

B-

button

C-

button

BK0212400US.book 25 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)

7-26 Comfort controls

3. Press the or buttons to select

“LangChg YES” and then press the

/MENU button to determine.

4. Press the or buttons to select lan-

guage and then press the /MENU but-

ton to determine.

5. Press the or buttons to select

“LangSet YES” and then press the

/MENU button to determine.

N00703000011

You can listen to commercially available

audio equipment, such as a portable audio

system, from your vehicle’s speakers, by con-

necting the audio equipment to the auxiliary

audio connector.

1. Connect the headphone port of the porta-

ble audio system to the auxiliary audio

connector using a commercially available

connection cord.

2. Press the AUX button several times to

switch to the AUX mode. The display will

show “AUX” and then the external audio

input mode will be activated.

3. To deactivate the external audio input

mode, press the AUX button to switch to

another mode.

To use the external audio input

function

A- Auxiliary Audio connector (Mini-jack)

B- AUX button

C- Display

NOTE

 Use a stereo mini-jack connector to connect

the audio equipment to the auxiliary audio

connector.

To activate the external audio

input mode

CAUTION

 Do not operate the connected audio equip-

ment while driving.

This could distract you and an accident

might occur.

NOTE

 The connected audio equipment cannot be

adjusted using the vehicle’s audio system.

 Depending on the connected audio equip-

ment, it may produce noise from the speak-

ers.

 Use the connected audio equipment’s own

power source, such as its battery.

Noise may be produced from the speakers if

the connected audio equipment is used while

charging it using the accessory socket of the

vehicle.

 Do not activate the external audio input

mode when no audio equipment is con-

nected.

Otherwise, noise may be produced from the

speakers.

 Connect audio equipment when the external

audio input mode is deactivated or lower the

vehicle’s speaker volume before connecting

it.

Noise may be produced from the speakers if

audio equipment is connected after the exter-

nal audio input mode is activated.

 Compared to the CD player mode and radio

mode, the vehicle’s speaker volume will be

lower in the external audio input mode.

Therefore, be careful when switching from

the external audio input mode to the CD

player mode or radio mode since the speaker

volume will be higher.

 Do not use excessive force on the connection

cord. Otherwise, the cord and connectors

may be damaged.

BK0212400US.book 26 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-27

N00762200056

You can connect your iPod or USB memory

device to the USB input terminal and play

music files stored in the iPod or USB mem-

ory device.

See the following section for the types of

connectable devices and supported files.

Refer to “Types of connectable devices and

supported file specifications” on page 5-103.

See the following sections for the connecting

methods, “How to connect an iPod” on page

5-102 and “How to connect a USB memory

device” on page 5-101.

If your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth

2.0 interface, you can play music files in your

iPod or USB memory device via voice opera-

tion.

Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice opera-

tion” on page 7-29 and “To play USB mem-

ory device tracks via voice operation” on

page 7-35.

N00762300060

N00762400087

1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio

system. The system turns on in the last

mode used.

2. Connect your iPod to the USB input ter-

minal.

Refer to “How to connect an iPod” on

page 5-102.

3. Press the CD button several times to

switch to the iPod mode. The input mode

changes as follows every time the CD but-

ton is pressed: CD mode  iPod mode

Bluetooth

mode (if so equipped) 

AUX mode  CD mode.

The iPod indicator are illuminated and

then the iPod mode will be activated.

4. Once the device is selected, playback

starts and indicator appears on the dis-

play.

 If the connection cord alone is left connected

to the auxiliary audio connector, noise may

be produced from the speakers.

 For information on how to connect and oper-

ate the commercially available audio equip-

ment, refer to the owner’s manual for the

commercially available audio equipment.

To play tracks from USB

device

(if so equipped)

NOTE

 A file protected by copyright might not be

able to playback.

 It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of

the connected device to 0 db or neutral.

iPod control panel and display

1- CD (Mode changeover) button

2- RADIO button

DISP (Title display)/ (Return) but-

ton

(USB device active) indicator

5- iPod indicator

6- Display

7- TRACK indicator

8- RPT (Repeat mode) indicator

9- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder

random mode) indicator

10- SEL (Select) indicator

11- PAGE (Title scroll) button

12-

(Fast-reverse/Track down) button

13-

(Fast-forward/Track up) button

14- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch

15- RPT (Repeat) button

16- RDM (Random) button

To play from an iPod

BK0212400US.book 27 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)

7-28 Comfort controls

5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO

button or CD button to switch to a differ-

ent mode.

N00762500033

To fast-forward/reverse the current track,

press the button or button.

To fast-forward the current track, press the

button. While the button is kept pressed,

the track will be fast-forwarded.

To fast-reverse the current track, press the

button. While the button is kept pressed, the

track will be fast-reversed.

N00762600034

Press the button repeatedly until the

desired track number appears on the display.

Press the button repeatedly until the

desired track number appears on the display.

N00762700077

You can select desired tracks from the “Playl-

ists”, “Artists”, “Albums”, “Songs” or

“Genre” (vehicles with Bluetooth

2.0 inter-

face) menus on your iPod.

Operate the SEL switch to select desired

tracks.

The selected menu or category or track is

shown in the display.

When this mode is activated by pressing the

SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be dis-

played in the display.

NOTE

 Depending on the condition of your iPod, it

may take a longer time before the playback

starts.

NOTE

 Buttons on the iPod are disabled while the

iPod is connected to the audio system.

 To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To

adjust the volume” on page 7-18 and “To

adjust the tone” on page 7-19.

To fast-forward/reverse the track

Fast-forward

Fast-reverse

To select a desired track

Track up

Track down

NOTE

 Pressing the button once during the song

will cause the audio system to restart play-

back from the beginning of the song.

To find a track from the iPod

Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or

to select the menu or

category or track.

Turn the SEL switch :To show the menu or

category or track.

NOTE

 To cancel the selection, press the button

to return to the previous step.

 If no operation is performed for 10 seconds

or more or other button is operated after the

SEL switch has been pressed, searching of

the desired tracks is canceled.

 If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or

more after the track is displayed, playback

starts.

 When the SEL indicator is not shown on the

display and the SEL switch is operated, the

volume adjustment is activated.

BK0212400US.book 28 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-29

N00762800023

Press the RPT button during playback to

show “RPT” in the display.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00762900024

Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the

display.

The iPod randomly selects tracks from the

current category and plays the selected tracks.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00763000035

Press and hold the RDM button until you hear

a beep to show “F-RDM” in the display.

The iPod randomly selects tracks in the

album from the current category and play the

selected tracks.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00763100049

You can display the track titles, artist names,

genre and album titles recorded in the iPod.

The display changes as follows every time

the DISP button is pressed during playback:

Album title  Track name  Artist name 

Genre (vehicles with Bluetooth

2.0 inter-

face)  Normal display.

N00763200040

Desired tracks can be selected and played

from your iPod by “Artist”, “Album”, “Playl-

ist” and “Genre” using voice commands.

For information concerning the voice recog-

nition function or speaker registration func-

tion, refer to “Bluetooth

2.0 interface” on

page 5-81.

The following explains how to prepare for

voice operation and play the tracks.

N00763300067

To use the voice operation, press the

SPEECH button (A) first.

N00763400039

1. Say “Play” on the main menu.

To play the same track repeatedly

To play tracks in random order

To play tracks in each album in

random order

To switch the display

NOTE

 Up to 11 characters are shown in the display

at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,

press the PAGE button. The next characters

are displayed every time this button is

pressed.

 If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in

the display.

 Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-

stituted by

“•”.

To play iPod tracks via voice

operation (vehicles with Blue-

tooth

2.0 interface)

Preparation for voice operation

To search by artist name

NOTE

 The Bluetooth

2.0 interface starts recogniz-

ing the connected device.

If the connected device cannot be recognized

or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth

2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice

guide. Follow the voice guide.

BK0212400US.book 29 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)

7-30 Comfort controls

2. After the voice guide says “Would you

like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or

Genre?,” say “Artist”.

3. After the voice guide says “What Artist

would you like to play?,” say the artist

name.

4. If there is only one match, the system pro-

ceeds to step 6.

5. If there are two or more matches, the

voice guide will say “More than one

match was found, would you like to play

<artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-

tem proceeds to step 6.

If you say “No,” the next matching artist

is uttered by the system.

6. After the voice guide says “Playing <artist

name>,” the system creates a playlist

index for the artist.

7. The system exits the voice recognition

mode and starts playback.

N00763500030

1. Say “Play” on the main menu.

2. After the voice guide says “Would you

like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or

Genre?,” say “Album”.

3. After the voice guide says “What Album

would you like to play?” say the album

title.

4. If there is only one match, the system pro-

ceeds to step 6.

5. If there are two or more matches, the

voice guide will say “More than one

match was found, would you like to play

<album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-

tem proceeds to step 6.

If you say “No,” the name of the next

matching album is uttered by the system.

6. After the voice guide says “Playing

<album title>,” the system creates a playl-

ist index for the album title.

NOTE

 If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip

step 3.

NOTE

 If you say “No” to three or all artist names

uttered by the system, the voice guide will

say “Artist not found, please try again” and

the system returns to step 2.

 Search time depends on the number of songs

on your connected device. Devices contain-

ing a large number of songs may take longer

to return search results.

NOTE

 If the confirmation function is active, the

voice guide confirms if the artist name is

correct. If the artist name is correct, say

“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide

says “Artist not found, please try again,” the

system returns to step 2.

To search by album title

NOTE

 The Bluetooth

2.0 interface starts recogniz-

ing the connected device.

If the connected device cannot be recognized

or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth

2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice

guide. Follow the voice guide.

NOTE

 If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip

step 3.

NOTE

 If you say “No” to three or all album titles

uttered by the system, the voice guide will

say “Album not found, please try again” and

the system returns to step 2.

BK0212400US.book 30 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-31

7. The system exits the voice recognition

mode and starts playback.

N00763600031

1. Say “Play” on the main menu.

2. After the voice guide says “Would you

like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or

Genre?,” say “Playlist”.

3. After the voice guide says “What Playlist

would you like to play?,” say the playlist

name.

4. If there is only one match, the system pro-

ceeds to step 6.

5. If there are two or more matches, the

voice guide will say “More than one

match was found, would you like to play

<playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the system

proceeds to step 6.

If you say “No,” the next matching playl-

ist name is uttered by the system.

6. After the voice guide says “Playing

<playlist>,” the system creates an index

for the playlist.

7. The system exits the voice recognition

mode and starts playback.

N00763700032

1. Say “Play” on the main menu.

2. After the voice guide says “Would you

like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or

Genre?,” say “Genre”.

NOTE

 If the confirmation function is active, the

voice guide confirms if the album title is cor-

rect. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”.

If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says

“Album not found, please try again,” the sys-

tem returns to step 2.

To search by playlist

NOTE

 The Bluetooth

2.0 interface starts recogniz-

ing the connected device.

If the connected device cannot be recognized

or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth

2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice

guide. Follow the voice guide.

NOTE

 If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip

step 3.

If the device has no playlist, the voice guide

will say “There are no playlists stored on

device” and the system returns to step 2.

NOTE

 If you say “No” to three or all playlist names

uttered by the system, the voice guide will

say “Playlist not found, please try again” and

the system returns to step 2.

NOTE

 If the confirmation function is active, the

voice guide confirms if the playlist name is

correct. If the playlist name is correct, say

“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guide

says “Playlist not found, please try again,”

the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Con-

firmation function setting” on page 5-85.

To search by genre

NOTE

 The Bluetooth

2.0 interface starts recogniz-

ing the connected device.

If the connected device cannot be recognized

or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth

2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice

guide. Follow the voice guide.

NOTE

 If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step

BK0212400US.book 31 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)

7-32 Comfort controls

3. After the voice guide says “What Genre

would you like to play?,” say the music

type.

4. If there is only one match, the system pro-

ceeds to step 6.

5. If there are two or more matches, the

voice guide will say “More than one

match was found, would you like to play

<genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the system

proceeds to step 6.

If you say “No,” the next matching genre

is uttered by the system.

6. After the voice guide says “Playing

<genre>,” the system creates an index for

the genre.

7. The system exits the voice recognition

mode and starts playback.

N00763900063

N00764000087

1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio

system. The system turns on in the last

mode used.

2. Connect your USB memory device to the

USB input terminal.

Refer to “How to connect a USB memory

device” on page 5-101.

3. Press the CD button several times to

switch to the USB mode. The input mode

changes as follows every time the CD but-

ton is pressed: CD mode  USB mode

Bluetooth

mode (if so equipped) 

AUX mode  CD mode.

The USB indicator are illuminated and

then the USB mode will be activated.

4. Once the device is selected, playback

starts and indicator appears on the dis-

play.

NOTE

 If you say “No” to three or all genres uttered

by the system, the voice guide will say

“Genre not found, please try again” and the

system returns to step 2.

NOTE

 If the confirmation function is active, the

voice guide confirms if the genre is correct.

If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say

“No”. After the voice guide says “Genre not

found, please try again,” the system returns

to step 2. Refer to “Confirmation function

setting” on page 5-85.

USB control panel and display

1- CD (Mode changeover) button

2- RADIO button

DISP (Title display)/ (Return) but-

ton

(USB device active) indicator

5- USB indicator

6- Display

7- TRACK indicator

8- RPT (Repeat mode)/F-RPT (Folder

repeat mode) indicator

9- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder

random mode) indicator

10- SEL (Select) indicator

11- PAGE (Title scroll) button

12-

(Fast-reverse/Track down) button

13-

(Fast-forward/Track up) button

14- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch

15- RPT (Repeat) button

16- RDM (Random) button

To play from a USB memory

device

NOTE

 Depending on the condition of your USB

device, it may take a longer time before the

playback starts.

BK0212400US.book 32 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-33

5. To stop the playback, press the RADIO

button or CD button to switch to a differ-

ent mode.

N00764100105

This audio can play MP3, WMA and AAC

files recorded in a USB memory device. This

audio supports up to 65,535 files in 700 fold-

ers on 8 levels.

The folder and file hierarchy in the USB

memory device is shown below.

N00764200034

To fast-forward/reverse the current track,

press the button or button.

To fast-forward the current track, press the

button. While the button is kept pressed,

the track will be fast-forwarded.

To fast-reverse the current track, press the

button. While the button is kept pressed, the

track will be fast-reversed.

N00764300035

Press the button repeatedly until the

desired file number appears on the display.

Press the button repeatedly until the

desired file number appears on the display.

NOTE

 To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To

adjust the volume” on page 7-18 and “To

adjust the tone” on page 7-19.

Supported compressed music files

Folder selection order/file playback

order (example)

Folder selection

In the order

File selection

In the order

NOTE

 If a file protected by copyrights is played, the

file will be skipped.

To fast-forward/reverse the track

Root folder (Root directory)

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Fast-forward

Fast-reverse

To select a file

Track up

Track down

NOTE

 Pressing the button once during the song

will cause the audio system to restart play-

back from the beginning of the file.

BK0212400US.book 33 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)

7-34 Comfort controls

N00703100012

Operate the SEL switch to select desired file.

When this mode is activated by pressing the

SEL switch, the SEL indicator will be dis-

played in the display.

N00764500024

Press the RPT button to show “RPT” in the

display. To cancel this mode, press the button

again.

N00764600038

Press and hold the RPT button until you hear

a beep to show “F-RPT” in the display.

All tracks in the current folder are played

repeatedly.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00764700039

Press the RDM button to show “F-RDM” in

the display.

The audio randomly selects tracks from the

current folder and plays the selected tracks.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00764800030

Press and hold the RDM button until you hear

a beep to show “RDM” in the display.

The audio randomly selects tracks from all

folders and plays the selected tracks.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00765100043

You can displays titles with tag information.

The display changes as follows every time

the DISP button is pressed during playback:

Folder name  File name  Normal display.

1. Press and hold the DISP button until you

hear a beep.

2. The display changes as follows every time

the DISP button is pressed briefly: Album

TAG  Track TAG  Artist TAG 

Genre TAG (vehicles with Bluetooth

2.0

interface)  Normal display.

To find a file

Press the SEL switch :To start this mode or

to select the folder or

file.

Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder or

file.

NOTE

 To cancel the selection, press the button

to return to the previous step.

 If no operation is performed for 10 seconds

or more or other button is operated after the

SEL switch has been turned, searching of the

desired file is canceled.

 If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or

more after the file is displayed, playback

starts.

 When the SEL indicator is not shown on the

display and the SEL switch is operated, the

volume adjustment is activated.

To play the same file repeatedly

To play the files in the same folder

repeatedly

To play a folder in random order

To play all folders in random

order

To switch the display

Folder title

Tag information

NOTE

 Press and hold the DISP button again until

you hear a beep, and the tag information dis-

play returns to the folder title display.

 Up to 11 characters are shown in the display

at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,

press the PAGE button. The next characters

are displayed every time this button is

pressed.

BK0212400US.book 34 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)

Comfort controls 7-35

N00765200073

Desired tracks can be selected and played

from your USB memory device by “Artist”,

“Album”, “Playlist” and “Genre” using voice

commands.

For information concerning the voice recog-

nition function or speaker registration func-

tion, refer to “Bluetooth

2.0 interface” on

page 5-81.

The playback sequence of tracks is the same

as when an iPod is connected. Refer to the

“To play iPod tracks via voice operation” on

page 7-29.

To use the voice operation, press the

SPEECH button (A) first.

N00765300104

You can wirelessly connect a digital audio

player or cellular phone supporting Blue-

tooth

to listen to the tracks on the connected

device.

Refer to “Bluetooth

2.0 interface” for the

connecting method, etc. on page 5-81.

The following explains the basic playback

method.

N00765400062

 If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in

the display.

 Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-

stituted by

“•”.

To play USB memory device

tracks via voice operation (vehi-

cles with Bluetooth

2.0 inter-

face)

Preparation for voice operation

NOTE

To play tracks from a Blue-

tooth

device (vehicles with

Bluetooth

2.0 interface)

NOTE

 Depending on the connected device, opera-

tion of the connected device is limited to its

available functions.

 Depending on the connected device, the

device may not operate correctly.

 A file protected by copyright might not be

able to playback.

 It is recommended to adjust the equaliser of

the connected device to 0 db or neutral.

 The voice operation is not available to access

music files on the connected Bluetooth

device.

Bluetooth

device control panel

and display

1- CD (Mode changeover) button

2- PWR (On-Off) switch

BT (Bluetooth

) indicator

BK0212400US.book 35 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)

7-36 Comfort controls

N00765500089

1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audio

system. The system turns on in the last

mode used.

2. Press the CD button several times to

switch to the BT-A (Bluetooth

) mode.

The input mode changes as follows every

time the CD button is pressed: CD mode

 iPod mode  Bluetooth

mode (if so

equipped)  AUX mode  CD mode.

The BT indicator are illuminated and then

the BT-A mode will be activated.

3. Connect your Bluetooth

device.

Refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth

2.0

interface and Bluetooth

device” on page

5-87.

4. Playback starts automatically.

N00765600035

To stop the playback, press the Stop button.

To restart the playback, press the Play/Pause

button.

N00765700036

To pause the playback, press and hold the

Play/Pause button until you hear a beep.

To restart the playback, press the Play/Pause

button.

N00703200013

To fast-forward/reverse the current track,

press the button or button.

To fast-forward the current track, press the

button. While the button is kept pressed,

the track will be fast-forwarded.

To fast-reverse the current track, press the

button. While the button is kept pressed, the

track will be fast-reversed.

N00765800037

Press the button repeatedly until the

desired file number appears on the display.

Press the button repeatedly until the

desired file number appears on the display.

4- TRACK indicator

5- Display

6- PAGE (Title scroll) button

(Fast-reverse/Track down) button

(Fast-forward/Track up) button

9- DISP (Title display) button

10- Play/Pause button

11- Stop button

12- RPT (Repeat) button

13- RDM (Random) button

To listen to tracks from a device

connected via Bluetooth

NOTE

 Depending on the connected device, the

playback may not start automatically.

In this case, operate the connected device to

start the playback.

To stop the playback (if supported

by the device)

To pause the playback (if sup-

ported by the device)

To fast-forward/reverse the track

(if supported by the device)

Fast-forward

Fast-reverse

To select a track (if supported by

the device)

Track up

Track down

NOTE

 Pressing the button once during the song

will cause the audio system to restart play-

back from the beginning of the file.

BK0212400US.book 36 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped)

Comfort controls 7-37

N00765900038

Press the RPT button several times to switch

to show “RPT” in the display.

The mode changes as follows every time the

RPT button is pressed:

No display (not repeat)  RPT (repeat same

track)  F-RPT (repeat all tracks)  No dis-

play

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00703300014

Press the RPT button several times to switch

to show “F-RPT” in the display.

The mode changes as follows every time the

RPT button is pressed:

No display (not repeat)  RPT (repeat same

track)  F-RPT (repeat all tracks)  No dis-

play

All tracks in the Bluetooth

device are played

repeatedly.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00766000023

Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in the

display.

The system randomly selects and plays tracks

from all tracks in the Bluetooth

device.

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00766200041

The system can display tag information.

1. Press the DISP button.

2. The display changes as follows every time

the DISP button is pressed:

Album title  Title name  Artist name

 Genre  Normal display

N00714800484

The remote control switches are located on

the left side of the steering wheel.

These switches can be used when the ignition

switch or the operation mode is in ON or

ACC.

To play the same track repeatedly

(if supported by the device)

To play the all tracks repeatedly (if

supported by the device)

To play tracks in random order (if

supported by the device)

To switch the display (if supported

by the device)

NOTE

 Up to 11 characters are shown in the display

at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,

press the PAGE button. The next characters

are displayed every time this button is

pressed.

 If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in

the display.

 Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-

stituted by “•”.

Steering wheel audio remote

control switches

(if so equipped)

1- Vol + key, - key

Adjust audio functions and the mobile

phone function volume.

CH key, key

Select CD and other audio source

tracks and radio stations.

Hold down to skip up and down

through tracks.

BK0212400US.book 37 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Error codes

7-38 Comfort controls

N00736100780

If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.

3- MODE key

Hold down to turn the audio function

ON/OFF. Additionally, each time this

is pressed, this switches the audio

source.

The order of switching is as shown

below.

An iPod cable (available separately) is

required.

Requires a separately-purchased Blue-

tooth-capable audio device (vehicles

with a Bluetooth

2.0 interface).

Error codes

Audio system

Error display Item Repair

CHECK DISC

Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on

disc.

Insert disc with label facing up.

Remove moisture from disc.

DISC ERROR

Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or exces-

sive vehicle vibration.

Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations stop.

BK0212400US.book 38 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Error codes

Comfort controls 7-39

INTERNAL E Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position.

Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, bring your vehicle

to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice for repair.

HEAT ERROR Internal protection against high temperatures. Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.

ERROR DC Foreign material is inside of radio or amplifier.

Bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair.

iPod (if so equipped)

Error display Item Repair

NO SONG There are no playable music files. Record music files in the iPod.

VER ERROR The iPod or its software cannot be recognized. Connect a supported iPod.

USB memory device (if so equipped)

Error display Item Repair

FILE ERROR The file cannot be played.

The file is protected by copyrights, etc. An error is displayed

for several seconds, and then the next playable file is played

automatically.

UNSUPPORTED (first) 

DEVICE (after)

The USB memory device cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device.

UNSUPPORTED (first) 

FORMAT (after)

The USB memory device format cannot be rec-

ognized.

Remove the USB memory device.

Error display Item Repair

BK0212400US.book 39 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Handling of compact discs

7-40 Comfort controls

N00734100340

 Use only the type of compact discs that

have the mark shown in the illustration

below. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RW

discs may cause problems.)

 The use of special shaped, damaged com-

pact discs (like cracked discs) or low-

quality compact discs (like warped discs

or burrs on the discs) such as those shown

will damage the CD player.

 In the following circumstances, moisture

can form on compact discs and inside the

audio system, preventing normal opera-

tion.

• When there is high humidity (for exam-

ple, when it is raining).

• When the temperature suddenly rises,

such as right after the heater is turned on

in cold weather.

In this case, wait until the moisture has

had time to dry out.

 When the CD player is subjected to vio-

lent vibrations, such as during off-road

driving, the tracking may not work.

 When storing compact discs, always store

them in their separate cases. Never place

compact discs in direct sunlight, or in any

place where the temperature or humidity

is high.

 Never touch the flat surface of the disc

where there isn’t a label. This will damage

the disc surface and could affect the sound

quality. When handling a compact disc,

always hold it by the outer edge and the

center hole.

USB BUS PWR

An overcurrent or other power-supply error has

occurred.

Remove the USB memory device.

Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

LSI ERROR Internal device errors

Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Error display Item Repair

Handling of compact discs

BK0212400US.book 40 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Antenna

Comfort controls 7-41

 To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry

cloth. Wipe directly from the center hole

toward the outer edge. Do not wipe in a

circle. Never use any chemicals such as

benzine, paint thinner, a disc spray

cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the disc.

 Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pen-

cil, etc. to write on the label surface of the

disc.

 Do not put additional labels or stickers on

compact discs. Also, do not use any com-

pact disc on which a label or sticker has

started to peel off or any compact disc that

has stickiness or other contamination left

by a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use

such a compact disc, the CD player may

stop working properly and you may not be

able to eject the compact disc.

N00751900066

 You may have trouble playing back some

CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD record-

ers (CD-R/RW drives), either due to their

recording characteristics or dirt, finger-

prints, scratches, etc. on the disc surface.

 CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high

temperatures and high humidity than ordi-

nary music CDs and can therefore be

damaged and rendered unplayable if left

inside your vehicle for a long time.

 Depending on the combination of the

writing software, the CD recorder (CD-

R/RW drive), and the disc used to create a

CD-R/RW, the disc might not play suc-

cessfully.

 This player cannot play the CD-R/RW

discs if the session is not closed.

 This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs

which contain data other than CD-DA or

MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).

 Be sure to observe the handling instruc-

tions for the CD-R/RW disc.

N00734201508

Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise.

Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base

(B) until it is securely retained.

Notes on CD-Rs/RWs

WARNING

 Operating the CD player in a manner

other than specifically instructed herein

may result in hazardous radiation expo-

sure. Do not remove the cover and attempt

to repair the CD player by yourself. There

are no user serviceable parts inside. In

case of malfunction, contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice.

Antenna

To remove

To install

NOTE

 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the

following cases:

• When using an automatic car wash

• When covering your vehicle with a car

cover

• When driving into a structure that has a low

ceiling.

BK0212400US.book 41 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

General information about your radio

7-42 Comfort controls

N00733900455

Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and

FM stations.

The quality of your reception is affected by

distance, obstacles, and signal interference.

FM signals do not follow the earth surface

nor are they reflected by the upper atmo-

sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot

be received over long distances. AM signals

follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by

the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM

broadcasts can be received over longer dis-

tances.

Because of the limited range of FM signals

and the way FM waves transmit, you may

experience weak or fading FM reception.

When the broadcast is blocked by mountains

or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-

turbed.

The reason why one can hear FM but not AM

in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that

FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected

by solid objects such as buildings, etc.

Because FM signals are easily reflected by

buildings, this can also cause reception dis-

turbances.

The direct signal from the broadcast station

reaches the antenna slightly before the

reflected signal. This time difference may

cause some reception disturbance or flutter.

This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.

If one listens to a weak station and is in the

vicinity of another strong station, both sta-

tions might be received simultaneously.

General information about

your radio

Signal transmission

FM AM

25 to 40 mile radius

(40 to 64 km)

100 mile radius

(160 km)

Weak reception (fading)

Reflection

Cross modulation

BK0212400US.book 42 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

General information about your radio

Comfort controls 7-43

Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of

disturbances mentioned previously become

more marked and the reception range is

somewhat diminished during stereo recep-

tion.

FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-

tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially

those without an electronic noise suppression

device. The disturbance is even greater if the

station is weak or poorly tuned.

FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical

disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-

tive to electrical disturbances such as power

lines, lightning and other types of similar

electrical phenomena.

FM stereo reception

Causes of disturbances

BK0212400US.book 43 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

BK0212400US.book 44 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

For emergencies

If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2

Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4

Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5

Tire repair kit (if so equipped)..........................................................8-6

How to change a tire (Vehicles equipped with spare tire) .............8-11

Towing ...........................................................................................8-17

Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-18

Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-20

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

If the vehicle breaks down

8-2 For emergencies

N00836300233

If your vehicle breaks down on the road,

move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard

warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or

the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane

slowly with the hazard lights flashing until

you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the

flashers flashing.

If the engine stops, there will be no power

assist to the steering and brakes, making these

difficult to use.

 The brake booster will not work, so the

brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal

will be harder to press than usual.

 Since there is no power steering assist, the

steering wheel will be hard to turn.

Get help from your passengers, bystanders,

etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe

area.

N00836400768

If the engine cannot be started because the

battery is weak or dead, you can start it with

the battery from another vehicle using jumper

cables.

1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch

bands or bracelets that might create an

accidental electrical contact.

2. Position the vehicles close enough

together so that the jumper cables can

reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t

touching each other.

3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.

Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-

cle. Put an automatic transaxle or CVT in

“P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N”

(Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position or put the operation mode in

OFF.

5. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at

the proper level. (Refer to “Battery” on

page 9-10.)

If the vehicle breaks down

If the engine stops/fails

When the engine fails at the

intersection

Jump-starting the engine

WARNING

 To reduce the risk of igniting flammable

gas that may be emitted from the battery,

carefully read this section before jump-

starting the vehicle.

 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing

or towing. This can cause an accident

resulting in serious injury or death and

can damage the vehicle.

NOTE

 Do not use jumper cables if they have dam-

age or corrosion.

CAUTION

 Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-

volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,

both systems can be damaged.

NOTE

 Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical

loads. This will avoid sparks and help save

both batteries.

WARNING

 If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or

looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP

STARTING!!

The battery might split open or explode if

the temperature is below the freezing

point or if it is not filled to the proper

level.

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Jump-starting the engine

For emergencies 8-3

6. Connect one end of one jumper cable

to the positive (+) terminal of the dis-

charged battery (A), and then connect the

other end to the positive (+) terminal

of the booster battery (B).

7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable

to the negative (-) terminal of the

booster battery (B), and then connect the

other end to the designated ground

location of the vehicle with the discharged

battery (A) at the point farthest from the

battery.

8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing

the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-

utes, then start the engine in the vehicle

with the discharged battery.

9. After the engine is started, disconnect the

cables in the reverse order from the way

you connected them.

WARNING

 Make sure that the jumper cables and

your clothing are clear of the cooling fans

and drive belts. Entanglement with the

fans or belts can cause serious personal

injury.

NOTE

 Open the terminal cover before connecting

the jumper cable to the positive terminal of

the battery.

(Refer to “Battery” on page 9-10.)

 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery

size.

Otherwise heat damage to the cables could

result.

WARNING

 Be sure to follow the proper order when

connecting the batteries, of:



 Make sure that the connection is made

to the correct designated location (as

shown in the illustration) properly. If the

connection is directly made to the negative

(-) terminal of the battery, the flammable

gases from inside the battery might catch

fire and explode, causing personal injury.

 When connecting the jumper cable, do not

connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-

tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat-

tery explode.

NOTE

Charging the battery by using

an external battery charger

WARNING

 Always remove the battery from your

vehicle when the battery is charged by an

external battery charger.

 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away

from the battery because the battery could

explode.

 Keep your work area well vented when

charging or using the battery in an

enclosed space.

 Remove all the caps before charging the

battery.

 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-

sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte

comes in contact with your hands, eyes,

clothes, or the painted surface of your

vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If

electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them

immediately and thoroughly with water,

and get prompt medical attention.

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Engine overheating

8-4 For emergencies

If you drive your vehicle with a low battery

charge after the engine has been started by

using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.

This can cause the anti-lock braking system

warning light to blink on and off. This is only

due to the low battery voltage. It is not a

problem with the brake system. If this hap-

pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the

charging system is operating properly.

N00836500365

If the high coolant temperature warning light

illuminates during the engine is running, the

engine may be overheating. If this happens:

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on

the hazard warning flashers.

2. With the engine still running, carefully

raise the engine hood to vent the engine

compartment.

3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If

the fan is not turning, stop the engine

immediately and contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-

ity of your choice for assistance.

4. If you see steam or spray coming from

under the hood, turn off the engine.

5. If you do not see steam or spray coming

from under the hood, leave the engine on

until the high coolant temperature warn-

ing light goes off. After the high coolant

temperature warning light has gone off,

you can start driving again. If the high

coolant temperature warning light stays

on, turn off the engine.

6. When you do not see any more steam or

spray, open the hood. Look for obvious

leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be

careful as components will be hot. Any

leak source must be repaired.

7. If there is no obvious leak source, check

the coolant level in the engine coolant

reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too

low, slowly add coolant.

8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs

coolant, you will probably also need to

add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen

or remove the radiator cap until the engine

has cooled down.

9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant,

up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use

plain water if you have to (and replace it

with the right coolant as soon as possible).

 Always wear protective clothing and gog-

gles when working near the battery.

 Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-

dren.

As your vehicle has anti-lock

brakes

Engine overheating

WARNING

 To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,

jewelry and clothes away from the cooling

fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.

WARNING

 Before raising the engine hood, check to

see if there is steam or spray coming from

under the hood. Steam or spray coming

from an overheated engine could seriously

scald you.

Do not open the hood until there is no

steam or spray.

WARNING

 Removing the radiator cap could scald

you with escaping hot water or steam.

When checking the radiator level, cover

the cap with a cloth before trying to

remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-

wise, without pressing down, to the first

notch. The pressure in the system will then

be let out. When the pressure is COM-

PLETELY LET OUT, press down and

keep turning the cap counterclockwise

until it comes off.

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Jack and tools

For emergencies 8-5

10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it

fully. Check the coolant temperature

warning light. You can start driving again

when the high coolant temperature warn-

ing light does not come on.

11. Have the system inspected by your autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice.

N00836600379

The tools are stored beneath the floor board

of the cargo area. The jack (if so equipped) is

stored under the driver’s seat.

Before removing or storing the jack, move

the driver’s seat fully forward to access the

jack from the rear seat area.

(Refer to “Front seat” on page 4-3.)

Turn the shaft end of the jack in the direction

(1) until the jack fully retracts and remove the

jack from the holder (A).

Put the jack in the holder (A) and turn the

shaft end of the jack in the direction (2) by

hand until the jack is firmly secured.

Jack and tools

Storage

1- Tools

2- Jack (if so equipped)

Tools

1- Tools bag

2- Wheel nut wrench

Type A

Type B

3- Jack bar

4- Towing hook

Jack (if so equipped)

CAUTION

 Never access, remove or store the jack from

the front of the driver’s seat. Doing so could

damage electrical wires under the driver’s

seat.

To remove

To store

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tire repair kit (if so equipped)

8-6 For emergencies

N00800400015

The tire repair kit can be used to temporarily

repair a minor puncture in tread area caused

by a nail, screw or similar object. Therefore, a

spare tire is not provided.

N00800500016

The tire repair kit is stored beneath the floor

board of the cargo area.

N00800600017

WARNING

 After storing the jack in place, make sure

the jack is securely fixed in the holder.

If the jack is not fixed securely, it may

move and hit an occupant in an accident

resulting in serious injury or death. Also

the jack may move forward during driv-

ing and could interfere with driver’s pedal

operation causing an accident.

Tire repair kit (if so equipped)

WARNING

 The tire repair kit may not permanently

seal a punctured tire. Have the tire

repaired as soon as possible.

 Using the tire repair kit may damage the

wheel and/or the tire inflation pressure

sensor for the tire. The vehicle must

promptly be inspected and repaired by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer after

using the tire repair kit.

 Use only the Mitsubishi Motors genuine

tire repair kit. Sealant in other repair kits

may not sufficiently seal the tire puncture.

Tire repair kit storage

1- Tire repair kit which consists of 2 to 5.

2- Tire compressor

3- Tire sealant bottle

4- Speed restriction sticker

5- Bag

How to use the tire repair kit

WARNING

 Never use the tire repair kit under in any

of the situations listed below. The tire can-

not be repaired by the tire repair kit. If

any of these situations occurs, please con-

tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

• More than one tire is punctured.

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tire repair kit (if so equipped)

For emergencies 8-7

1. Park the vehicle on a safe, flat and level

place.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-

axle, stop the engine and move the gear-

shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.

On vehicles equipped with continuously

variable transmission (CVT), move the

selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,

and stop the engine.

4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

set up a warning sign, such as a warning

triangle or flashing signal lamp, at an ade-

quate distance from the vehicle, and have

all your passengers leave the vehicle.

5. Take out the tire repair kit.

Make sure that the compressor switch is

OFF.

6. Shake the tire sealant bottle well.

• The puncture hole has a length or width

of 1/7 inch (4 mm) or greater.

• The tire is punctured in the side wall (A),

not in the tread (B).

• The vehicle has been driven with the tire

almost completely flat.

• The tire has completely slipped over the

wheel rim and come off the wheel.

• The wheel is damaged.

• A bump, cut or crack is on the tire.

• The tire sealant’s expiration date has

passed. (The expiration date is shown on

the bottle label (C).)

• The ambient temperature is below -40 °F

(-40 °C) or above 140 °F (60 °C).

WARNING

 The tire sealant can cause health damage

if swallowed. If you accidentally swallow

it, drink as much water as possible and

immediately seek medical attention.

 If the tire sealant gets in your eyes or on

your skin, rinse it away with lots of water.

If you still sense an abnormality, seek

medical attention.

 Consult a doctor immediately if any aller-

gic reactions occur.

 Do not allow children to touch the tire

sealant.

CAUTION

 If the vehicle body is contaminated by the

tire sealant, wipe the tire sealant off immedi-

ately with a wet cloth.

 Immediately wash clothes contaminated with

tire sealant. The tire sealant may not be

removed from the clothes.

NOTE

 Do not pull out an object, such as a nail or

screw, that penetrates the punctured tire.

 Move the vehicle so that the tire valve is

positioned away from the point where the

tire touches the ground. If the valve is near

the point where the tire touches the ground,

the sealant may not enter the tire easily.

BK0212400US.book 7 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tire repair kit (if so equipped)

8-8 For emergencies

7. Take the valve cap (D) off the tire valve

(E).

8. Unwind the bottle hose (F) from around

the sealant bottle.

9. Pull out the compressor’s hose (G) from

the bottom of the compressor and securely

attach it to the valve (H) of the bottle by

turning it clockwise until tight.

10. Install the bottle onto the compressor.

11. Securely attach the bottle hose (F) to the

tire valve (E).

NOTE

 In cold conditions (when the ambient tem-

perature is 32 °F {0 °C} or lower), thicken-

ing of the tire sealant can make the tire

sealant hard to squeeze out of the bottle.

Warm the bottle between your hands inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

 When installing the bottle, align the projec-

tion (I) on the bottle with the indentation (J)

in the compressor.

BK0212400US.book 8 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tire repair kit (if so equipped)

For emergencies 8-9

12. Pull out the compressor’s power cord (K),

insert the plug on the cord into the 12 V

power outlet (L), and then turn the igni-

tion switch or the operation mode to the

ACC position. (Refer to “12V power out-

let” on page 5-106.)

Turn ON the compressor switch (M) and

inject all of the tire sealant and inflate the

tire to the specified pressure. (Refer to

“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-14.)

If there is a gap between the tire and

wheel, push the tread area toward the cen-

ter of the wheel to close the gap before

running the compressor.

13. Affix the speed restriction sticker (N) to

the three-diamond mark on the steering

wheel.

CAUTION

 If the bottle hose is not attached securely, the

tire sealant will leak out from the tire valve

and the tire may not inflate to the specified

pressure.

WARNING

 Do not place your hand or fingers between

the tire and wheel while inflating the tire.

Your hand or fingers may become caught

between the tire and wheel.

CAUTION

 The supplied compressor is designed only

for inflation of your vehicle tires.

 The compressor is designed to run on a vehi-

cle’s 12 V power supply. Do not connect it to

any other power source.

 The compressor is not waterproof. If you use

it in rain, make sure water does not get on it.

 Any sand or dust sucked into the compressor

could make the compressor break down. Do

not place the compressor directly on any

sandy or dusty surface when using it.

 Do not disassemble or modify the compres-

sor. Also, do not subject the air pressure

gauge to shock. It could malfunction.

CAUTION

 Do not affix the sticker anywhere except the

specified position on the pad of the steering

wheel. Affixing the sticker in an incorrect

position could prevent the SRS airbag from

deploying properly.

CAUTION

BK0212400US.book 9 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tire repair kit (if so equipped)

8-10 For emergencies

14. Check and adjust the tire pressure with

reference to the air pressure gauge on the

compressor. If you overinflate the tire,

release air by pressing the pressure release

switch (O) on the compressor.

15. Turn OFF the compressor switch, then

pull the power cord plug out of the 12 V

power outlet.

16. When you have inflated the tire to the

specified pressure, stow the compressor

and bottle in the vehicle and promptly

start driving the vehicle so that the tire

sealant can spread evenly in the tire.

Drive with great care. Do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Observe local

speed limits.

17. After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles (5

km), park the vehicle in a safe place.

Remove the air compressor from the

stowed position. Check the tire pressure

using the air pressure gauge on the com-

pressor. If the tire pressure has not

dropped, the emergency repair procedure

is complete. Proceed to step 19.

If the tire pressure is insufficient, inflate

the tire to the specified pressure again and

drive the vehicle carefully without

exceeding a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Before driving, make sure that the com-

pressor is stowed.

CAUTION

 The surface of the compressor will get hot

while the compressor is running. Do not

keep the compressor running continuously

for more than 10 minutes. After using the

compressor, wait for the compressor to cool

before using it again.

 If the compressor becomes sluggish or hot

while operating, it is overheating. Immedi-

ately place the switch in the OFF position

and let the compressor cool down for at least

30 minutes.

NOTE

 If the tire pressure does not rise to the speci-

fied level within 10 minutes, the tire may be

so severely damaged that the tire sealant can-

not be used for emergency repair. Do not

drive the vehicle. Please contact an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice.

NOTE

 At this point the puncture hole is not sealed

yet. Air will continue to leak through the

puncture hole until the emergency repair pro-

cedure is completed (through step 17 or step

18 of these instructions).

CAUTION

 If you sense any abnormality while driving,

stop the vehicle and contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice. Otherwise the tire pressure

may drop before the emergency repair proce-

dure is completed, rendering the vehicle

unsafe to drive.

CAUTION

 If the tire pressure is lower than the mini-

mum permitted pressure (18 psi {130 kPa}),

the tire cannot successfully be repaired with

the tire sealant. Do not drive the vehicle any

further. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

BK0212400US.book 10 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

How to change a tire (Vehicles equipped with spare tire)

For emergencies 8-11

18. After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles (5

km) again, check the tire pressure using

the air pressure gauge on the compressor.

If the tire pressure has not dropped, the

emergency repair procedure is complete.

Before driving, make sure that the com-

pressor is stowed. You must still not

exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Observe local speed limits.

19. Immediately drive with great care to an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice and have the

tire repair/replacement performed.

N00836900819

Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.

1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-

axle, stop the engine and move the gear-

shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.

On vehicles equipped with continuously

variable transmission (CVT), move the

selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,

and stop the engine.

4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a

warning triangle, flashing signal light,

etc., at an adequate distance from the

vehicle, and have all your passengers exit

the vehicle.

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when

it is raised on the jack, place chocks or

blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally

opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-

ing.

NOTE

 If the tire pressure has dropped below the

specified level when you check it at the end

of the repair procedure, do not drive the

vehicle any further. Contact an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

 In cold conditions (when the ambient tem-

perature is 32 °F {0 °C} or lower), the time

and driving distance required until comple-

tion of the repair can become longer than in

warmer conditions, and the tire pressure may

drop below the specified level even after you

have inflated the tire the second time and

subsequently driven the vehicle. If this hap-

pens, inflate the tire to the specified pressure

once more, drive for about 10 minutes or 3

miles (5 km), then check the tire pressure

again. If the tire pressure has again dropped

below the specified level, stop driving the

vehicle and contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

NOTE

 Please give the empty sealant bottle to an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or dis-

pose of the sealant bottle according to regu-

lations for the disposal of chemical waste.

 To purchase a new tire sealant bottle, contact

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

How to change a tire (Vehi-

cles equipped with spare

tire)

WARNING

 The jack should not be used for any pur-

pose other than to change a tire.

 Never get under the vehicle or put any

portion of your body under the vehicle

while it is supported by the jack.

BK0212400US.book 11 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

How to change a tire (Vehicles equipped with spare tire)

8-12 For emergencies

6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench

ready.

(Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.)

N00849600344

The compact spare tire is stowed beneath the

floor board of the cargo area. It is designed to

save space in the cargo area. Its lighter weight

makes it easier to use if a flat tire occurs.

N00849700286

1. Lift up the floor board of the cargo area.

2. To remove the spare tire, remove the

installation clamp (A) by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

WARNING

 Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the

correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If

the vehicle moves while jacked up, the

jack could slip out of position, leading to

an accident.

NOTE

 The chocks shown in the illustration do not

come with your vehicle. It is recommended

that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep

them in the vehicle for use if needed.

 If chocks or blocks are not available, use

stones or any other objects that are large

enough to hold the wheel in position.

Spare tire information

Compact spare tire

WARNING

 Tires, including spare tire, degrade over

time with age even when they are not

being used. It is recommended that tires

over 6 years generally be replaced even if

damage is not obvious.

CAUTION

 While the compact spare tire is stowed, the

inflation pressure should be checked at least

once a month to assure that it remains at the

recommended inflation pressure. See the tire

and loading information placard attached to

the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load-

ing information placard” on page 11-3.

 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can

cause an accident. If you have no choice but

to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep

your speed down and avoid sudden steering

or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the

correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to

“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-14.

 The compact spare tire should be used only

temporarily. While the compact spare tire is

being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem will not function properly. Have the tire

replaced or repaired at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice as soon as possible.

 Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-

ing with the compact spare tire.

 Avoid sudden starting and braking when

driving with the compact spare tire.

 Do not drive through automatic car washes

and over obstacles that could possibly dam-

age the underside of your vehicle. Because

the compact spare tire is smaller than the

original tire, there is less clearance between

the ground and your vehicle.

 Because the compact spare tire is designed

only for your vehicle, do not use it on any

other vehicle.

 Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-

ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,

snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the

compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could

damage these parts or other parts on your

vehicle.

 Do not use tire chains with your compact

spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage

to your vehicle and loss of the chains.

To remove spare tire

CAUTION

BK0212400US.book 12 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

How to change a tire (Vehicles equipped with spare tire)

For emergencies 8-13

N00849800447

1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first

remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-

ers” on page 8-16). Then, loosen the

wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do

not remove the wheel nuts yet.

2. Place the jack under one of the jacking

points (A) shown in the illustration. Use

the jacking point closest to the tire you

wish to change.

3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange

portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top

of the jack.

NOTE

 The flat tire with a normal size wheel cannot

be stored beneath the floor board. Store the

flat tire in the cargo area.

To change a tire

WARNING

 Set the jack only at the positions shown

here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,

it could dent your vehicle or the jack

might fall over and cause personal injury.

 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-

face.

Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause

personal injury. Always use the jack on a

flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,

make sure there are no sand or pebbles

under the jack base.

NOTE

 Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body

near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack

slips out of position.

WARNING

BK0212400US.book 13 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

How to change a tire (Vehicles equipped with spare tire)

8-14 For emergencies

4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut

wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar

into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the

illustration.

Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until

the tire is raised slightly off the ground

surface.

5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut

wrench, then take the wheel off.

6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-

face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-

tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then

mount the spare tire.

WARNING

 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the

tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-

ous to raise the vehicle any higher.

 Do not get under your vehicle while using

the jack.

 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it

sitting on the jack for a long time. Both

are very dangerous.

 Do not use a jack except the one that came

with your vehicle.

 The jack should not be used for any pur-

pose other than to change a tire.

 No one should be in your vehicle when

using the jack.

 Do not start or run the engine while your

vehicle is on the jack.

 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires

that are still on the ground could turn and

make your vehicle fall off the jack.

CAUTION

 Handle the wheel carefully when changing

the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-

face.

WARNING

 Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem

(I) facing outward. If you cannot see the

valve stem (I), you have installed the

wheel backwards.

Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel

installed backwards can cause vehicle

damage and result in an accident.

BK0212400US.book 14 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

How to change a tire (Vehicles equipped with spare tire)

For emergencies 8-15

7. Install the wheel nuts with their tapered

ends facing inward, then tighten by hand

until the wheel is no longer loose.

8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground, by rotating the wheel

nut wrench counterclockwise.

9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the

illustration until each nut has been tight-

ened to the torque listed here.

65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m)

10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.

11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-

ommended tire pressure for your vehicle

is listed on the tire and loading informa-

tion placard attached to the driver’s door

sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to

“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-14.

CAUTION

 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or

the nuts or they will tighten too much.

Steel wheel

Aluminum wheel

CAUTION

 Never use your foot or a pipe extension to

apply added force to the wheel nut wrench

when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so,

you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and

damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts.

BK0212400US.book 15 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

How to change a tire (Vehicles equipped with spare tire)

8-16 For emergencies

N00850000175

Store the flat tire in the cargo area.

Reverse the removing procedure when stor-

ing the spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut

wrench.

Refer to “To remove the spare tire” on page

8-12 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.

N00849400225

Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it

into the notch provided in the wheel cover,

and pry the cover away from the wheel.

Using the same procedure at the other wheel

cover notches, work the wheel cover away

from the wheel to remove it completely.

1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel

cover notch (D).

CAUTION

 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can

cause an accident. If you have no choice but

to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep

your speed down and avoid sudden steering

or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the

correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to

“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-14.

 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-

cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the

wheel nuts to make sure that they have not

come loose.

 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving

after changing the tire, have the tire checked

for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

 Do not mix one type of tire with another or

use a different size from the one listed. This

would cause early wear and poor handling.

To store the flat tire or spare

tire, jack, bar and wheel nut

wrench

Wheel cover (if so equipped)

To remove

NOTE

 The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-

ful when prying it off.

CAUTION

 Trying to remove the wheel cover with only

your bare hands can seriously injure your

fingers.

To install

CAUTION

 Before installing the wheel cover to the

wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the

back of the wheel cover correctly engage the

ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from

coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that

has broken tabs.

BK0212400US.book 16 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Towing

For emergencies 8-17

2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover

into the wheel.

3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel

cover and hold them in place with both

knees.

4. Gently tap around the circumference of

the wheel cover at the top (H), then push

the wheel cover into place.

N00837000888

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to

have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-

vice.

When towing is required, transport the vehi-

cle using a tow truck.

Incorect towing equipment could damage

your vehicle.

There may be local regulations concerning

towing in your area.

Obey the regulations of the area where you

are driving your vehicle.

NOTE

 Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E)

provided on the reverse side to show the air

valve location.

Before installing the wheel cover to the

wheel, make sure that the opening with the

symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air

valve.

Towing

If your vehicle needs to be

towed

CAUTION

 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-

cle with a rope.

NOTE

 Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing.

These hooks are provided only for the pur-

pose of transporting the vehicle itself.

 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.

Do not tow CVT vehicles with this style.

BK0212400US.book 17 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Operation under adverse driving conditions

8-18 For emergencies

Set the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral)

position.

Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead

position with a rope or tie-down strap.

Release the parking brake.

Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)

position (manual transaxle) or the selector

lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position

(CVT).

N00837200750

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,

or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking

motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to

free it.

Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.

Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can

cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let

the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the

transaxle before trying again.

If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-

ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck

service.

Towing the vehicle by a tow

truck

CAUTION

 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow

truck using sling lift type equipment (Type

A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-

age the bumper and front end.

 Do not tow continuously variable transmis-

sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels

on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the

vehicle is towed like this, the continuously

variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not

reach all parts of the transmission, thus dam-

aging it.

If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E

equipment.

 If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or

damaged, transport the vehicle with the driv-

ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as

illustrated.

 If the vehicle is towed with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position or the operation

mode in ON and only the front wheels or

only the rear wheels raised off the ground

(Type B or C), the Active Stability Control

(ASC) may operate, resulting in an accident.

When towing the vehicle with the rear

wheels raised, turn the ignition switch to the

“ACC” position or put the operation mode in

ACC. When towing the vehicle with the

front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch

or the operation mode as follows.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key]

The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC”

position.

[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.

Towing with rear wheels off the

ground (Type B - M/T vehicles

only)

CAUTION

Towing a front-wheel drive vehi-

cle with front wheels off the

ground (Type C)

Operation under adverse

driving conditions

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

sand, mud or snow

BK0212400US.book 18 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Operation under adverse driving conditions

For emergencies 8-19

 When driving on a road covered with

snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains

cannot be used on your vehicle. There

may be state or local regulations about

using snow tires. Always check the regu-

lations in your local area before using

them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-17

and “Tire chains” on page 9-17.

 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts

or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the

brakes.

 Allow extra distance between your vehi-

cle and the vehicle in front of you, and

avoid sudden braking.

 If a skid occurs when the accelerator

pedal is depressed, take your foot off the

pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the

skid.

 Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock

braking system (ABS). Hold the brake

pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.

Do not pump the brake pedal which will

result in reduced braking performance.

 After parking on snowy or icy roads, it

may be difficult to move your vehicle due

to the brake being frozen. Depress the

accelerator pedal little by little to move

the vehicle when safe to do so.

 Drive as slow as possible when driving on

bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes etc.

WARNING

 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a

stuck position, make sure that there are no

people nearby. The rocking motion can

make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward

or backward, and injure any bystanders.

On wet roads

CAUTION

 Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper

than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt

by driving into flood water.

 When driving in rain, on water-covered

roads, or through a car wash, water could get

into the brake discs and make them fail tem-

porarily. In such cases, lightly press the

brake pedal to see if they are working prop-

erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly

several times while driving to dry the brake

pads or linings, then check them again.

 When driving in rain, a layer of water may

form between the tires and the road surface

(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip

on the road, making it difficult to steer or

brake properly. When driving on a wet road:

• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.

• Do not drive on worn tires.

• Always keep the tires at the correct infla-

tion pressures.

On snowy or icy roads

CAUTION

 Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.

The vehicle could start moving when it

breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in

an accident.

On a bumpy or rutted road

CAUTION

 Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-

holes can damage the tires and wheels.

Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-

inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-

age.

 The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and

other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:

• driven over a step (for example, at the

entrance or exit of a parking lot);

• parked too closely against a curb or parking

block, or by the side of a road with curb-

stones;

• driven on a steep slope.

BK0212400US.book 19 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

8-20 For emergencies

N00860600031

In the event of a collision causing frontal air-

bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-

tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the

engine.

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

WARNING

 Before attempting to restart the engine

after a collision, always inspect the ground

under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel

leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do

not restart the engine.

 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your

vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mit-

subishi Motors dealer after any collision.

BK0212400US.book 20 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Vehicle care and maintenance

Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-3

Engine hood .....................................................................................9-4

View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5

Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5

Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7

Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ...............................................9-9

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid

(if so equipped) ...........................................................................9-9

Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-9

Brake fluid .....................................................................................9-10

Battery ............................................................................................9-10

Tires ...............................................................................................9-12

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-18

Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-18

Parking brake .................................................................................9-18

Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-19

Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-19

General maintenance .....................................................................9-20

For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-21

Fusible links ...................................................................................9-22

Fuses ..............................................................................................9-22

Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-26

Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-31

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-32

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-33

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Service precautions

9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00937300387

Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-

serve its value and appearance as long as pos-

sible.

You can do some of the maintenance work

yourself, and the rest should only be per-

formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

If you discover a malfunction or other prob-

lem, have it corrected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility

of your choice.

This section describes the maintenance

inspections that you can do yourself, if you so

desire. Follow the instructions and precau-

tions for each procedure.

Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors

Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan

supplements your new vehicle warranties.

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

for details.

Only use the designated positions shown in

the illustration.

Service precautions

WARNING

 When checking or servicing the inside of

the engine compartment, be sure the

engine is stopped and has had a chance to

cool down.

 If you need to work in the engine compart-

ment with the engine running, be espe-

cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.

does not get caught in the fan, drive belts,

or other moving parts.

 The fan can turn on automatically even if

the engine is not running. Turn the igni-

tion switch to the “OFF” position or put

the operation mode in OFF to be safe

while you work in the engine compart-

ment.

 Do not smoke or allow open flames around

fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-

ble.

 Be extremely careful when working

around the battery. It contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

 Do not get under your vehicle while it is on

a jack.

Always use properly rated automotive

jack stands.

 Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-

als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice if you

have questions.

WARNING

If your vehicle is raised with a

garage jack

*- Front of the vehicle

Never use the rear

suspensions as a jack-

ing point.

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Catalytic converter

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

N00937400450

The catalytic converter requires you to use

unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will

destroy the emission-control effectiveness of

the converter.

Normally, the catalytic converter does not

require maintenance. However, it is important

to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-

verter to continue to work properly.

To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-

verter damage:

 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of

the type of recommended in the “Fuel

selection”.

 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of gas could damage

the catalytic converter.

 Do not try to start the engine by pushing

or towing the vehicle. If the battery is

weak or run down, use jumper cables to

properly start the engine.

 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug

wires disconnected or removed, such as

when performing diagnostic tests.

 Do not idle the engine for a long time if it

is idling roughly or otherwise obviously

malfunctioning.

 To prevent the catalytic converter from

being damaged from unburned gas, do not

race the engine when stopping the engine.

 Stop driving the vehicle if you think the

performance is noticeably low, or the

engine has a malfunction such as with the

ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop

driving immediately, slow down and drive

for only a short time. Have your vehicle

checked at an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice as soon as possible.

 In unusual situations involving major

engine problems, a burning odor may

indicate severe and abnormal catalytic

converter overheating. If this occurs, stop

in a safe place, shut the engine off and let

the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,

immediately take your vehicle to a dealer

or a repair facility of your choice for ser-

vice.

WARNING

 Set a garage jack only at the position

shown here. If the garage jack is set a

wrong position, it could damage your

vehicle and/or your vehicle might fall

from the jack causing injury or death.

 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-

face.

Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause

personal injury. Always use the jack on a

flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,

make sure there are no sand or pebbles

under the jack base.

Catalytic converter

CAUTION

 Damage to the catalytic converter can result

if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating

condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-

fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,

have it serviced promptly. Running your

vehicle when it is overheated may result in

damage to the converter and vehicle.

WARNING

 Do not park or run your vehicle in areas

where combustible materials such as dry

grass or leaves can come in contact with a

hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.

 Do not put undercoat paint on the cata-

lytic converter.

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Engine hood

9-4 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00937501575

Use the engine hood release lever (located

under the instrument panel near the driver’s

door) to unlock the engine hood.

Pull the lever toward you to release the

engine hood latch.

Release the lever and lift the engine hood.

Support the engine hood with the hood prop.

Insert the hood prop securely in the opening

under the hood marked with an arrow.

Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and

put it back in its retainer.

Slowly lower the engine hood about 8 inches

(20 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.

Engine hood

To open

WARNING

 Never use the release lever to unlatch the

engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.

 Do not drive your vehicle unless the

engine hood is locked.

NOTE

 To prevent damage to the engine hood and

wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting

position when you open the engine hood.

CAUTION

 Always insert the support prop into the hole

specially made for it. Propping the engine

hood at any other place could cause the prop

to slip out and lead to an accident.

 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is

lifted by a strong wind.

To close

CAUTION

 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers

when closing the engine hood.

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

View of the engine compartment

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-5

N00937600713

N00937702011

It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may

need to add oil between the recommended oil

change intervals. Before starting the engine,

check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.

To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,

wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way.

Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and

check the oil level by checking the upper sur-

face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go

above the line on the dipstick.

If the level does not reach the line which

shows the minimum amount of oil required,

remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve

cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.

 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed

before driving.

If you drive without the engine hood com-

pletely closed, it could open up while driv-

ing.

NOTE

 If this does not close the engine hood prop-

erly, drop it again from a slightly higher

position.

 Do not push down strongly on the engine

hood. Depending on how strongly or where

you push down, you could create a dent in

the vehicle body.

CAUTION

View of the engine compart-

ment

1- Engine oil level dipstick

2- Air cleaner filter

3- Battery

4- Brake fluid

5- Windshield and rear window washer

fluid reservoir

6- Engine oil filler cap

7- Radiator cap

8- Engine coolant reserve tank

Engine oil and oil filter

To check and refill engine oil

NOTE

 If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe

off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a

moment and then recheck the oil level by

checking the upper surface of the dipstick.

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Engine oil and oil filter

9-6 Vehicle care and maintenance

Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only

engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-

bol on the front of the container.

If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-

fication symbol, use an API classification SN

or higher oil with the following label.

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-

tainer and tells you two important things

about the oil.

Use engine oil with the proper thickness for

the outdoor temperatures where you will be

driving.

CAUTION

 Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of

oil pressure, which could damage the engine.

WARNING

 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-

age your skin. Prolonged and repeated

contact may cause serious skin disorders,

including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let

used oil touch your skin and wash thor-

oughly after working with it.

 Keep used oil out of the reach of children.

NOTE

 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced

by payload, engine speed, etc.

Good

 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the

vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for

example, repeated operation on rough roads,

in mountainous regions, on roads with many

uphill and downhill gradients, or over short

distances). Consequently, the oil will require

earlier replacement in accordance with the

schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-

TENANCE MANUAL”.

Engine oil identification mark

NOTE

ILSAC certification symbol

1- The upper part indicates the quality of

the oil.

2- The center part indicates the SAE grade

of the oil viscosity.

Recommended engine oil vis-

cosity

API service symbol

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Engine coolant

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-7

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic

Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel

economy and cold weather starting.

If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-

thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20

grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification

can be used.

However, Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20

Synthetic Engine Oil should be used at the

next oil change to maintain optimum fuel

economy and cold weather starting.

The oil filter should be replaced at the time or

mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

Only use high quality replacement filters on

this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-

tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters

require that the filter can withstand a pressure

of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi

oil filter is the best replacement filter.

Follow the installation instructions printed on

the filter.

N00937800597

The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets you

quickly see when you need to add coolant.

When the engine is cold, the level of the cool-

ant in the reserve tank should be between the

FULL and LOW marks. The radiator usually

stays full so there is no reason to remove the

radiator cap (B) except when you check the

coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze

coolant.

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides

excellent protection against corrosion and

rust formation on all metals, including alumi-

num, and prevents clogs in some parts of the

engine.

If you need to add coolant often, or if the

level in the reserve tank does not drop when

the engine cools, the cooling system should

be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-

cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer

or a repair facility of your choice for testing.

To replace the oil filter

Engine coolant

To check the coolant level

FULL

LOW

To add coolant

Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long

Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.

*: similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non-silicate, non-amine, non-

nitrate and non-borate coolant with long

life hybrid organic acid technology

CAUTION

 Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or

any engine coolants that contain them. Using

the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum

parts.

BK0212400US.book 7 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Air cleaner filter

9-8 Vehicle care and maintenance

The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre-

vent losing coolant, which may result in

engine damage. Only use a Genuine

Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved

equivalent.

 Do not overfill the reserve tank.

 Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap

that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow

from the reserve tank back to the radiator

when the engine cools down. If you need

to change the cap, use the exact same

kind.

 Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-

ator with the proper gauge, and only when

it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-

tents of the reserve tank must be protected

against freezing.

 Keep the front of the radiator and con-

denser clean.

 If the engine coolant temperature does not

rise after the engine is warmed-up, take

your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice to have the thermostat checked,

and replaced if necessary.

N00937900413

The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty

from use and not filter properly. Replace it

with a new filter using the schedule in the

“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL”.

1. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the

cover and take out the air cleaner filter.

2. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the

cover back on in its original position.

 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-

fers depending on the expected ambient tem-

perature.

Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration

of anti-freeze

Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentration

of anti-freeze

You can check the concentration level with a

gauge from an automotive supply store, or

your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or

service station can check it for you.

 Do not use water to adjust the concentration

of coolant.

 Do not top off the tank with plain water only.

Water by itself boils at a lower temperature

and does not stop rust or freezing. If the

water freezes, it will damage your cooling

system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause

corrosion and rust.

Radiator cap

CAUTION

WARNING

 Wait for the engine to cool down before

opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot

steam or boiling coolant could spray up

from the radiator and scald you.

Points to remember

Air cleaner filter

NOTE

 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom-

mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.

 Make sure that the connector is properly

reconnected.

 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make

sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover

are firmly set.

BK0212400US.book 8 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-9

N00938200181

Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is

checked, add oil to maintain the proper level,

if necessary.

Refill or change with the oil according to the

table below.

N00938101129

The continuously variable transmission

(CVT) should be maintained and serviced by

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice to obtain the

best performance and longest life. It is impor-

tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the

correct level.

Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine

CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-

mum transmission performance.

Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-

mission.

N00938601339

The windshield and rear window washer fluid

reservoir is in the engine compartment.

Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-

vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-

essary.

Open the reservoir cap and check the level of

washer fluid.

The washer fluid level should be kept approx-

imately 5 cm below the upper surface of the

reservoir.

When freezing weather is anticipated, flush

out the water in the reservoir by operating the

pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-

freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate

the system for a few seconds to flush out the

residual water.

CAUTION

 Take care not to scratch the engine air flow

sensor when removing the air cleaner cover.

Manual transaxle oil (if so

equipped)

Oil type

Lubricant

Mitsubishi Motors

Genuine NEW

MULTI GEAR OIL

ECO API Classifica-

tion GL-4

Viscosity range SAE 75W-80

Continuously variable

transmission (CVT) fluid

(if

so equipped)

Fluid type

CAUTION

 Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-

age the transaxle.

Special additives

Washer fluid

Upper surface

Full

BK0212400US.book 9 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Brake fluid

9-10 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00938700274

The fluid level must be between the “MAX”

and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.

The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the

brake pads, but this does not indicate any

abnormality.

The fluid in the master cylinder should be

checked when doing other work under the

engine hood. The brake system should also be

checked for leaks at the same time.

If the fluid level falls noticeably in a short

length of time, it indicates leaks from the

brake system.

If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or

DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly

sealed to keep dirt and water out.

N00939100943

The condition of the battery is very important

for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s

electrical system working properly. Check the

battery regularly.

N00901500072

The electrolyte level must be between the

limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill

it with distilled water as needed. The inside of

the battery is divided into several compart-

ments. Take the cap off of each compartment

and fill to the mark.

Do not fill above the top line because a spill

during driving could cause damage.

Brake fluid

To check the fluid level

MAX

MIN

Fluid type

CAUTION

 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,

mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This

will damage the seals.

 Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can

damage painted surfaces.

 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different

brands of brake fluid have different addi-

tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-

tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.

 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep

the brake fluid from evaporating.

Battery

Checking battery electrolyte

level

WARNING

 If the battery goes flat, be sure to check

the battery electrolyte level before con-

necting booster cables.

 After checking the battery electrolyte

level, make sure the caps are fitted

securely.

BK0212400US.book 10 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Battery

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-11

N00901600060

The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.

This has to do with its chemical and physical

properties and is why a very cold battery,

especially one with a low charge, will have a

hard time starting your vehicle.

It is recommended that you have your battery

and charging system checked by an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice before the start of cold

weather. If necessary, have it charged. This

will provide more reliable starting, and longer

battery life.

N00901701130

To disconnect the battery cable, stop the

engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal

first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-

nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)

terminal and then the negative (-) terminal,

before starting the vehicle.

 If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace

the battery.

During cold weather

Disconnection and connection

WARNING

NOTE

 Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-

necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-

nal of the battery.

 Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the

battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.

WARNING

 Never disconnect the battery while the

engine is running, or you could damage

the vehicle’s electrical parts.

 Never short-circuit the battery. This could

cause it to overheat and be damaged.

 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away

from the battery because the battery could

explode.

 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-

sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on

nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis-

color them. And if it gets on your skin or

in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind-

ness. Please observe the following han-

dling instructions:

• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or

other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft

cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of

water and neutral detergent then imme-

diately rinse the affected parts with

plenty of water.

• If electrolyte gets on your hands or

clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If

electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them

with water immediately and get immedi-

ate medical attention.

 Open doors and windows in any closed

space where you may be charging or

working with the battery.

 Always wear protective clothing and gog-

gles when working with the battery, or

have a skilled automobile technician do it.

 If you are quick-charging your battery,

first disconnect the battery cables.

 In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure

to disconnect the negative (-) terminal

first, and reconnect it last.

 Battery posts, terminals and related acces-

sories contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash hands after handling.

NOTE

 Check each battery terminal for corrosion.

You can stop more corrosion by washing

with a solution of baking soda and water.

Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or

tightening them.

WARNING

BK0212400US.book 11 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tires

9-12 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00939200566

It is important to familiarize yourself with the

following terms:

 Cold tire pressure:

• The measured pressure after the vehicle

has been parked for at least three hours,

• The measured pressure when the vehicle

is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after

having been parked for three hours.

 Maximum pressure: the maximum per-

missible cold tire inflation pressure for

this tire.

 Recommended inflation pressure: the

inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor-

mance.

 Intended outboard sidewall:

• The sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears manufac-

turer, brand, and/or model name molding

that is higher or deeper than the same

molding on the other sidewall of the tire,

• The outward facing sidewall of an asym-

metrical tire that has a particular side

that must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

 Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use

on passenger cars, multipurpose passen-

ger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross

vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000

pounds or less.

 Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by

its manufacturer as primarily intended for

use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose

passenger vehicles.

 Tread: portion of a tire that comes into

contact with the road.

 Tread rib: a tread section running circum-

ferentially around a tire.

 Tread separation: pulling away of the

tread from the tire carcass.

 Carcass: the tire structure, except tread

and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,

bears the load.

 Sidewall: portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

 Section width: the linear distance between

the exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations due to

labeling, decoration, or protective bands.

 Bead: the part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply

cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.

 Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

 Cord: the strands forming the plies in the

tire.

 Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the tire

beads are seated.

 Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the

bead seat.

 Check to see that the battery is securely

installed and cannot be moved. Also check

each terminal for tightness.

 If you will not be driving your vehicle for a

long period of time, remove the battery and

store it in a place where the battery fluid will

not freeze. The battery only should be stored

with a full charge.

 Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the

filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.

Tires

WARNING

 Driving with tires that are worn, damaged

or improperly inflated is dangerous.

These type tire conditions will adversely

affect vehicle performance.

These type tire conditions can also cause a

tread separation or blowout which may

result in an accident causing serious

injury or death.

 Tires, including spare tire, degrade over

time with age even when they are not

being used.

It is recommended that tires over 6 years

generally be replaced even if damage is

not obvious.

NOTE

BK0212400US.book 12 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tires

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-13

 Groove: the space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

EXAMPLE: P215/65R15

EXAMPLE: 95H

Maximum load indicates the maximum load

this tire is designed to carry.

Tire Markings

Size Designation

Passenger car tire size based on

U.S.A. design standards

215 Section width in millimeters (mm)

Aspect ratio in percent (%)

Ratio of section height to section

width of tire.

Construction code

• “R” means radial construction.

• “D” means diagonal or bias con-

struction.

15 Rim diameter in inches (in)

NOTE

 European/Japanese metric tire sizing is based

on European/Japanese design standards.

Tires designed to these standards have the

tire size molded into the sidewall beginning

with the section width. The letter “P” is

absent from this tire size designation. Exam-

ple: 215/65R15 96H.

 LT (Light Truck) -metric tire sizing is based

on U.S.A. design standards. The size desig-

nation for LT-metric tires is the same as for

P-metric tires except for the letters “LT” that

are molded into the sidewall preceding the

size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

 Temporary spare tires are high pressure com-

pact spares designed for temporary emer-

gency use only. Tires designed to this

standard have the letter “T” molded into the

sidewall preceding the size designation.

Example: T145/80D18 103M.

Service Description

Load index

A numerical code associated with

the maximum load a tire can carry.

Speed symbol

A symbol indicating the range of

speeds at which a tire can carry a

load corresponding to its load

index under certain operating con-

ditions.

The maximum speed correspond-

ing to the speed symbol should

only be achieved under specified

operating conditions. (i.e. tire pres-

sure, vehicle loading, road condi-

tions and posted speed limits)

Maximum Load

WARNING

 Overloading of your tire is dangerous.

Overloading can cause tire failure, affect

vehicle handling, and increase your stop-

ping distance. Use tires of the recom-

mended load capacity for your vehicle.

Never overload them.

BK0212400US.book 13 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tires

9-14 Vehicle care and maintenance

Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum

permissible cold tire inflation pressure for

this tire.

The TIN may be found on one or both sides

of the tire but the date code may only be on

one side. Look for the TIN on the outboard

side of tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the

TIN is not found on the outboard side then

you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1504

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-half

) times as well on the government course

as a tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and may depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variations in

driving habits, service practices and differ-

ences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces of asphalt

and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature can lead

to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-

sponds to a level of performance which all

passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

N00939300903

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for

the safe and satisfactory operation of your

vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause

problems in three major areas:

 Safety

Maximum Pressure

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT

Department of Transportation

This symbol certifies that the tire is

in compliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation tire

safety standards, and is approved

for highway use.

Code representing the tire manu-

facturing location. (2 digits)

ABCD

Code representing the tire size. (2

digits)

Code used by tire manufacturer. (1

to 4 digits)

Number representing the week in

which the tire was manufactured.

(2 digits)

Number representing the year in

which the tire was manufactured.

(2 digits)

Treadwear, Traction and Temper-

ature Grades

Treadwear

Traction

Temperature

Tire inflation pressures

BK0212400US.book 14 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tires

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-15

Too little pressure increases flexing in the

tire and can cause tire failure. Too much

pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability

to cushion shock. Objects on the road and

potholes could then cause tire damage that

may result in tire failure.

 Economy

The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven

wear patterns in the tire tread. These

abnormal wear patterns will reduce the

tread life, and the tire will have to be

replaced sooner.

Too little pressure also makes it harder for

the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.

 Ride comfort and vehicle stability

The superior riding experience built into

your vehicle partly depends on the correct

tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an

uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little

pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to

respond.

Unequal tire pressures can make steering

your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.

The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor-

mal driving conditions is listed on the placard

attached to the driver’s door sill.

(Refer to “Tire and loading information plac-

ard” on page 11-3.)

The recommended inflation pressures under

normal driving conditions should be used for

the tires listed below.

Tire pressures should be checked, and

adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.

Pressures should be checked more often

whenever weather temperatures change

severely, because tire pressures change with

outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed

are always “cold inflation pressure”.

Cold inflation pressure is measured after the

vehicle has been parked for at least three

hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

after having been parked for three hours.

Cold inflation pressure must not go above the

maximum values molded into the tire side-

wall. After driving several miles, your tire

inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14

to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.

Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the

specified cold pressure, or your tires will be

too low.

Check your tires each time you refuel. If one

tire looks lower than the others, check the

pressure for all of them.

You should also take the following safety pre-

cautions:

 Keep your tires inflated to the recom-

mended pressures. (See the tire and load-

ing information placard attached to the

driver’s door sill.)

 Stay within the recommended load limits.

 Make sure that the weight of any load in

your vehicle is evenly distributed.

 Drive at safe speeds.

 After filling your tires to the correct pres-

sure, check them for damage and air

leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the

valve stems.

N00939600430

Item Tire size Front Rear

Normal tire 165/65R14

240

kPa,

35 psi

240

kPa,

35 psi

Compact

spare wheel

(if so

equipped)

T115/70D14

420 kPa, 60

psi

Replacing tires and wheels

CAUTION

 Avoid using different size tires from the one

listed and the combined use of different

types of tires, as this can affect driving

safety.

Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.

BK0212400US.book 15 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tires

9-16 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00939700141

The following maintenance steps are recom-

mended:

 Check tire pressures regularly.

 Have regular maintenance done on the

wheel balance and front and rear suspen-

sion alignment.

 Rotate your tires regularly as described in

the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-16.

N00939800184

Tread wear indicators are built into the origi-

nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help

you know when your tires should be replaced.

Many states have laws requiring that you

replace your tires at this point.

These indicators are molded into the bottom

of the tread grooves and will appear when the

tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6

mm).

When the bands appear next to one another in

two or more places, replace your tires.

N00939900521

To even out the wear on your tires and make

them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-

tion recommends that you rotate your tires at

the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

However, the timing for tire rotation may

vary according to your vehicle condition,

road surface conditions, and your own per-

sonal driving habits. Any time you notice

unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-

sible.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,

damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal

wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-

sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,

wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe

braking.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to

find out the reason for uneven tread wear.

The first tire rotation is the most important

one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.

 If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-

sure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi

Motors Authorized wheels should be used.

Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks

and sensor damage, as it will not be possible

to install the tire pressure sensor properly.

Tire maintenance

CAUTION

Tread wear indicator

1- Location of the tread wear indicator

2- Tread wear indicator

NOTE

 Tire wear indicators can have different marks

and locations depending on the tire manufac-

turer.

Tire rotation

BK0212400US.book 16 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tires

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-17

N00940000418

In some areas of the country, snow tires are

required for winter driving. If snow tires are

required in your area, you must choose snow

tires of the same size and type as the original

tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires

should also be installed on all four wheels.

Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling

can be reduced.

Even where laws may permit it, snow tires

should not be operated at sustained speeds

over 75 mph (120 km/h).

N00940100116

CAUTION

 A compact spare tire (if so equipped) can be

installed temporarily in place of a tire that

has been removed during the tire rotation.

However, it must not be included in the regu-

lar tire rotation sequence.

Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation

direction

Front

Tires that have arrows showing rotation direc-

tion

Front

CAUTION

 If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the

correct direction of rotation, swap the front

and rear tires on the left-hand side of the

vehicle and the front and rear tires on the

right-hand side of the vehicle separately.

Keep each tire on its original side of the

vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure

the arrows point in the direction in which the

wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for-

ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the

wrong direction will not perform to its full

potential.

CAUTION

 Avoid the combined use of different types of

tires. Using different types of tires can affect

vehicle performance and safety.

Front

Snow tires

CAUTION

 If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-

sure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi

Motors Authorized wheels should be used.

Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks

and sensor damage, as it will not be possible

to install the tire pressure sensor properly.

Tire chains

CAUTION

 Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.

The clearance between the chains and the

body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-

ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-

aged.

BK0212400US.book 17 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)

9-18 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00940200090

To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn

off the engine and press the pedal until you

feel resistance.

Clutch pedal free play:

.4 to .6 inch (11 to 16 mm)

If the free play is not within these limits, take

your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice for adjustment.

N00940300336

To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn

off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-

eral times with your foot. Then press the

pedal down with your fingers until you first

feel resistance.

Brake pedal free play:

.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)

If the free play is not within these limits, take

your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice for adjustment.

N00940400252

Check the parking brake lever travel occa-

sionally. To check this, pull the lever up

slowly and count the number of clicks of the

ratchet.

Parking brake lever stroke:

7 to 9 notches (clicks)

(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with

the force of 200 N)

Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by

the ratchet after pulling.

Clutch pedal free play (if so

equipped)

Brake pedal free play

Parking brake

Parking brake lever stroke

WARNING

 Continued operation of the vehicle with

the parking brake lever out of adjustment

may result in the vehicle moving when

unattended.

BK0212400US.book 18 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Wiper blades

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-19

N00940700138

Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean

them regularly to remove deposits of salt and

road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild

detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the

blades and glass areas.

Replace the blades if they continue to streak

or smear.

If the blades are frozen to the windshield or

rear window, do not operate the wipers until

the ice has melted and the blades are freed,

otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

N00940800328

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-

control system that meets all the requirements

of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

and Environment Canada. The emission-con-

trol system is made of:

 a positive crankcase ventilation system

 an evaporative emission-control system

 an exhaust emission-control system

To be sure the emission-control system works

properly, have your vehicle inspected and

maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice. This should be done at the time or

mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

These, and all the other “general” mainte-

nance services listed in this manual, need to

be performed to keep your vehicle running

properly and reliably.

You should also have an inspection and ser-

vice any time you suspect a malfunction.

N00940900228

Spark plugs must fire properly for good

engine performance and emission-control.

Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.

Change them at the mileage listed in the

“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL”.

Wiper blades

NOTE

 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long

time. This wears out the rubber and can

scratch the glass.

During cold weather

Emission-control system

maintenance

NOTE

 To meet government regulations and pro-

mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped

with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).

The engine electronic control module that

controls OBD functions stores various data

(especially about the exhaust emissions).

This data will be erased if the battery cable is

disconnected, which could make a rapid

diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the

battery cable when the engine malfunction

indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or

“Check engine light”) is ON.

Spark plugs

NOTE

 Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine

specifications” on page 11-4 or plugs that are

exactly the same. Other plugs could cause

engine damage, performance problems or

radio noise.

BK0212400US.book 19 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

General maintenance

9-20 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00941000040

Check the hose surfaces for any heat and

mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-

cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat

sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check

all the hose connections, such as clamps and

couplings, to make sure they are secure and

that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or

damage, replace the hoses immediately.

N00950100050

Have the valve clearance checked at an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the

mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have

adjustments made by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

N00941300173

Check these regularly for damage or leaks in

the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel

tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay

special attention to the fuel lines closest to

high heat sources such as the exhaust mani-

fold.

N00941400187

If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-

aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-

luting the air.

Have the system checked at an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-

ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-

NANCE MANUAL”.

N00941500292

The next pages list the maintenance service

recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-

ration. In addition to the general maintenance

that needs to be performed at the times listed,

there are other parts which do not usually

need regular maintenance.

But, if any of these parts stops working prop-

erly, your vehicle performance could suffer.

Have these items checked if you notice a

problem with them.

If you have any questions, see your autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance.

N00941600059

Good brakes are essential for safe driving.

Check the brake pads for wear. For good

braking performance, replace the brake pads

with the same type pads as the originals.

N00941700076

Brake hoses and tubing should be checked

for:

 Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn

spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is

showing through any cracks or worn spots

in the rubber hose cover, the hose should

be replaced. The brakes can fail if the

hose wears through.

 Improper installation may cause twisting,

or wheel, tire or chassis interference.

Fuel hoses

Intake valve clearance

Fuel system (tank, pipe line and

connection, and fuel tank filler

cap)

WARNING

 If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,

do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-

ing from the ignition), flame or smoking

material could cause an explosion or fire.

Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

for assistance.

Evaporative emission control

system (except evaporative

emission canister)

General maintenance

Disc brake pads

Brake hoses

BK0212400US.book 20 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

For cold and snowy weather

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-21

N00941800077

Check the following parts for damage and

grease leaks:

 Ball joint boots of the front suspension

and steering linkage

 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft

N00942200111

The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas

from entering inside your vehicle is to have

the engine exhaust system properly serviced.

Have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and nearby body areas

for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo-

sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow-

ing:

 A change in the sound of the exhaust sys-

tem

 The smell of exhaust fumes inside the

vehicle

 The underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged

Also check the exhaust system each time the

vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,

or required service. Any open seams or loose

connections could let dangerous exhaust

fumes seep into the luggage and passenger

compartments.

 Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks

caused by corrosion or damage.

 Check the joints and connections for

looseness or exhaust gas leaks.

 Check the rubber hangers and brackets for

damage.

N00942500127

The hood lock release mechanism and hood

safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and

oiled when needed for easy movement and to

prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose

Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding

parts of the hood latch and release lever.

Work the grease into the hood lock mecha-

nism until all the movable surfaces are cov-

ered.

Also, put a light coat of the same grease on

the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.

N00942600102

The ventilation slots in front of the wind-

shield should be brushed clear after a heavy

snowfall so that the operation of the heating

and ventilation systems will not be impaired.

To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping

on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should

be treated with silicone grease.

It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-

handled spade in the vehicle during the win-

ter so that you can clear away snow if you get

stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping

Ball joint, steering linkage seals

and drive shaft boots

Exhaust system

WARNING

 Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s

exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these

fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.

Check for any of the following

conditions:

Hood lock release mechanism

and safety catch

For cold and snowy weather

Ventilation slots

Weatherstripping

Additional equipment (For

regions where snow is encoun-

tered)

BK0212400US.book 21 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Fusible links

9-22 Vehicle care and maintenance

snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for

the windshield, side and rear window are also

useful.

N00942700305

The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if

a large current attempts to flow through cer-

tain electrical systems.

In case of a melted fusible link, see your

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice for inspection

and replacement.

For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse

load capacities” on page 9-22.

N00942800902

To prevent damage to the electrical system

from short-circuiting or overloading, each

individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The

fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-

partment and in the engine compartment.

The fuse block in the passenger compartment

is located in front of the driver’s seat at the

position shown in the illustration.

In the engine compartment, the fuse block is

located as shown in the illustration.

While pressing the tab (A or B), pull up the

cover.

N00954801342

This fuse list shows the names of the electri-

cal systems and their fuse capacities.

There are spare fuses in the fuse block in the

engine compartment. Always replace a blown

fuse with one of the same capacity as the

original.

Fusible links

WARNING

 Fusible links must not be replaced by any

other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-

ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,

property destruction and serious or fatal

injuries at any time.

Fuses

Fuse block location

Passenger compartment

Engine compartment

Fuse load capacities

Type A

Type B

BK0212400US.book 22 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Fuses

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-23

 Some fuses may not be installed on your

vehicle, depending on the vehicle model

or specifications.

 The table above shows the main equip-

ment corresponding to each fuse.

Passenger compartment fuse loca-

tion table

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

1 Tail light (left) 7.5 A

2 Cigarette lighter 15 A

3 Ignition coil 10 A

4 Starter motor 7.5 A

5— — —

6— — —

7 Tail light (right) 7.5 A

Outside rearview

mirrors

7.5 A

9 Engine control unit 7.5 A

10 Control unit 7.5 A

11 Rear fog light 10 A

12 Door lock 15 A

Interior light (Dome

light)

15 A

14 Rear window wiper 15 A

15 Gauges 7.5 A

16 Relay 7.5 A

17 Heated seats 20 A

18 Option 10 A

Heated outside rear-

view mirrors

7.5 A

20 Windshield wiper 20 A

21 Back-up light 7.5 A

22 Defogger 30 A

23 Heater 30 A

24 — — —

25 Radio 10 A

Electronic con-

trolled unit

15 A

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

Engine compartment fuse location

table

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

SBF1 Radiator fan motor 40 A*

SBF2

Anti-lock braking

system

30 A*

SBF3 Ignition switch 40 A*

SBF4

Power window

control

40 A*

Type A

BK0212400US.book 23 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Fuses

9-24 Vehicle care and maintenance

*: Fusible link

 Some fuses may not be installed on your

vehicle, depending on the vehicle model

or specifications.

 The table above shows the main equip-

ment corresponding to each fuse.

*: Fusible link

 Some fuses may not be installed on your

vehicle, depending on the vehicle model

or specifications.

 The table above shows the main equip-

ment corresponding to each fuse.

The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,

10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fuses

burns out, substitute with the following fuse.

7.5 A: Outside rearview mirrors

10 A: Option

BF1 DC-DC (P/T) 30 A

BF2 DC-DC (AUDIO) 30 A

Headlight (low

beam) (left)

10 A

Headlight (low

beam) (right)

10 A

Headlight (high

beam) (left)

10 A

Headlight (high

beam) (right)

10 A

F5 Horn 10 A

F6 Front fog lights 15 A

Daytime running

lights

10 A

F8 — — —

F9 — — —

F10

Battery current

sensor

7.5 A

F11 — — —

F12

Stop lights (Brake

lights)

15 A

F13 Ignition coil 7.5 A

F14 Engine control 7.5 A

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

F15 Alternator 7.5 A

F16

Hazard warning

flasher

10 A

F17

Automatic trans-

axle

15 A

F18 Air conditioning 10 A

F19 ETV 15 A

F20 Starter 7.5 A

F21 CVT oil/pump 15 A

F22 Fuel pump 15 A

F23 Engine 20 A

F24

Automatic trans-

axle

7.5 A

#1 — Spare fuse 20 A

#2 — Spare fuse 30 A

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

No.

Sym-

bol

Electrical system

Capac-

ity

SBF1 PTC heater 40 A*

SBF2 PTC heater 40 A*

SBF3 PTC heater 40 A*

Type B

BK0212400US.book 24 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Fuses

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-25

15 A: Cigarette lighter

When using a substitute fuse, replace with a

fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-

ble.

N00954900131

1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off

the electrical item concerned to the fuse

and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position or put the operation mode in

OFF.

2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine

compartment fuse block.

3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove,

and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse

block.

4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the

matching tables, to check the fuse that is

related to the problem. If the fuse is not

blown, something else must be causing

the problem. Have the system inspected

by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity

securely into the appropriate slot.

Identification of fuse

Capacity Color

7.5 A Brown

10 A Red

15 A Blue

20 A Yellow

30 A

Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible

link type)

40 A Green (fusible link type)

Fuse replacement

B- Fuse is OK

C- Blown fuse

CAUTION

 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than

the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,

foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring

to heat up and could cause a fire.

 If the replacement fuse blows again after a

short time, have the electrical system

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice to

find and correct the cause.

BK0212400US.book 25 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Replacement of light bulbs

9-26 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00942900349

Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is

off. Do not touch the glass part of the new

bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your

skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy

the bulb when it gets hot.

N00943000132

The bulb should only be replaced with a new

bulb with the same rating and type. The type

and rating are listed on the base of the bulb.

N00950301929

Replacement of light bulbs

CAUTION

 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after

being turned off.

When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool

sufficiently before touching it. You could

otherwise be burned.

 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas

inside halogen light bulb is highly pressur-

ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a

halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.

 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare

hand, dirty glove, etc.

The oil from your hand could cause the bulb

to break the next time the headlights are

used.

If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with

alcohol and let it dry completely before

installing the bulb.

NOTE

 If you are unsure of how to carry out the

work as required, it is recommended that

these procedures be carried out by an autho-

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair

facility of your choice.

 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body

when removing a light and lens.

 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been

washed, the inside of the lens sometimes

becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same

phenomenon as when window glass mists up

on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-

tional problem.

When the light is switched on, the heat will

remove the fog. However, if water gathers

inside the light, please have it checked by an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

Bulb capacity

Outside

Description

Watt-

age

ANSI

Tr ad e No.

or Bulb

type

Front turn signal

light

27 W #1156NA

Headlight/Day-

time running light

(if so equipped)

60/55 W HB2

3 Parking light 5 W W5W

Front

BK0212400US.book 26 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Replacement of light bulbs

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-27

N00950400646

N00901800121

1. Pull out the connector (A), and then

remove the sealing cover (B).

Front fog light (if

so equipped)

55 W H11

Front side-marker

light

5 W W5W

Side turn signal

light (on fender, if

so equipped)

5 W —

Side turn signal

light (on outside

rearview mirror, if

so equipped)

——

NOTE

 It is not possible to repair or replace only the

bulb for the side turn signal light (on fender).

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice

when the light needs to be repaired or

replaced.

 The side turn signal light (on outside rear-

view mirror) uses an LED rather than the

bulb. For repair and replacement, contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

repair facility of your choice.

Description

Watt-

age

ANSI

Tra de No.

or Bulb

type

Item Wattage

ANSI

trade No.

or bulb

type

High-mounted

stop light

——

License plate

light

5 W W5W

3 Back-up light 21 W P21W

Rear turn signal

light

21 W P21W

Rear side-marker

light, and tail and

stop light

21/5 W P21/5W

Rear

NOTE

 The high-mounted stop light uses an LED

rather than the bulbs. For repair and replace-

ment, contact an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of your

choice.

Inside

Item Wattage

1 Cargo room light 5 W

2 Dome light 8 W

Headlights/Daytime running

lights (if so equipped)

BK0212400US.book 27 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Replacement of light bulbs

9-28 Vehicle care and maintenance

2. Unhook the spring (C), which secures the

bulb, and then remove the bulb (D).

3. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00943200352

The alignment of the headlights should be

checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

N00917300554

1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

3. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00943400370

1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.

*- Front of the vehicle

Headlight aim adjustment

Front side-marker lights

*- Front of the vehicle

Front turn signal lights

*- Front of the vehicle

BK0212400US.book 28 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Replacement of light bulbs

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-29

2. Remove the bulb from the socket by turn-

ing it counterclockwise while pressing in.

3. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00917300567

1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

3. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00943600763

1. To create enough work space, turn the

steering wheel all the way in the direction

opposite to the side you wish to replace.

2. Remove the clips/bolts (A) to turn up the

cover (B).

3. While pressing the tab (C), pull out the

connector (D).

Parking lights

*- Front of the vehicle

Front fog lights (if so equipped)

BK0212400US.book 29 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Replacement of light bulbs

9-30 Vehicle care and maintenance

4. Turn the bulb (E) counterclockwise to

remove it.

5. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00943700490

1. Open the liftgate.

(Refer to “Liftgate” on page 5-27.)

2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light

unit.

3. Move the light unit toward the rear of the

vehicle to unfix the notch (B) and pin (C).

4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to

remove it.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket by turn-

ing it counterclockwise while pressing in.

NOTE

 When refitting each of the clips, first insert

part (F) of the clip into the hole and then

press part (G) into it.

Rear combination lights

D- Back-up light

E- Rear turn signal light

F- Rear side-marker light, and tail and

stop light

BK0212400US.book 30 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Vehicle care precautions

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-31

6. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00944000403

1. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light

unit and remove the light unit.

2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to

remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.

N00945100166

In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,

perform regular maintenance using the proper

materials and procedures. Be sure to use only

those materials and procedures that meet your

local environmental pollution control regula-

tions. Choose the materials you will use care-

fully, to be sure that they do not contain

corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an

authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help

in choosing these materials.

NOTE

 When mounting the lamp unit, align the

notch (G) and pin (H) on the lamp unit with

the clip (I) and hole (J) in the body.

License plate light

Vehicle care precautions

BK0212400US.book 31 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle

9-32 Vehicle care and maintenance

These can all be dangerous, and they all can

damage your vehicle.

N00945200095

After washing the inside of your vehicle with

any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-

lated area.

N00945300142

1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth

soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap

and water.

2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,

wring it out well, and wipe off all the

soap.

N00945500128

1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-

cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and

keep the interior clean.

Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean

the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic

leather should be cleaned with an appro-

priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be

cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a

3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm

water.

2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum

cleaner and remove any stains with carpet

cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by

lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth

and spot remover.

CAUTION

 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some

are poisonous and others are highly flamma-

ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their

fumes in a closed space. When you use any-

thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be

sure to follow the instructions. Always open

your vehicle doors or windows when you’re

cleaning the inside. Never use the following

chemicals to clean your vehicle:

• Gasoline

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Benzine

• Kerosene

• Naphtha

• Acetone

• Turpentine

• Paint Thinner

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

Cleaning the inside of your

vehicle

CAUTION

 Do not use organic substances (solvents,

benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or

alkaline or acidic solutions.

These chemicals can cause discoloring,

staining or cracking of the surface.

If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make

sure their ingredients do not include the sub-

stances mentioned above.

NOTE

 Always read the instructions on the cleaner

label.

Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and

flocked parts

NOTE

 Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-

tectants containing silicones or wax.

Such products, when applied to the instru-

ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-

tions on the windshield and obscure vision.

Also, if such products get on the switches of

the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-

ure of these accessories.

Upholstery

BK0212400US.book 32 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-33

N00945600187

1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a

soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen-

tle soap and water.

2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,

wring it out well, and wipe off all the

soap.

3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-

tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-

face.

N00945700058

To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often

and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your

vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.

N00945800033

Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings,

tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other

foreign matters can damage the finish on your

vehicle.

Generally, the longer any foreign material

stays on the finish, the worse the damage.

Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-

ever the finish gets soiled.

N00945900630

Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust

picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-

faces can damage the paint and body of your

vehicle if left on.

Frequent washing and waxing is the best way

to protect your vehicle from this damage.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with

water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of

clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,

wash the vehicle from top to bottom.

Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.

Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham-

ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,

carefully clean the joints and flanges of the

doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to

remain.

NOTE

 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat

upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush

over the surface in one direction.

Genuine leather (if so equipped)

NOTE

 If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it

with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew

may grow.

 The genuine leather surface can be damaged

if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber

brush.

 Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,

alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents

can discolor the genuine leather surface and

should not be used.

 Genuine leather can mildew if not kept

clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.

 The genuine leather surface may harden and

shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight

for long hours. When your vehicle is parked,

place it in the shade as much as possible.

 When the temperature of the vehicle interior

rises in summer, vinyl products left on the

genuine leather seat may deteriorate and

stick to the seat.

Cleaning the outside of your

vehicle

Foreign material

NOTE

Washing

CAUTION

 When washing the underside of your vehicle

or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-

tect your hands.

 Never spray or splash water on the electrical

parts in the engine compartment. This may

damage them. Be careful also when washing

the underbody to ensure that water does not

enter the engine compartment.

BK0212400US.book 33 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

9-34 Vehicle care and maintenance

Salt and other chemicals spread on winter

roads in some geographical areas can have a

detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.

You should flush the underbody with a high

pressure hose every time you wash the out-

side of your vehicle.

Take special care to remove mud or other

debris which could trap and hold salt and

moisture.

After washing your vehicle, wipe off all

waterdrops from the rubber parts around the

doors to prevent the doors from freezing.

N00946000234

Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or

when water does not bead up on the paint.

Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax

on the painted surfaces. After the wax has

dried, polish with a dry soft cloth.

Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.

You should wax when the painted surfaces

are cool.

N00946100046

If painted surfaces have been severely dam-

aged and lost their original luster and color

tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine

polishing compound. Avoid limiting your

polishing to the damaged surface only; polish

a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing

cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush

the compound from the surface and apply a

coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.

 Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-

ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the

paint surface and make it dull.

Scratches are more noticeable on darker col-

ored vehicles.

 Some hot water washing equipment uses

high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.

Because hot water can damage plastics parts

and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you

do the following when using such equip-

ment:

• Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches

(70 cm) away from the vehicle body.

• When washing around the door glass, hold

the nozzle at a distance of more than 28

inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the

glass surface.

 Make sure to do the following when using an

automatic car wash, with help from either

this manual or the car wash operator, to

avoid damaging your vehicle:

• Fold the outside rearview mirrors.

• Remove the antenna.

• Tape the wiper arm assembly.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a rear

spoiler, check with the car wash operator

before using the car wash.

During cold weather

CAUTION

NOTE

 When the door is frozen, opening it by force

may tear off or crack the rubber gasket

installed around the door. Pour warm water

to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe

off the water after opening the door. To pre-

vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the

doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-

cant.

Waxing

CAUTION

 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds

should not be used. These waxes remove rust

and stain effectively from the paintwork, but

are harmful to the finish of the paint, because

they also remove paint/clearcoat.

They are also harmful to other glossy sur-

faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.

 Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or

paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt

from the vehicle surface.

 Do not put wax on the areas having black

matte coating because it can cause uneven

discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get

wax on them, wipe the wax off right away

with a soft cloth and warm water.

Polishing

BK0212400US.book 34 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-35

N00946200092

Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat

should be touched up as soon as possible with

touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.

Check body areas facing the road or the tires

carefully for damage to the paint caused by

flying stones, etc. The paint code number for

your vehicle can be found on the vehicle

information code plate on the front passenger

door sill.

N00946300194

Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.

If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black

rough surface of the bumper, molding or

lights, the surface may appear white in color.

In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water

and a soft cloth or chamois.

N00946400052

To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome

parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and

apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the

chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a

commercially available chrome polish.

N00946500183

1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge.

2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can-

not be removed easily with water.

Rinse off the detergent after washing the

wheel.

3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois

leather or a soft cloth.

N00946600054

The window glass can usually be cleaned

using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner

can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead

insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it

dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.

N00946700068

Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove

grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper

blades.

Replace the wiper blades when they no longer

clean the windshield and rear window prop-

erly.

Damaged paint

Cleaning plastic parts

CAUTION

 Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough

scrubber as these may damage the plastic

surface.

 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-

ishing powder) which may damage the plas-

tic surface.

 Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-

line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases,

paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-

trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,

cracks, or discoloration.

If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe

them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a

mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse

them immediately with water.

Chrome parts

Aluminum wheels (if so equipped)

CAUTION

 Do not use a brush or other hard implement

on the wheels.

 Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-

sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing

so could cause the coating on the wheels to

peel or become discolored or stained.

 Do not directly apply hot water using a steam

cleaner or by any other means.

 Contact with seawater or road salt used for

de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such

substances as soon as possible.

Window glass

Wiper blades

BK0212400US.book 35 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

9-36 Vehicle care and maintenance

N00947000071

Never spray or splash water on the electrical

accessories in the engine compartment. This

puts the engine at risk of being damaged.

Do not bring the circumferential parts, the

plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-

ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may

crack, stain or discolor them.

If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,

chamois or the like and an aqueous solution

of neutral detergent then immediately rinse

the affected parts with plenty of water.

Engine compartment

BK0212400US.book 36 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2

Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

N01047100171

This information is provided in compliance

with the requirements of the National High-

way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-

ment of Transportation. It provides the

purchasers and/or prospective purchasers

with information on reporting safety defects.

DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle

tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades. The spe-

cific grade rating in each grade category is

shown on the side wall of the tires on your

vehicle.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-half

) times as well on the government course

as a tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and may depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variations in

driving habits, service practices and differ-

ences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces of asphalt

and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature can lead

to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-

sponds to a level of performance which all

passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

N01047201528

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors

North America, Inc.

Consumer information (For

vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Uniform tire quality grading

Treadwear

Traction AA, A, B, C

WARNING

 The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature A, B, C

WARNING

 The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination,

can cause heat buildup and possible tire

failure.

Reporting Safety Defects

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Reporting Safety Defects

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become

involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or Mit-

subishi Motors North America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

You can also obtain other informa-

tion about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

To contact Mitsubishi Motors North

America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or

write to:

If you live in Canada, and you

believe that your vehicle has a safety

defect, you should immediately

notify Transport Canada, in addition

to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales

of Canada, Inc. You may write to:

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of

Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or

write to:

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of

Caribbean, Inc.

call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:

To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

NHTSA Headquarters

1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE

West Building

Washington, DC 20590

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

Mitsubishi Motors North Amer-

ica, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

P.O. Box 6400

Cypress, CA 90630-0064

For vehicles sold in Canada

Transport Canada

330 Sparks Street

Tower C

Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-

ada, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

P.O. Box 41009

4141 Dixie Road

Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9

For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-

bean, Inc.

Customer Service Department

P.O. Box 192216

SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216

For vehicles sold in Guam

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Important facts to know in case of an accident

10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

call (671)649-3673 or write to:

To contact Triple J Motors

call (670)234-7133 or write to:

To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.

call 684(699)9140 or write to:

N01047300232

We hope you will never be involved in an

accident, but there is always that potential

danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and

drive safely.

 Remain calm.

 Check for injuries. Report all injuries to

the police, and, if necessary, call for an

ambulance.

 Record all the details of the accident. This

will provide you with accurate records of

the accident for discussions with your

insurance company and other persons

who may be acting on your behalf.

 Understand your repair estimate before

approving repairs.

 Choosing the repair shop and the brands

of parts that they use on your vehicle is

your decision.

 Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.

Many times, to save money, your insur-

ance company will recommend imitation

parts that do not meet the original specifi-

cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance

or workmanship.

The strength and integrity built into your

Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific

design referred to as “Energy Management”.

Individual body parts are designed to act as

one unit in the event of an accident. Shock

waves are absorbed by protective panels or

are channeled around the passenger compart-

ment. This important feature is possible

because high tensile steel is used in

Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, some-

thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manu-

facturers of imitation parts. All Genuine

Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets

are designed and constructed as important

protection features in the event of an acci-

dent. By replacing body parts with non-Genu-

ine Mitsubishi Motors parts, your vehicle

may no longer meet original equipment spec-

ifications.

Triple J Enterprises, Inc.

P.O. Box 6066

TAMUNING

GUAM 96931

For vehicles sold in Saipan

Triple J Motors

P.O. Box 500487

SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

For vehicles sold in American

Samoa

Pacific Marketing, Inc.

P.O. Box 698

PAGO PAGO,

AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799

Important facts to know in

case of an accident

In the event of an accident

Key information to discuss with

your insurance company

Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-

tection

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Important facts to know in case of an accident

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the

country, State Insurance Commissioners have

begun considering rules on the use of non-

OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops

will have to disclose to the consumer when

they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-

ulations are not consistent on this point,

remember you have a choice. So, if you want

genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may

have to specifically request them. Make cer-

tain your insurance company understands

imitations are not to be used in the repair of

your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine

Mitsubishi Motors parts.

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards

you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

replacements parts are your guarantee that

your vehicle will have all the technological

advantages and maintain the style and protec-

tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.

Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi

Motors parts.

Consumer rights (For vehicles

sold in U.S.A.)

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Specifications

Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3

Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-3

Engine specifications .....................................................................11-4

Battery ............................................................................................11-4

Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5

Capacity .........................................................................................11-5

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Vehicle labeling

11-2 Specifications

N01147400742

Keep a record of the chassis number and

vehicle identification number. Such informa-

tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen.

The vehicle emission control information

label is affixed on the underside of the engine

hood.

The vehicle identification number is stamped

on the plate riveted to the left front corner of

the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of

the vehicle through the windshield.

The air conditioning label is affixed on the

inside panel of the engine hood.

The vehicle information code plate is located

on the front passenger door sill.

The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-

head as shown in the illustration.

Vehicle labeling

1 - Vehicle emission control

information label

2 - Vehicle identification num-

ber plate

3 - Air conditioning label

4 - Vehicle information code

plate

Chassis number

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Vehicle dimensions

Specifications 11-3

The engine serial number is stamped on the

cylinder block as shown in the illustration.

N01148100616

The tire and loading information placard is

located on the driver’s door sill.

N01148200242

The certification label is located on the

driver’s door sill.

N01147501577

N01147600917

Engine serial number

*- Front of the vehicle

Tire and loading information

placard

Certification label

Vehicle dimensions

Overall length 148.8 in (3,780 mm)

Overall width 65.6 in (1,665 mm)

Overall height 59.4 in (1,510 mm)

Wheel base 96.5 in (2,450 mm)

Vehicle weights

Item M/T CVT

Gross vehicle weight rating 2,910 lb (1,320 kg) 3,020 lb (1,370 kg)

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Engine specifications

11-4 Specifications

GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle

GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle

Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants

N01147700514

N01147800296

Battery is a 12 volt type.

Gross axle weight rating

Front 1,609 lb (730 kg)

Rear 1,477 lb (670 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)

Seating capacity 5 persons

Engine specifications

Engine model 3A92

Engine displacement

72.8 CID (1,193 cm

)

No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-3

Bore 2.95 in (75.0 mm)

Stroke 3.54 in (90.0 mm)

Compression ratio 10.5:1

Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C)

Spark plugs NGK LZFR5BI-11

Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)

Firing order 1-3-2

Item M/T CVT

Battery

55D23L (356CCA/99RC)

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Tires and wheels

Specifications 11-5

N01147900747

PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation

holes)

N01148002130

Tires and wheels

Tire 165/65R14

Wheel

Size 14 x 4 1/2J

PCD 3.93 in (100 mm)

Offset 1.81 in (46 mm)

NOTE

 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for details on the combination used on

your vehicle.

 These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions

described in this owner’s manual.

Capacity

Item Capacity Lubricants

Fuel

(approximate)

9.2 gal (35 L) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2

Engine oil

Oil pan 2.9 qt (2.8 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-

burst” symbol) on the container.

If these oils are not available, an API classification SN or

higher can be used.

Oil filter .21 qt (0.2 L)

Manual transaxle 1.7 qt (1.6 L)

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO

API classification GL-4 SAE 75W-80

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.4 qt (7.0 L)

Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on

page 9-9.

Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4

Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2

Engine coolant

{Includes .53 qt (0.5 L) in reserve

tank}

M/T 4.2 qt (4.0 L)

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium

or equivalent*

CVT 4.8 qt (4.6 L)

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Capacity

11-6 Specifications

*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-

nology

Washer fluid 2.6 qt (2.5 L) —

Refrigerant (air conditioning)

Refer to the “Air con-

ditioning label” on

page 11-2.

HFC-134a

Item Capacity Lubricants

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Alphabetical index

12-1

Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-5

Active stability control (ASC).............. 5-49

Air bag .............................................. 4-21

Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8

Air conditioning

Automatic air conditioning .............. 7-11

Important air conditioning operating tips..

7-17

Manual air conditioning .................... 7-7

Air purifier......................................... 7-18

Aluminum wheels............................... 9-35

Antenna

Roof antenna.................................. 7-41

Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-46

Assist grip........................................ 5-110

Audio

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with

CD player .................................... 7-18

Error codes..................................... 7-38

Handling of compact discs............... 7-40

Automatic air conditioning .................. 7-11

Back-up light

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive

shaft boots ....................................... 9-21

Battery .............................................. 9-10

Charging system warning light ........ 5-73

Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-10

Disconnection and connection ......... 9-11

During cold weather ....................... 9-11

Specification.................................. 11-4

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface ..................... 5-81

Bottle holders.................................... 5-108

Brake

Fluid ............................................. 11-5

Brake assist system............................. 5-46

Braking ............................................... 6-5

Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-46

Hose ............................................. 9-20

Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-45

Parking brake................................. 5-31

Pedal............................................. 5-44

Pedal free play ............................... 9-18

Power brakes ................................. 5-44

Service brake ................................. 5-44

Warning lights ............................... 5-72

Break-in recommendations.................... 5-2

Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-26

California Perchlorate Materials

Requirements..................................... 3-7

Capacities .......................................... 11-5

Card holder ...................................... 5-105

Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10

Cargo room light

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27

Catalytic converter................................ 9-3

Certification label ............................... 11-3

Charging system warning light............. 5-73

Child restraint systems ........................ 4-14

Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-27

Cleaning

Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-32

Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-33

Clutch

Pedal free play................................ 9-18

Consumer information......................... 10-2

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)...

5-39

Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-5

Selector lever operation................... 5-40

Selector lever positions.................... 5-41

Convenience hook............................. 5-109

Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-5

Cruise control..................................... 5-52

Cup holders...................................... 5-108

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Alphabetical index

12-2

Daytime running lights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Defogger (rear window) ...................... 5-80

Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door

windows)................................ 7-10, 7-16

Dimensions........................................ 11-3

Dimmer (high/low beam change) ......... 5-76

Disc brake pads .................................. 9-20

Dome light

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27

Door-ajar warning buzzer.................... 5-74

Door-ajar warning light....................... 5-74

Doors

Lock.............................................. 5-24

Power door locks............................ 5-26

Driving during cold weather .................. 6-4

Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2

Electric power steering system (EPS) ... 5-48

Electric rear window defogger switch... 5-80

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting

system)..................................... 5-3, 5-20

Emission-control system maintenance .. 9-19

Engine

Compartment................................... 9-5

Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-5

High coolant temperature warning light....

5-73

Hood............................................... 9-4

Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-5

Overheating..................................... 8-4

Serial number ................................. 11-2

Specification................................... 11-4

Engine hood ........................................ 9-4

Engine switch ..................................... 5-13

Error codes ......................................... 7-38

Exhaust system ................................... 9-21

Floor mat............................................. 6-2

Fluid

Brake fluid ..................................... 11-5

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

fluid...................................... 9-9, 11-5

Engine coolant......................... 9-7, 11-5

Manual transaxle............................. 11-5

Washer fluid............................ 9-9, 11-5

Fluid capacities and lubricants.............. 11-5

Free-hand advanced security transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key) ................................... 5-9

Front fog lights

Bulb capacity.................................. 9-26

Indicators ....................................... 5-71

Replacement .................................. 9-29

Switch ........................................... 5-77

Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-3

Front side-marker lights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Replacement .................................. 9-28

Front turn signal light

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Replacement .................................. 9-28

Fuel

Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3

Fuel economy................................... 6-2

Fuel hoses...................................... 9-20

Fuel remaining warning display ....... 5-66

Fuel selection ................................... 3-2

Tank capacity................................. 11-5

Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-20

Fuel remaining display........................ 5-66

Fuses ................................................. 9-22

Fusible links....................................... 9-22

General maintenance

Maintenance................................... 9-20

General vehicle data............................ 11-3

Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6

Glove compartment........................... 5-108

BK0212400US.book 2 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Alphabetical index

12-3

Hazard warning flasher switch ............. 5-77

Hazard warning lights ......................... 5-71

Head restraints...................................... 4-7

Headlights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Dimmer ......................................... 5-76

Headlight flasher ............................ 5-76

Switch ........................................... 5-74

Heater without air conditioning function . 7-4

High beam indicator............................ 5-71

High coolant temperature warning light 5-73

High-mounted stop light

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Hill start assist.................................... 5-45

Hood lock release mechanism and safety

catch................................................ 9-21

Hook

Convenience hook ........................ 5-109

Horn switch........................................ 5-81

If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2

Ignition switch.................................... 5-35

Important facts to know in case of an accident

10-4

Indicator and warning light package..... 5-70

Indicators .......................................... 5-71

Information display ............................ 5-63

Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-32

Instrument panel light dimmer control.. 5-65

Interior lights .................................... 5-106

Jack

Garage jack up position..................... 9-2

Storage............................................ 8-5

Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2

Key slot............................................. 5-19

Keyless entry system .................... 5-6, 5-21

Keys ................................................... 5-2

Labeling ............................................ 11-2

License plate light

Bulb capacity................................. 9-26

Replacement.................................. 9-31

Liftgate ............................................. 5-27

Link System....................................... 5-81

Loading information............................. 6-6

Lubricants.......................................... 11-5

Malfunction indicator light .................. 5-72

Manual air conditioning......................... 7-7

Manual transaxle................................. 5-38

Oil.......................................... 9-9, 11-5

Shift points..................................... 5-38

Manual window control....................... 5-28

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle..

3-5

Multi-information display.................... 5-62

Octane rating........................................ 3-2

Oil

Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-5

Manual transaxle oil................. 9-9, 11-5

Oil pressure warning light.................... 5-73

Operation mode .................................. 5-14

Operation under adverse driving conditions..

8-18

Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-33

Overheating.......................................... 8-4

Parking ................................................ 6-5

BK0212400US.book 3 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Alphabetical index

12-4

Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-18

Parking brake ............................ 5-31, 9-18

Parking lights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Replacement .................................. 9-29

Polishing............................................ 9-34

Power brakes...................................... 5-44

Power outlet..................................... 5-106

Power windows .................................. 5-29

Puncture (Tire changing)..................... 8-11

Radio

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with

CD player .................................... 7-18

General information about your radio 7-42

Rear combination lights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Replacement .................................. 9-30

Rear seats ............................................ 4-5

Rear shelf panel................................ 5-109

Rear side-marker lights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Replacement .................................. 9-30

Rear turn signal light

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Replacement .................................. 9-30

Rear-view camera............................... 5-60

Rearview mirror

Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-32

Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-33

Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-26

Replacing tires and wheels................... 9-15

Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2

Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4

Seat belts............................................. 4-8

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-12

Child restraint systems..................... 4-14

Front passenger seat belt warning light.....

4-11

Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-20

Seat belt extender............................ 4-12

Seat belt force limitter system .......... 4-14

Seat belt instructions ........................ 4-9

Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-13

Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-12

Seats ................................................... 4-2

Front seats....................................... 4-3

Head restraints................................. 4-7

Heated seats..................................... 4-4

Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2

Service brake...................................... 5-44

Service precautions .............................. 9-2

Side turn signal light

Bulb capacity.................................. 9-26

Snow tires.......................................... 9-17

Spark plugs ........................................ 9-19

Starting the engine .............................. 5-36

Steering

Electric power steering system (EPS) 5-48

Steering wheel height adjustment ..... 5-32

Stop lights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Replacement .................................. 9-30

Storage spaces.................................. 5-107

Sun visors ........................................ 5-105

Supplemental Restraint System............ 4-21

How the Supplemental Restraint System

works .......................................... 4-23

Maintenance service ....................... 4-35

Tail light

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-26

Replacement .................................. 9-30

Tank capacity..................................... 11-5

Tire

Inflation pressures .......................... 9-14

Maintenance................................... 9-16

Quality grading .............................. 10-2

Replacing tires and wheels .............. 9-15

Rotation......................................... 9-16

Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5

Snow tires...................................... 9-17

BK0212400US.book 4 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Alphabetical index

12-5

To change a tire.............................. 8-11

Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-16

Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-56

Tire repair kit ....................................... 8-6

Tires.................................................. 9-12

Tire and loading information placard 11-3

Tire chains ..................................... 9-17

Tools ................................................... 8-5

Storage ............................................ 8-5

Towing .............................................. 8-17

Trailer towing..................................... 6-10

Turn signal light

Indicators....................................... 5-71

Lever............................................. 5-76

USB input terminal ........................... 5-101

How to connect a USB memory device....

5-101

How to connect an iPod................. 5-102

Vanity mirror ................................... 5-105

Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-31

Vehicle dimensions............................. 11-3

Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2

Vehicle preparation before driving.......... 6-3

Vehicle weights.................................. 11-3

Vents .................................................. 7-2

Warning lights ................................... 5-72

Washer

Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-5

Rear window washer ...................... 5-79

Switch................................... 5-78, 5-79

Washing ............................................ 9-33

Waxing ............................................. 9-34

Weights............................................. 11-3

Wheel

Covers........................................... 8-16

Specification.................................. 11-5

Wiper

Rear window wiper ........................ 5-79

Switch................................... 5-78, 5-79

Wiper blades.................................. 9-19

BK0212400US.book 5 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

BK0212400US.book 6 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

N09348201045

NOTE

Name of Owner Date of Purchase

Address of Owner Model of Vehicle

Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number

Maintenance record

Service Performed Date

Kilometers

Miles

Inspection and Maintenance Item

BK0212400US.book 1 ページ２０１４年４月１日　火曜日　午後２時２１分

Mitsubishi 2015 Mirage Car

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Mitsubishi 2015 MIRAGE Questions and Answers

Related Products

Pac MITK890 1995-2006 Mitsubishi Car Stereo Installation Kits

MITSUBISHI 2012 Galant Car

Mitsubishi 2017 i-MiEV Car

MITSUBISHI 2012 Lancer SE AWC Car

Mitsubishi 2011 Lancer Cars